Maintenance, Start-up and

Operation Manual
PLANT: CBI JOB: CBI DOC. N:
PUENTE NUEVO POWER PLANT 7.1627 7.1627-INO-001

CLIENT: DESCRIPTION: N. 2 DESOX HOT AIR FAN (DHAF) TYPE CHA 54 M

ENEL N. 2 RECIRCULATING GAS FAN (RGF) TYPE XB 212
Rev. Descrizione Redatto Controllato Approvato Data
0 ISSUED LT FT FT 26/07/07
1 REVISED LT FT FT 09/09/08

ESITO SUPERVISIONE
Supervision Outcome

DATA Issue ESAMINATO COLLABORAZIONI CONTROLLATO APPROVATO EMESSO

REV
Date Scope Supervised by Co-operations Checked by Approved by Issued by

Documento / Document no Indice Sicurezza

Security Index

DIVISIONE GENERAZIONE ED ENERGY PBPNU59990 Uso Aziendale / P

MANAGEMENT
AREA TECNICA SVILUPPO E REALIZZAZIONE IMPIANTI
INOLTRO A GEM / SRI [ X ] PER APPROVAZIONE [ ] PER INFORMAZIONE [ ] NON RICHIESTO
GEM / SRI submittal For approval For information only Not requested

SISTEMA AGC TIPO DOCUMENTO KO DISCIPLINA G FILE PBPNU5999001

System Document type Discipline File
Lapprovazione di GEM / SRI limitata agli aspetti relativi alle The GEM / SRI approval refers to contractual requirements and
prescrizioni contrattuali, rimangono pertanto a carico del Fornitore clauses only. All design responsibilities remain charged to the
tutte le responsabilit della progettazione. Supplier.

PROGETTO PUENTE NUEVO POWER PLANT

Project
Environmental refurbishment and life extension

CLIENTE
Client Viesgo Grupo Enel
JOB no : M55C Doc. no. PBPNU59858

INOLTRO AL CLIENTE [ ] PER APPROVAZIONE [ ] PER INFORMAZIONE [ ] NON RICHIESTO

Client submittal For approval For information only Not requested

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 1/458

 INDEX / INDICE

CBI - HEAVY DUTY FANS Installation and Maintenace Manual Pag. 3

CBI - VENTILADOR Manual de Instalacion y mantenimiento de
ventilador

WEG - ELECTRIC MOTOR Installation and Maintenace Manual Pag. 40

MOTORES ELECTRICO - Manual de Instalacion y mantenimiento de
ventilador

DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS - Installation and Pag. 182
Maintenace Manual
DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS - Manual de Instalacion
y mantenimiento

AUMA ELECTRIC MULTI-TURN ACTUATOR - Installation and Pag. 194

Maintenace Manual
AUMA ELECTRICO MULTI-ROTATIVO ACTIVADOR - Manual de
Instalacion y mantenimiento

AUTOGARD FLEXIBLE COUPLING - Installation and Maintenace Pag. 359

Manual
AUTOGARD EMPAREJAR FLEXIBLE - Manual de Instalacion y
mantenimiento

FISHER ROSEMOUNT RESISTANCE THERMOMETER - Installation Pag. 369

and Maintenace Manual
FISHER ROSEMOUNT TERMOMETROS DE RESISTENCIA - Manual
de Instalacion y mantenimiento

WIKA TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER AND THERMOMETER - Pag. 402

Installation and Maintenace Manual
WIKA TRANSMISOR DE TEMPERATURA Y TERMOMETRO -
Installation and Maintenace Manual

METRIX SEISMIC VIBRATION SWITCH - Installation and Maintenace Pag. 438

Manual
METRIX INTERRUPTOR SISMICO DE VIBRACION - Installation and
Maintenace Manual

DRAWINGS - DIBUJOS Pag. 448

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 2/458

 Instruction Manual
Heavy Duty Fans

MAN-001-EN-SP REV 0 (SEP 2008)

1
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 3/458
 Contents

1 Receiptoffans/RecepcinVentilador...................................................................................................................4
1.1 Inspections/Recepcin..................................................................................................................................4
2 Storage....................................................................................................................................................................4
2.1 Generalrules/ElGeneralGobierna...............................................................................................................4
2.2 Boardlabelsandnameplates/CartelesEnLaMquina................................................................................5
2.3 Fanswithgreasebearings/Losventiladoresconengrasacojinetes.............................................................5
2.3.1 Maintenanceduringscheduledstop/Elmantenimientoduranteparadaprogramada....................5
2.3.2 Maintenanceduringoperation/Elmantenimientodurantelaoperacin..........................................6
2.4 Fanswithoilbearings/Losventiladoresconcojinetesaaceitelubricante...................................................6
2.4.1 Completelyassembled/Completamentereunido..............................................................................6
2.4.2 Withseparatelyshippedrotor/Conrotorseparadamenteenviado...................................................7
2.5 Fanoutage/Ventileaapagn.......................................................................................................................7
3 Handling/Manejo...................................................................................................................................................8
4 Assembly/instalacin.............................................................................................................................................8
4.1 Foundations/Cimientos.................................................................................................................................8
4.2 FansassembledbyCBI/Ventiladoresyaensamblados...............................................................................14
4.3 Fanswithseparaterotor/Ventiladoresconrotorseparados......................................................................14
4.4 Fansmountedonfoundationplinth/Ventiladoresconapoyosobreplinto...............................................15
4.5 Fanswithdampers/Ventiladoresconamortiguadores...............................................................................16
4.5.1 Rubberdampers/Amortiguadoresdegoma....................................................................................16
4.5.2 Springdampers/Amortiguadoresdemuelles...................................................................................16
4.5.2.1 assemblyanddisassemblyinstruction/asambleaeinstrucciondedesmontaje..............................18
5 Checksbeforestartup/c o n t r o l e s p r e v i o s a l a p u e s t a e n m a r c h a .........................................19
5.1 Couplingalignment/Emparejarlaalineacin.............................................................................................20
6 Startup/puestaenmarcha..................................................................................................................................21
6.1 Checks/Controles........................................................................................................................................21
6.2 Readings/Lecturas.......................................................................................................................................22
7 Lockpin/Fijacindelossoportes..........................................................................................................................23
7.1 Pillowblocklockpin/Fijacindelossoportes...............................................................................................23
8 Possibletroubles/problemasposibles.................................................................................................................23
8.1 Vibrationsofmechanicalorigin/Lasvibracionesdelorigenmecnico.......................................................23
8.1.1 Duetorotorunbalance/Desequilibriodelrodete.............................................................................23
8.1.2 Couplingmotormisalignment/DesajustedeEmparejardelmotorelctrico...................................23
8.1.3 Bearings/cojinetes.............................................................................................................................24
8.1.4 Shaftdeformation/Deformacinderbol........................................................................................24
8.1.5 Foundationscrewsloosening/Labaseenroscaaflojamiento..........................................................25
8.1.6 Loadsduetoinletandoutletducts/Lascargasdebidoaconductosdecalaysalida......................26
8.1.7 Foundations/Bases............................................................................................................................26
8.1.8 Electricmotor/motorelctrico.........................................................................................................26
8.1.9 Foreignmatters/Asuntosextranjeros..............................................................................................26
9 Aerodynamicvibrations/vibracionesaerodinamicas..........................................................................................27
10 PoorPerformance/pocorendimiento..................................................................................................................28
11 Maintenance/mantenimiento.............................................................................................................................29
11.1 Periodicalchecks/Verificaperidica...........................................................................................................29
12 Disassemblyoperations/OperacionesDeDesmontaje........................................................................................29
12.1 Rotor/Rotor.................................................................................................................................................29
12.2 Coupling/Emparejar....................................................................................................................................29
13 Tables/Tabla........................................................................................................................................................30
13.1 Torquewrenchsetting/Colocacindellaveinglesademomentodetorsin.............................................30
13.1.1 Applications/Aplicaciones................................................................................................................30
13.2 Radialinternalclearanceofsphericalrollerbearingswithtaperedbore/Elespaciolibreinternoradial
decojinetesesfricosderodilloconestrechadoaburre................................................................................................30

2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 4/458
14 Ancillaryequipmentassemblydiagram/Montajereguladoresdecapacidadycompuertasdealetas.........33
14.1.1 Variableinletvanes/reguladoresdecapacidadaspirantes(Dapo).................................................33
14.1.2 Inletdamper/compuertasdealetas.................................................................................................34
14.1.3 Constantoillevelindicatorsforbearings/ndicadoresdenivelconstanteparasoportesdeaceite..35
15 Anomalousvibrations/vibracionesanomalas.....................................................................................................37
15.1 Causesandinterventions/Causaseintervenciones....................................................................................37
16 Documentation/documentacion.........................................................................................................................37

3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 5/458
1 RECEIPT OF FANS / RECEPCIN VENTILADOR

1.1 Inspections / Recepcin

Fans have to be shipped with extreme care, avoiding to cause deformations in the
structure.
Each component is carefully checked before shipment.
At receipt of the equipment please verify that the same has not been damaged during
transportation: if any damage should result a prompt complain to the forwarding agent
should be done.

Cada ventilador es controlado cuidadosamente antes de ser enviado.

En el momento de la recepcin es necesario controlar que el ventilador no haya sufrido
daos durante el transporte, en caso contrario enviar una reclamacin al transportista.

2 STORAGE

2.1 General rules / El General Gobierna

If fans are outdoor stored, is necessary provide to cover they with suitable means. If
they are stored in a dry sheltered area no particular care is required.

Si ventiladores son al aire libre almacenados, es necesario proporciona para cubrir ellos con
medios convenientes. Si ellos son almacenados en un rea refugiada seca no cuidado particular
es requerido

4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 6/458
2.2 Board labels and nameplates / Carteles En La
Mquina
The fan is provided with labels indicating:
En la mquina se encuentran diversos pictogramas de sealizacin, que no deben ser retirados.

1. Identification nameplate / Placa Matricula

2. Performance nameplate / Placa de Rendimiento
3. Bearings lubrication nameplate / Placa de lubricacin de cojinetes
4. Coupling alignment label / Placa de alineacin de juntura
5. Earthing bosses label / Placa de Conexin de puesta a tierra
6. Inspection door label / Placa de puertecilla de inspeccin
7. Lifting hooks or lifting points label /Placa de alzamiento
8. Coupling lubrication label / Placa de lubricacin de juntura

2.3 Fans with grease bearings / Los ventiladores con

engrasa cojinetes
These fans are supplied with lubricated bearings, as indicated on the fan assembly
drawing.
Estos ventiladores son suministrados con cojinetes lubricados, como indicado en el
dibujo de la asamblea de ventilador.

2.3.1 Maintenance during scheduled stop / El

mantenimiento durante parada programada

When the lubrication time is approx. 8,000 hours, make maintenance during the
plant scheduled stop.
During the fan stop, remove the grease and provide to internal clean of pillow blocks
or bearing housing using suitable solvents.
During these operations check of grease seals and replace if necessary.
After this operations replace with new grease. The grease type is specified on the
assembly drawing.

Cundo el tiempo de lubricacin es aprox. 8.000 horas, el mantenimiento de la marca

durante la parada programada de planta.
Durante la parada de ventilador, quite la grasa y proporciona a interno limpio de bloques
de almohada o soportando envoltura que utiliza solventes convenientes.
Durante estos cheque de operaciones de sellos de grasa y reemplaza si necesario.
Despus de que estas operaciones reemplacen con nueva grasa. El de tipo grasa es
especificado en el dibujo de la asamblea

5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 7/458
2.3.2 Maintenance during operation / El mantenimiento
durante la operacin

Bearings in pillow block or bearing housing can be lubricated during fan operation.
The lubrication time is specified on the assembly drawing.

Cojinetes en el bloque de almohada o soportando envoltura puede ser lubricada durante

la operacin de ventilador.
El tiempo de la lubricacin es especificado en el dibujo de la asamblea.

2.4 Fans with oil bearings / Los ventiladores con

cojinetes a aceite lubricante
2.4.1 Completely assembled / Completamente reunido

Fans with oil bearings are shipped without oil to prevent oil leakages during transport and
handling.
At receipt of fans and in any case before storing, provide for lubrication with oil type
specified on the assembly drawing.
Bearings are always equipped with constant oil level gauge and fixed oil level gauge.
Check that oil level gauge connections didnt loosen during transport and on site handling,
in this case it will has oil leakages. Provide to tighten the connections.

Bearing cavity has to be filled with oil up to the centerline of the lower roller.
This height is the static oil level marked on the oil level gauge and shown on the drawing.
This is measured from bottom of block base to meniscus on oil sight gauge (non-rotating
mode).
Considering that the oil level may drop or rise during operation, depending on the direction
of rotation of the bearing.
For this reason both static oil level and running oil level should be marked on the oil sight
gauge and properly identified, considering that normally the oil filling will be carried out
with fan in operation.

Los ventiladores con cojinetes de petrleo son enviados sin el petrleo para prevenir
mermas de petrleo durante el transporte y el manejo.
En recibo de ventiladores y en cualquier caso antes de almacenar, preve la lubricacin
con de tipo petrleo especific en el dibujo de la asamblea.
Cojinetes siempre son equipados con el calibrador constante de nivel del aceite y
calibrador fijo de nivel del aceite.
Verifique esas conexiones del calibrador de nivel del aceite no aflojaron durante el
transporte y en el manejo del sitio, en este caso hace tiene mermas de petrleo.
Proporcione para apretar las conexiones.

6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 8/458
Soportar la cavidad tiene que ser llenada del petrleo hasta la lnea central del rodillo
ms bajo. Esta altura es el nivel del aceite constante marcado en el calibrador de nivel del
aceite y mostrado en el dibujo. Esto es medido del fondo de la base del bloque al menisco
en el petrleo el calibrador vidente (el modo de no-girando).
Teniendo en cuenta que el nivel del aceite puede dejar caer o puede subir durante la
operacin, dependiendo de la direccin de la rotacin del cojinete. Para esta razn ambos
nivel del aceite constante y nivel del aceite corriente deben ser marcados en el petrleo el
calibrador vidente y apropiadamente identificados, teniendo en cuenta que normalmente
el relleno de petrleo ser llevado a cabo con ventilador en la operacin.

2.4.2 With separately shipped rotor/ Con rotor

separadamente enviado

Same as a.m. paragraph, with the exception of the oil level gauges that are supplied
separately; therefore they have to be assembled on site.

El prrafo mismo que anterior, a excepcin de los calibradores de nivel del aceite que son
suministrados separadamente; por lo tanto ellos tienen que ser reunidos en el sitio.

2.5 Fan outage / Ventile a apagn

After a long outage in the plant or store, lubricant (grease or oil) must be removed by
means of suitable detergents and then replace with new lubricant.
Fans must be stored in a covered and dry place, protected from dust and corrosion.
Pillow blocks and bearing housing may be protected with plastic caps or tape without
sealing so as to prevent the humidity inside to the bearings. The humidity cause damages.
Temperature of store area must not exceed 60 C, with relative humidity of 80%.
The rotor should be rotated for about ten minutes every ten days so as to allow
homogeneous lubrication of bearings.

Despus de que una apagn en la planta o almacene, el lubricante (grasa o petrleo) debe
ser quitado por medio de detergentes convenientes y entonces reemplaza con nuevo
lubricante.
Los ventiladores deben ser almacenados en un cubri y seca el lugar, protegido del polvo
y la corrosin.
La almohada bloquea y soportando envoltura puede ser protegida con tapas plsticas o
graba sin sellar para prevenir la humedad adentro a los cojinetes.
La causa de la humedad daa. La temperatura de rea de tienda no debe exceder 60 C,
con humedad relativa de 80%.
El rotor debe ser girado para acerca de diez minutos para permitir cada diez das la
lubricacin homognea de cojinetes

7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 9/458
3 HANDLING / MANEJO

In order to carry out this operation:

1. Check that the handling equipment has suitable capacity.
2. Use only the existing hooks indicated by special labels.
3. Dont use the holes of flanges and/or parts of fan (shaft-coupling-bearings, etc.) that
may compromise the right fan operativeness.
4. Do not lift out-of-balance loads.
5. When the rotor is shipped separately, handling must be carried out as follows:
Without hooking the rotor to the blades but using the back plate.
The shaft must be slung with proper bands using an equalizer device, avoiding
bumps that may damage and unbalance the rotor.

Para llevar a cabo esta operacin:

1. Verifique que el equipo de manejo tiene la capacidad conveniente.
2. Utilice slo los ganchos existentes indicados por etiquetas especiales.
3. No utilice los hoyos de rebordes y/o partes de etc. de ventilador (shaft-coupling-
bearings,) eso puede ceder el operativeness correcto de ventilador.
4. No saque de cargas de equilibrio
5. Cundo el rotor es enviado separadamente, el manejo debe ser llevado a cabo de la
siguiente manera:
Sin enganchar el rotor a las hojas pero a utilizar el plato de espalda.
El tnel debe ser arrojado con las bandas apropiadas que utilizan un dispositivo de
ecualizador, evitando los choques que pueden daar y poder desequilibrar el rotor

4 ASSEMBLY / INSTALACIN

4.1 Foundations / Cimientos

The recommend foundation are reinforced concrete or steel structure.
Anyway, the foundations must be calculated depending on the static and dynamic fan
load; the relevant values are indicated on the assembly drawing.
To prevent any fan failure, the steel structure or the reinforced concrete foundation
supporting the fan must be accurately leveled and flattened; see the following diagrams
1-2-3.

8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 10/458
Diagram 1

Fan on reinforced concrete foundations

No-flat and no-leveled

No- flat surface surface
WRONG execution WRONG execution

Flat but no-leveled

Flat and leveled surface surface
CORRECT execution WRONG execution

9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 11/458
Diagram 2 Fan with vibration isolators
on reinforced concrete foundations
No-flat and no-leveled
No- flat surface superfice non planare
surface
superficeexecution
WRONG non planare e non in execution
WRONG bolla
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA

Flat but no-leveled

Flat and leveled surface superfice planare
surface
superfice planare
CORRECT ed in bolla
execution ma nonexecution
WRONG in bolla
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA

Fan with vibration isolators

Diagram 3 on metallic structure foundations
No-flat and no-leveled
No- flat surface surface
superfice non planare
superfice
WRONG non planare
execution WRONG execution
e non in bolla
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA

Flat and leveled surface Flat but no-leveled

superfice planare
superficeexecution
CORRECT planare ed in bolla surface
ma non in bolla
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione
WRONG ERRATA
execution

10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 12/458
El tipo de cimientos recomendado es el de cemento armado, o con estructura de acero.
En todo caso se deben calcular en funcin de la carga esttica y dinmica del ventilador, cuyos valores se
indican en el diseo del conjunto.
Para no comprometer el buen funcionamiento de la mquina, las vigas de acero, o la base de cemento
armado en la que se apoya el ventilador, deben ser niveladas y con la mxima planaridad, como se describe
a continuacin. vea los esquemas siguientes 1-2-3

Diagrama 1

Ventiladores enventilatore
base de cemento
conarmado
basesininamortiguadores
cemento armato

superfice non
superficie no planare
planar y no nivelada
superficie nonon
superfice planar
planare e ejecucin INCORRECTA
non in bolla
ejecucin INCORRECTA esecuzione ERRATA
esecuzione ERRATA

superfice planare
superficie planar pero no nivelada
superficie planar
superfice y nivelada
planare ed in bolla ma non in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA

11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 13/458
 Diagrama 2
Ventiladores en base de cemento armado con amortiguadores

superfice
superficie nonon planare
planar y no nivelada
superficie nonon
planar eejecucin
non in bolla
superfice planare INCORRECTA
ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA

superfice planare
superficie planar y nivelada superficie planar pero no nivelada
superfice planare ed in bolla ma non in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA

12
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 14/458
 Diagrama 3

Ventiladores sobre estructura metlica con amortiguadores

superficie no planar superfice non planare

superficie no planar y no nivelada
superfice non planare
ejecucin INCORRECTA eejecucin
non inINCORRECTA
bolla
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA

superfice planare
superficie planar y nivelada superficie planar pero no nivelada
superfice planare ed in bolla ma nonINCORRECTA
in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA

13
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 15/458
4.2 Fans assembled by CBI / Ventiladores ya ensamblados
Level out the fan using a centesimal water level operating on the fan shaft or coupling.
For fans with dampers see paragraph 4.5.1 and 4.5.2

Adems de la nivelacin del grupo con instrumento centesimal, tomando como referencia
el eje o el acoplamiento de transmisin, el montaje de los ventiladores ensamblados no
necesita ninguna solucin especial.

Para ventiladores dotados los reguladores de capacidad y compuertas de aletas ven el

prrafo 4.5.1 e 4.5.2

4.3 Fans with separate rotor / Ventiladores con rotor

separados
Assembly has to be carried out according to the considerations mentioned in paragraph 3
and 4.2
The impeller-inlet bell clearance and coupling alignment values shall be respected. These
values are specified in the assembly drawing or manuals of the coupling supplier.
For fans with dampers see paragraph 4.5.1 and 4.5.2.

Efectuar el montaje teniendo en cuenta las precauciones ya mencionadas ven el prrafo

3 e 4.2
Respetar los juegos de montaje rodete-tobera y los valores de alineacin acoplamiento
de transmisin, as como se especifica en el diseo del conjunto o en los manuales del
proveedor de los acoplamientos.
Para ventiladores dotados los reguladores de capacidad y compuertas de aletas ven el
prrafo 4.5.1 e 4.5.2

14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 16/458
4.4 Fans mounted on foundation plinth / Ventiladores
con apoyo sobre plinto
Refer to the assembly drawing to operate in the correct way as follows:
1. Place the rotor on foundation plinth (the rotor is assembled with its bedplate), proceed to
leveling using sheetsteel shims where necessary, and fix it accurately.
2. Place the anchor bolts into the suitable holes.
3. Fill up with suitable mortar and allow drying according to the instructions contained in
packaging used.
4. Once a suitable footing form has been realized, proceed to cast the leveling mortar that must
be of excellent quality, i.e. with excellent resistance and lowest coefficient of expansion. The
leveling mortar must homogeneously fill up all free spaces around the bedplate.
5. After the time needed, tighten the bolts by means of a torque wrench.
6. Place the lower casing sector screw according the above instructions.
7. Assembly the inlet bell.
8. Check the mounting clearance indicated on the assembly drawing, i.e.:
Impeller-inlet bell (radial and axial)
Seal-shaft (radial)
9. Assembly other casing sectors
10. Tighten the bolts:
Anchor bolts
Motor fastening bolts
Bearings bolts
11. Align the coupling;
12. Assembly the ancillary equipment, if any.

Para una correcta ejecucin del montaje, referirse al diseo del conjunto y operar de la manera
siguiente:
1. Colocar el rotor en el plinto de la base (el rotor es reunido con su bedplate), contina a nivelar que
utiliza hojacalces de acero donde necesario, y lo fija exactamente.
2. Colocar los bulones de anclaje a los cimientos en los especficos puntos de anclaje
3. Llenar los puntos de anclaje con mortero idneo y dejar secar segn las instrucciones del producto.
4. Una vez realizado un adecuado encofrado, realizar la colada de mortero de nivelacin que debe ser de
ptima resistencia mecnica con un bajo coeficiente de dilatacin.
5. Una vez transcurrido el tiempo necesario, apretar los bulones de anclaje a los cimientos con llave
dinamomtrica.
6. Colocar el sector inferior de la cclea con el mismo procedimiento del apoyo
7. Montar la tobera
8. Comprobar los juegos de montaje indicados en el diseo del conjunto, y precisamente:
Rodete-tobera (radial y axial)
Junta de estanqueidad-eje (radial)
9. Montar los sectores de cclea restantes.
10. Efectuar el apriete de los bulones:
de anclaje a los cimientos
motor
soportes
11. Alinear acoplamiento de transmisin
13. Montar eventuales accesorios.

15
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 17/458
4.5 Fans with dampers / Ventiladores con amortiguadores

4.5.1 Rubber dampers / Amortiguadores de goma

These dampers are usually mounted on fan baseframe. In this case no special care is
necessary.
It is very important that the foundation is according to specified in diagrams of
paragraph 4.1.

Los amortiguadores de goma normalmente ya estn montados en el bastidor del

ventilador y, por consecuencia, no necesitan especial atencin.
Es de fundamental importancia que la base en la que se apoya el ventilador sea
conforme a lo indicado en los prrafo 4.1.

4.5.2 Spring dampers / Amortiguadores de muelles

These dampers are usually mounted on fan baseframe. In this case no special care is
necessary.
When the spring dampers are shipped separately, they are ready to assembly them on
fan baseframe, as shown on the following diagram.

Los amortiguadores de muelles no estn montados debajo de la base sino enviados

separadamente, ya ensamblados con la gua inferior (a fijar a los cimientos) y a la
gua superior a fijar a la base del ventilador, como se indica en el esquema siguiente.

16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 18/458
 Diagram 4
Dampers supplied separately. Position marking
marca de la posicin
contrassegno per lade los amortiguadores
posizione cuando se suministran
degli ammortizzatori
quando vengono
separadamente fornitialseparatamente
respecto ventilador
al ventilatore
Fastening screw between aluminium
section bar and fanper
viteria frame
bloccaggio profilo
tornillos para fijard'alluminio
el perfil de aluminio
al telaio al
ventilatore
bastidor del ventilador

A Transport fastening tie rods. Remove after in site assembly

tiranti di bloccaggio presenti
tirantes
per de fijacin presentes para el transporte, a eliminar durante el montaje en
il trasporto,
la obra
da eliminare durante il
montaggio in cantiere

Screws
viteria per for damper longitudinal translation
lo scorrimento
tornillos para eldegli
longitudinale deslizamiento longitudinal de los amortiguadores
ammortizzatori

Anchor
bulloni bolts
di fondazione
bulones de anclaje a los cimientos

It is very important that the foundation is according to specified in diagrams of

paragraph 4.1.
Lift the fan and assembly the dampers according to diagram 4. After this operation,
remove the tie rods that are applied for transport purposes and place the fan on
foundation.

Es de fundamental importancia que la base en la que se apoya el ventilador sea conforme

a lo indicado en el captulo 4.1.
Levante el ventilador y la asamblea los amortiguadores segn esquema 4. Despus de que
esta operacin, quite las barras de corbata que son solicitadas el transporte propsitos y
colocan el ventilador en la base.

17
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 19/458
4.5.2.1 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION /
ASAMBLEA E INSTRUCCION DE DESMONTAJE
In case that the electric motor is not delivered to CBI in account of manufacture and
therefore mounted on site, the assembly of dampers is simplified by the geometry of
the aluminium section bar that allows the longitudinal translation.
After assembly of dampers, place the fan on foundation and check that the height of
each damper corresponds to or is within the tolerance limit indicated in the assembly
drawing.
Lift the fan and correct the damper position up to optimization of set height values.

En caso de que el motor elctrico no sea entregado a CBI en la cuenta de fabrica y

por lo tanto montado en el sitio, la asamblea de amortiguadores es simplificada por la
geometra de la barra de la seccin de aluminio que permite la traduccin
longitudinal. Despus de que la asamblea de amortiguadores, coloque el ventilador en
la base y el cheque que la altura de cada corresponder de amortiguador a o est
dentro del lmite de la tolerancia indicado en el dibujo de la asamblea.
Levante el ventilador y corrija la posicin de amortiguador hasta optimizacin de
valores fijos de altura.

Fastening screw between aluminium

section bar viteria
and fan perframe
bloccaggio profilo
tornillos para fijar el perfil deal
d'alluminio aluminio al
telaio ventilatore
bastidor del ventilador

Transport
tiranti fastening
di bloccaggio tie rods. Remove after in site
presenti
assembly
per il trasporto,
datirantes de fijacin
eliminare presentes
durante il para el transporte, a eliminar durante el
montaje en in
montaggio la obra
cantiere

Screws
viteria forscorrimento
per lo damper longitudinal translation
tornillos para el
longitudinale deslizamiento longitudinal de los amortiguadores
degli
ammortizzatori

bulloni di fondazione
Anchor bolts
bulones de anclaje a los cimientos

18
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 20/458
5 CHECKS BEFORE STARTUP / CONTROLES PREVIOS A LA
PUESTA EN MARCHA

1. Coupling alignment (see paragraph 5.1).

2. impeller-inlet bell clearance (see assembly drawing).
3. Sealshaft radial clearance (see assembly drawing).
4. Clean the pillow blocks or bearing housing with white kerosene or other suitable
solvent, if necessary.
5. Check the residual bearing clearance according to the value specified in the supplier
instructions.
6. Check that the free bearing can slide without difficulty.
7. Check that the seals of bearings are tight and that their position is correct.
8. Apply the quantity and type of grease or oil specified in the assembly drawing.
9. Tight the bolts of pillow blocks or bearing housing with torque wrench according to the
setting indicated in paragraph 13.1.1.
10. Assembly the relevant equipment on pillow blocks or bearing housing.
11. Assembly the constant oil level (when it is supplied separately for transport reasons)
with care.
12. Check the presence of lubricants in the bearings.
13. Remove foreign matters, if any, inside the fan.
14. Check the correct clamping of inspection doors.
15. Check the correct operation of inlet and outlet dampers.
16. Check the limit stop devices calibration.
17. Check the flange gaskets.
18. Check that the guards of rotating parts.
19. Check that inlet and outlet ducts dont force the fan position and that the flexible
connections work in suitable way.
20. Check the electric motor rotation way.
During the first startup check unusual noise or vibrations has not to be detected. If any,
proceed according to paragraph 8.

1. Alineacin acoplamiento de transmisin, (ver diseo del conjunto).

2. Juegos rodete-tobera, (ver diseo del conjunto).
3. Juego radial junta de estanqueidad-eje, (ver diseo del conjunto).
4. Si es necesaria, efectuar una cuidadosa limpieza interna de los soportes con lquidos
adecuados.
5. Comprobacin del juego residual de los cojinetes respetando el valor especificado en las tablas
del fabricante.
6. Asegurarse de que el cojinete libre pueda deslizarse
7. Comprobar la integridad de las uniones estancas de los soportes, y la posicin correcta.
8. Colocar el lubricante (grasa o aceite) cuya cantidad se indica en el diseo del conjunto
9. Cerrar los soportes con llave dinamomtrica, respetando el par de apriete indicado a capitulo
13.1.1

19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 21/458
10. Aplicar en los soportes los accesorios de los que est dotado.
11. Prestar especial atencin al montaje del grupo aceitador de nivel constante (cuando se
suministra separado por motivos de transporte)
12. Verifique la presencia de lubricantes en los cojinetes.
13. Retirar eventuales cuerpos extraos que se encuentren en la cclea.
14. Cerrar las puertecillas
15. Comprobar la correcta apertura y cierre de compuertas, reguladores de caudal.
16. Controlar la correcta colocacin de los finales de carrera
17. Asegurarse de que todas las partes rotatorias, o donde est previsto, estn dotadas de
proteccin
18. Asegurarse de que los conductos sobre la aspiracin e impulsin no afecten el ventilador, y
que los acoplamientos antivibracin que se encuentran en las bocas permitan la eventual
dilatacin.
19. Comprobar el sentido de rotacin del motor con eventuales ruedas libres desactivadas
20. Activar las eventuales ruedas libres

Durante el control de la rotacin prestar atencin a que no se produzca ningn ruido extrao o
irregularidad; en caso contrario intervenir para solucionar el problema indicado en el captulo 8.

5.1 Coupling alignment / Emparejar la alineacin

Check the correct tightening of all components, i.e. the tightening of electric motor,
bearings, shaft seals, and anchor bolts before carrying out the final alignment.
The alignment has to be carried out as specified in the assembly drawing or enclosed
documentation.

Verifica el apretar correcto de todos componentes, es decir el apretar del motor elctrico, de
cojinetes, de los sellos de tnel, y de cerrojos de ancla antes del llevar a cabo la alineacin
final.
La alineacin tiene que ser llevada a cabo como especificado en la asamblea que dibuja o
encerr la documentacin.

20
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 22/458
6 STARTUP / PUESTA EN MARCHA

At the startup it recommend the presence of qualified technicians.

Notes:
1. When the fan is supplied without control instruments (speed, temperature and
vibrations detectors) on board, it is necessary use portable instruments.
2. It recommend weld pressure taps upstream and downstream the fan duct, the taps
position shall be accessible to a Pitot traverse tube to measure the flow, when
necessary.
3. When all check are positive, close the inlet damper; the outlet damper could be open,
Proceed to startup.

Para esta operacin se aconseja la presencia de tcnicos con experiencia especfica.

1. En caso de que no estn previstos en la mquina los instrumentos para el control de velocidad,
temperatura y vibraciones, es oportuno tener a disposicin instrumentos porttiles.
2. Recomienda las canillas de la presin de soldadura ro arriba y ro abajo el conducto de ventilador,
las canillas posicionan ser accesible a un Pitot atraviesa tubo para medir el flujo, cundo necesario.
3. Una vez que se haya comprobado que todos los controles dan un resultado positivo, proceder a la
puesta en marcha

6.1 Checks / Controles

1. Bearing vibrations: horizontal-vertical-axial, according to COAER NV109 or VDI
2056.
2. Bearing temperature (max. 90 C, taken on the surface of the pillow block).
After a first rise stage, the bearing temperature shall be steady on the nominal values
90 C.
When vibration and temperature values are not satisfactory, stop the fan in order to
analyse the cause. See paragraph 8.
Once the required operations have been done, proceed to new startup of fan.

3. Measurement of:
Flowrate
Pressure
Fluid temperature
Rpm
Absorbed power
Compare the values with fan characteristic curve.

21
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 23/458
Despus de la puesta en marcha efectuar los siguientes controles:

1. Vibraciones en los soportes: horizontal-vertical-axial, segn tablas COAER 109, o ISO 14695.
2. Temperatura cojinetes ( mx. 90 C, medida en la superficie de los soportes).
Despus de una fase de aumento, la temperatura de los cojinetes debe estabilizarse en los valores
nominales 90 C, medidos en la caja del soporte con un instrumento adecuado.
Si los valores de vibracin y temperatura encontrados no son satisfacientes, detener la mquina,
identificar las causas y eliminar las anomalas. Vea el prrafo 8.
Una vez que las operaciones necesarias han sido hechas, continen a nuevo inicio de ventilador.
3. La medida de:
a. la cantidad de aire
b. la Presin
c. la temperatura
d. velocidad de rotacin
e. Absorbi el poder Compara los valores con ventilador curva tpica

6.2 Readings / Lecturas

The vibrations and temperature values have to be recorded every ten minutes at least
for one hour.

Los valores de vibraciones y temperatura tienen que ser registrados cada diez minutos
por lo menos por una hora

22
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 24/458
7 LOCKPIN / FIJACIN DE LOS SOPORTES

7.1 Pillow block lockpin/ Fijacin de los soportes

This operation has to be carried out after the various starting operations and the final
alignment control.
Anyway, this operation has to be carried out after about 24 hours working time.

Despus de varias puestas en marcha y controles finales, incluida la comprobacin de alineacin del
acoplamiento o de la transmisin por correas, efectuar la fijacin de los soportes que se debe realizar
despus de un perodo de funcionamiento de 24 horas.

8 POSSIBLE TROUBLES / PROBLEMAS POSIBLES

8.1 Vibrations of mechanical origin / Las vibraciones

del origen mecnico
8.1.1 Due to rotor unbalance/ Desequilibrio del rodete

Clean the impeller / Controlar que no haya polvo u otros materiales sobre las
partes rotativas.
Check impeller structural condition and if necessary, repair it or replace the
impeller / Controlar erosin o corrosin del rodete, si el rodete est seriamente
daado debe ser sustituido.
Balance the rotor / Equilibre el rotor.

8.1.2 Coupling-motor misalignment/ Desajuste de

Emparejar del motor elctrico

Check the tightness of electric motor and pillow block (or bearing housing) bolts /
Verifique la estrechez del bloque motor elctrico y la almohada (o soportando
envoltura) cerrojos.
Check the tightness of coupling bolts / Verifique la estrechez de emparejar
cerrojos.
Proceed to realignment / Emparejar la alineacin.
Proceed to bearings and motor lockpin / Fijacin de los soportes y motor elctrico

23
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 25/458
8.1.3 Bearings/ cojinetes

Check the following:

Condition of rollers or balls, and races.
Residual radial clearances according to the tables of bearings manufacturer; see
paragraph 13.2.
Free bearing must slide without difficulty.
Lubrication.
Pillow block or bearing house leveling.
Tightness of pillow blocks (or bearing housing) bolts with torque wrench according
to the values indicated in the tables of paragraph 13.1.

Verifique lo Siguiente:
La Condicin de rodillos o pelotas, y compite.
Los espacios libres radiales Residuales segn las mesas del fabricante de cojinetes; vea
el prrafo 13,2.
Liberta cojinete debe deslizar sin dificultad.
La Lubricacin. El bloque de Almohada o soportar la casa que nivela.
La Estrechez de bloques de almohada (o soportando envoltura) cerrojos con la llave
inglesa del momento de torsin segn los valores indicados en las mesas del prrafo
13,1

8.1.4 Shaft deformation/ Deformacin de rbol

Wrong handling / Manejo de injusticia.

Thermal shock (for high temperature fans) / El golpe trmico (para la temperatura
alta de los ventiladores).

The deformation can be detected by means of suitable dial gauges

Slight corrections are possible acting on the wheel balancing, but it recommended
replace the shaft to solve this problem.

La deformacin puede ser discernida por medio de calibradores convenientes de

esfera las correcciones Leves son la actuando sobre de posible la rueda que equilibra,
pero recomend
reemplaza el tnel para resolver este problema.

24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 26/458
 Impossibility of correct bearing slide; check that the free bearing can slide without
difficulty.
Loosening of pillow block (or bearing housing), electric motor, and bedplate bolts.
Shifting of the electric motor shims or fan bedplate shims.
Shaft seals friction.

Imposibilidad del resbaladero correcto de cojinete; cheque que el cojinete libre

puede deslizar sin dificultad.
Aflojando del bloque de almohada (o soportando envoltura), el motor elctrico, y
cerrojos de bedplate.
Cambiando de los calces motrices elctricos o ventila calces de bedplate.
rbol sella la friccin.

8.1.5 Foundation screws loosening / La base enrosca

aflojamiento

Check the tightness according to the values indicated in table 1, paragraph 13.1.
The tightness difficulty may be due to the shifting of plates used for the leveling or to
foundation settling.
Take the necessary measures.

Verifique la estrechez segn los valores indicados en la mesa 1, el prrafo 13,1.

La dificultad de la estrechez puede estar debido al cambiar de platos utilizados para
el nivelar o a asentar de base. Tome las medidas necesarias.

25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 27/458
8.1.6 Loads due to inlet and outlet ducts / Las cargas
debido a conductos de cala y salida

Inlet and outlet ducts must not force the fan position and the flexible connections must
work in suitable way to prevent vibration and noise transmission.

Los conductos de la cala y la salida no deben forzar la posicin de ventilador y las

conexiones flexibles deben trabajar en la manera conveniente para prevenir la
transmisin de la vibracin y el ruido

8.1.7 Foundations /Bases

Settling and formation foundations supporting the fan may cause vibrations. Check the
foundations and take proper measures, if necessary.

Asentar y bases de formacin que apoya el ventilador puede causar las vibraciones.
Verifique las bases y tome las medidas apropiadas, si necesario

8.1.8 Electric motor / motor elctrico

Check the electric motor at loadless running setup.

Verifique el motor elctrico en loadless que corre arreglo

8.1.9 Foreign matters / Asuntos extranjeros

Check that there are no foreign matters inside the fan.

Verifique que no hay los asuntos extranjeros dentro del ventilador.

26
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 28/458
9 AERODYNAMIC VIBRATIONS / VIBRACIONES
AERODINAMICAS

These vibrations usually change with fan and/or circuit characteristics and may be
caused by:
Resonance of ducts at definite flowrates.
Sudden section variations.
Unfit duct stiffenings transmit vibrations to the fan casing and consequently to the
impeller and bearings.
Provide to stiffening as necessary.

Check the correct operation of inlet and outlet dampers.

Check the clearance between impeller and inlet bell. Non-uniform clearance may
transmit pulsations to the fan shaft.

Some of above-mentioned troubles could make difficult to determine the cause and find
proper measures.
Contact CBI for assistance.

Estas vibraciones cambian generalmente con caractersticas de ventilador y/o circuito

y pueden ser causadas por:
La Resonancia de conductos en flowrates definido.
Variaciones Repentinas de seccin.
Inhabilita conducto pone tieso transmite las vibraciones al ventilador que embala y
consecuentemente al impeller y cojinetes.
Proporcione a poner tieso como sea necesario.

Verifique la operacin correcta de amortiguadores de cala y salida.

Verifique el espacio libre entre la campana de impeller y cala. El espacio libre no
uniforme puede transmitir las pulsaciones al tnel del ventilador.

Algunos de problemas sobredichos podran hacer difcil de determinar la causa y

encontrar las medidas apropiadas. Contacte CBI para la ayuda.

27
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 29/458
10 POOR PERFORMANCE / POCO RENDIMIENTO

The performance must always refer to the fan design point and circuit design point.
Record the following parameters:
Rpm
Flow temperature
Barometric pressure
Relative humidity
Dampers setup
Static pressure upstream and downstream of the fan, in an place without
turbulences
Absorbed power
The records shall be repeated several times changing the circuit resistance, for instance,
changing the dampers setup when the other parameters unchanged.
Compare the obtained results with fan characteristic curves.

Different values should be found due to the following reasons:

Wrong impeller rotation.
Wrong inlet damper assembling (check the blades position). See paragraph 14.1.2.

El rendimiento siempre debe referirse al punto del diseo del ventilador y el punto del
diseo del circuito.
Registre los parmetros siguientes:
velocidad de rotacin
la temperatura del Flujo
la presin Baromtrica
humedad Relativa
arreglo de Amortiguadores
la presin Constante ro arriba y ro abajo del ventilador, en un lugar sin
turbulencias
Absorbi el poder que
Los registros sern repetidos varias veces cambiando la resistencia de circuito, por
ejemplo cambiando el arreglo de amortiguadores cuando los otros parmetros iguales.
Compare los resultados obtenidos con ventilador curvas tpicas.

Los valores diferentes deben ser encontrados debido a las razones siguientes:
La rotacin Equivocada de impeller.
Reunir Equivocado de amortiguador de cala (verifica la posicin de hojas). Vea el
prrafo 14.1.2.

Al registro y el anlisis correctos de parmetros de ventilador contacta CBI.

28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 30/458
11 MAINTENANCE / MANTENIMIENTO

11.1 Periodical checks / Verifica peridica

When the fan is not equipped with onboard instruments, the following parameters
shall be checked at regular intervals:
1. Bearing temperature;
2. Oil level or grease quantity;
3. Bearing vibrations;
4. Absorbed power.

During the scheduled plant stop check the coupling condition.

Cundo el ventilador no es equipado con instrumentos, los parmetros siguientes

sern verificados con regularidad:
1. la temperatura de cojinetes ;
2. La cantidad del nivel del aceite o la grasa;
3. la vibraciones de cojineters;
4. Poder absorbido.

Durante el cheque planificado de la parada de planta la condicin que se empareja.

12 DISASSEMBLY OPERATIONS / OPERACIONES DE

DESMONTAJE

12.1 Rotor / Rotor

See assembly drawing / Vea dibujando.

12.2 Coupling / Emparejar

See assembly drawing or enclosed documentation / Vea dibujando o encerr la
documentacin.

29
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 31/458
13 TABLES / TABLA

13.1 Torque wrench setting / Colocacin de llave inglesa

de momento de torsin

13.1.1 Applications / Aplicaciones

This paragraph contains the torque values for:

General applications; table 1
SKF bearings of the SN series; table 2
DODGE bearings of the SND series; table 3

For the other elements that are part of CBIs supply but of external supply, the
instructions contained in the manufacturer catalogues have to be followed.

Este prrafo contiene los valores del momento de torsin para:

Las aplicaciones Generales; posponga 1
cojinetes de SKF de la serie de SN; posponga 2
cojinetes de DODGE de la serie de SND; posponga 3

Para los otros elementos que forman parte del suministro de CBI pero del
suministro externo, las instrucciones contenidas en los catlogos del fabricante tienen
que ser seguidas.

13.2 Radial internal clearance of spherical roller

bearings with tapered bore / El espacio libre
interno radial de cojinetes esfricos de rodillo con
estrechado aburre

See table 4, paragraph 13.2.

For other types of bearings, see the manufacturer tables.

Vea mesa 4, el prrafo 13,2.

Para otros tipos de cojinetes, vea las mesas del fabricante

30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 32/458
 Tab. 1
Material class / Clase material
Torque wrench setting [Nm]
Colocacin de llave inglesa de momento de
torsin [Nm]
Screw 8.8 10.9 12.9
8 24 34 41
10 50 70 84
12 90 127 153
16 214 302 362
18 308 434 520
20 431 607 728
24 731 1030 1230
27 1070 1500 1800
30 1480 2080 2490

Tab. 2
SN bearings 1 torque [Nm] 2 torque [Nm] Monobloc 3 torque [Nm]
Soportes SN torsin torsin torsin
513 80 220 P0-30 80
515 80 220 P1-35 150
516 80 430 P2-45 200
517 80 430 P3-55 300
518 150 430 P4-65 430
519 150 430 P1-35L 150
520 200 750 P2-45L 200
522 200 750 R1-40 150
524 200 750 R2-55 200
526 350 750 R3-65 300
528 350 1400 R4-80 430
530 350 1400
532 350 1400

31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 33/458
Tab. 3
SND bearings 1 torque [Nm] 2 torque [Nm]
Soportes SND torsin torsin
513 81 220
515 81 220
516 203 430
517 203 430
518 203 430
519 203 430
520 415 750
522 415 750
524 415 750
526 415 750
528 720 1400
530 720 1400
532 720 1400

The radial internal clearance of spherical roller with tapered bore is expressed in m.
For other types of bearings, see the manufacturer tables.

Los juegos radiales residuales expresados en m, para cojinetes de rodillos con orificio cnico se
indican en la tabla siguiente.
juego residual
giu
oc
o re
sid
uo

Tab. 4
Hole Normal Normal
C3 C3
orificio Juego normal Juego normal
Over mm Up to mm Min. m Max. m Min. m Max. m
50 65 55 75 75 95
65 80 70 95 95 120
80 100 80 110 110 140
100 120 100 135 135 170
120 140 120 160 160 200
140 160 130 180 180 230

32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 34/458
14 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM /
MONTAJE REGULADORES DE CAPACIDAD Y COMPUERTAS DE ALETAS

14.1.1 Variable inlet vanes / reguladores de capacidad

aspirantes (Dapo)

Fan orientation / orientacin 9 16

orientamento 9 16
Open /
abierto

aperto

chiuso

Closed
cerrado

Fan orientation / orientacin 1 8

orientamento 1 8

chiuso

aperto

Closed
cerrado

33
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 35/458
14.1.2 Inlet damper/ compuertas de aletas

orientamento
Fan orientation /1orientacin
8 18

Closed
chiuso
closed
cerrado
aperto
Open /
abierto

Fan orientation9 /orientacin

orientamento 16 9 16

Open
a
/
p
abiertoerto
chiuso
Closed
cerrado

34
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 36/458
14.1.3 Constant oil level indicators for bearings/ ndicadores
de nivel constante para soportes de aceite

The constant oil level indicator supplied by CBI is with safety cage type.
Assembly the level correctly observing the A and B dimensions and applying the
Teflon tape on all the threads.
Fill it with oil according to the values indicated in the assembly drawing and as
described in picture 1.
The B dimension must correspond to the dimension indicated in the assembly
drawing; if not, act on the connection pipes until the nominal values are reached.
It is possible to check the B dimension on the square level indicator.
An excessive oil quantity may cause leakages from the seals as well as a bearing
temperature rise.
Once the correct indicator position has been checked, the perfect tightening of all
components has to be checked again, so as to prevent the accidental loosening during the
fan handling.
Check the tightening of locking squares on the level connection pipes.

Montar correctamente el grupo, respetando las cotas A-B, y colocando cinta de tefln en todas las
roscas de las piezas pequeas.
Llenar con aceite respetando los valores indicados en el diseo del conjunto y de la manera
indicada en la figura.
La cota B debe corresponder a la indicada en el diseo del conjunto; en caso contrario, actuar
sobre los tubos de racor hasta alcanzar los valores nominales.
Por comodidad se puede comprobar la cota B en el indicador de nivel de escuadra.
Una excesiva cantidad de aceite causa la salida del mismo de las uniones estancas y el aumento
de la temperatura de los cojinetes.
Una vez comprobada la correcta posicin del indicador, controlar el perfecto apriete de todos los
componentes, de manera que evite el aflojamiento incluso casual durante el desplazamiento de la
mquina.
Comprobar el apriete de las escuadras de bloqueo en los tubos de conexin del indicador.

35
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 37/458
 Posicin aceitador respecto a la
rotacin
Oil level delindicator
rodete visto desde el
position
ladoposizione
motor to
according oliatore rispetto
fan rotation
alla rotazione girante
Drive end
visto lato view
motore

90
90

B A B A

Bracket / estribo de

B 7 A

36
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 38/458
15 ANOMALOUS VIBRATIONS / VIBRACIONES ANOMALAS

15.1 Causes and interventions / Causas e intervenciones

Cause / Causas Frequency / Amplitude / Intervention /

Frecuencia Amplitud Intervencin
Independent of rotation speed
Constant unbalance Rotation frequency Balancing
Independiente de la velocidad de
La constante desequilibra Frecuencia de rotacin Equilibrar
la rotacin
Unbalance due to corrosion Continuous changes getting
and erosion Rotation frequency worse in time Wheel replacement
Desequilibre debido a la Frecuencia de rotacin Los cambios continuos que Ruede el reemplazo
corrosin y la erosin consiguen peor en el tiempo
Unbalance due to blades
failure Rotation frequency Sudden changes Wheel replacement
Desequilibre debido a Frecuencia de rotacin Cambios repentinos Ruede el reemplazo
fracaso de hojas
Independent of speed and
Constant unbalance Rotation frequency constant in time Wheel balancing
La constante desequilibra Frecuencia de rotacin Independiente de la velocidad y Ruede el reemplazo
la constante en el tiempo
Always much variable and
About equal to the lowest dependent of rotation speed and
Bearings instability shaft critical speed load Bearings replacement
Inestabilidad de cojinetes Acerca de igual al tnel ms Siempre mucha variable y Reemplazo de cojinetes
bajo la velocidad que crtica dependiente de la velocidad de la
rotacin y carga
Rotation frequency and Constant in time, dependent of
Wrong coupling assembly multiples rotation speed and load
Coupling alignment
La injusticia que empareja la Frecuencia de rotacin y La constante en el tiempo, el
Emparejar la alineacin
asamblea mltiplos dependiente de la velocidad de la
rotacin y carga
Allowance adjustment or
Bearings residual clearance
Rotation frequency Constant and irregular bearings replacement
Cojinetes el espacio libre
Frecuencia de rotacin La constante e irregular Ajuste de concesin o
residual
reemplazo de cojinetes

16 DOCUMENTATION / DOCUMENTACION

Each fan is supplied with / Cada ventilador es suministrado con::

1. Assembly drawing / Dibujo.

2. Manuals of all components of external supply / Los manuales de todos componentes
del suministro externo.
3. Declaration of compliance / La declaracin de la conformidad.
4. Balancing certificates / Equilibrar certificados.

37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 39/458
 WEG - ELECTRIC MOTOR
Installation and Maintenace Manual

WEG - MOTORES ELECTRICO

Manual de Instalacion y mantenimiento de ventilador

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 40/458

INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOW AND HIGH VOLTAGE
THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Transforming energy
into solutions
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 41/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

FOREWORD

The electric motor is the equipment widely used by man in the industrial development as most of
the machines he has been inventing depend on it.

Taking into consideration the prominent role the electric motor plays on people's life, it must be
regarded as a prime power unit embodying features that require special care including its installation and
maintenance in order to ensure perfect operation and longer life to the unit.

Its installation and maintenance demand specific cares, to guarantee the perfect functioning and
longer life to the motor.

The installation and maintenance manual for LOW AND HIGH VOLTAGE THREE-PHASE
INDUCTION MOTORS intends to assist those who deal with electric machines facilitating their task to
preserve the most important item of the unit:

The electric motor!

WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELTRICOS S.A. - MQUINAS.

---- IMPORTANT ----

READ CAREFULLY THE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL IN
ORDER TO ENSURE A SAFE AND CONTINUOUS OPERATION TO THE
EQUIPMENT.

9300.0009 I/8
November 2006

Doc. PBPNU5999001
2 Pag. 42/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................................6
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................7
2.1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2. UNPACKING.................................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3. STORAGE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.1. INDOOR STORAGE......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.2. OUTDOOR STORAGE...................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3. VERTICAL MOTORS STORAGE......................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.4. OTHER CARES DURING STORAGE................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.5. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.6. POLARIZATION INDEX ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4. PROLONGED STORAGE ............................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.1. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.2. GENERALITIES............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.3. STORAGE PLACE .......................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.3.1. INTERNAL STORAGE...................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.3.2. EXTERNAL STORAGE ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.4.5. SPARE PARTS .............................................................................................................................................. 11
2.4.6. SPACE HEATER ............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.4.7. INSULATION RESISTANCE............................................................................................................................ 11
2.4.8. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES................................................................................................................... 11
2.4.9. BEARINGS ................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.9.1. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY GREASE ......................................................................... 12
2.4.9.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY OIL................................................................................ 12
2.4.9.3. SLEEVE BEARING .......................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.10. BRUSHES................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.11. CONNECTION BOX: .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.12. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE AFTER LONG TERM STORAGE ......................................................................... 13
2.4.12.1. CLEANING................................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.12.2. BEARINGS LUBRICATION............................................................................................................. 13
2.4.12.3. ISOLATION RESISTANCE VERIFICATION....................................................................................... 13
2.4.12.4. OTHER........................................................................................................................................ 13
2.4.13. MAINTENANCE PLAN FOR STORAGE............................................................................................................ 14
2.5. HANDLING ................................................................................................................................................................. 15
2.5.1. HANDLING H LINE MOTORS ...................................................................................................................... 15
2.5.2. HANDLING M LINE MOTORS...................................................................................................................... 15
2.5.3. VERTICAL MOTORS HANDLING..................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.4. VERTICAL MOTORS POSITIONING ................................................................................................................ 16
3. INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................................................17
3.1. MECHANICAL ASPECTS ............................................................................................................................................... 17
3.1.1. MOUNTING.................................................................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2. FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.2.1. TYPES OF BASES........................................................................................................................... 18
3.1.3. ALIGNMENT/LEVELING................................................................................................................................. 20
3.1.4. COUPLINGS ................................................................................................................................................. 21
3.1.4.1. COUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR SLEEVE BEARING MOTORS - AXIAL CLEARANCE ............................. 22
3.2. ELECTRICAL ASPECTS................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.2.1. SUPPLY SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2.2. CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................. 23
3.2.3. GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.............................................................................................................. 24
3.2.4. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS.................................................................................. 25
3.2.4.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard IEC 60034-8)............................... 25
3.2.4.2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard NEMA MG1)................................. 26
3.2.5. ACCESSORIES CONNECTION DIAGRAMS....................................................................................................... 27
3.2.6. ELECTRICAL MOTORS STARTING.................................................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.1. STARTING SQUIRREL-CAGE MOTOR............................................................................................ 29
3.2.6.2. FREQUENCY OF DIRECT STARTINGS.............................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.3. LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT (Ip/In).................................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.4. STARTING OF SLIP RING MOTORS WITH RHEOSTAT...................................................................... 29
3.2.7. MOTOR PROTECTION................................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.7.1. TEMPERATURE LIMITS FOR WINDINGS.......................................................................................... 30
3.2.7.2. SPACE HEATERS............................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.7.3. VIBRATION LIMITS........................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.7.4. SHAFT VIBRATION LIMITS............................................................................................................. 32

Doc. PBPNU5999001
3 Pag. 43/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.3. COMMISSIONING........................................................................................................................................................ 33
3.3.1. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION .......................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.2. START-UP.................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.3. OPERATION................................................................................................................................................. 34
3.3.4. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................. 34
3.4. ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES.......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.5. MOTOR USED ON HAZARDOUS AREA EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERES.......................................................................... 34
3.5.1. GENERAL CARE WITH HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS................................................................................ 35
3.5.2. ADDITIONAL CARE RECOMMENDED FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS.................................................... 35
4. MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................................................................36
4.1. CLEANLINESS............................................................................................................................................................. 36
4.1.1. PARTIAL CLEANING...................................................................................................................................... 36
4.1.2. COMPLETE CLEANING .................................................................................................................................. 36
4.2. LUBRICATION............................................................................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1. GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS .................................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1.1. LUBRICATION INTERVALS ............................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1.2. TYPE AND AMOUNT OF GREASE..................................................................................................... 40
4.2.1.3. QUALITY AND QUANTITY OF GREASE ............................................................................................ 40
4.2.1.4. COMPATIBILITY ............................................................................................................................ 40
4.2.1.5. LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.6. BEARING LUBRICATION STEPS ...................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.7. SPRING DEVICE FOR GREASE REMOVAL......................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.8. REPLACEMENT OF BEARINGS......................................................................................................... 42
4.2.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARIGS LUBRICATED BY GREASE VERTICAL MOTORS ....................................................... 42
4.2.2.1. CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................................ 42
4.2.2.2. RELUBRICATION STEPS................................................................................................................. 42
4.2.2.3. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY OPPOSITE DRIVE-END BEARING ........................................................ 43
4.2.2.4. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY DRIVE-END BEARING......................................................................... 44
4.2.3. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY OIL............................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.1. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.2. BEARING OPERATION.................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.3. THERMAL PROTECTIONS SETTING................................................................................................. 45
4.2.3.4. BEARING MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 46
4.2.4. SLEEVE BEARINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.4.1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................. 48
4.2.4.2. DISASSEMBLY OF THE SLEEVE BEARING SYSTEM (TYPE "EF")......................................................... 48
4.2.4.3. SLEEVE BEARING ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................... 49
4.2.4.4. SETTING OF THERMAL PROTECTIONS (PT100)............................................................................... 49
4.2.4.5. WATER COOLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 50
4.2.4.6. LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................................... 50
4.2.4.7. SHAFT SEALS................................................................................................................................ 50
4.2.4.8. OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 51
4.3. AIR GAP CHECKING (LARGE ODP MOTORS) .................................................................................................................... 51
4.4. SLIP RINGS (FOR SLIP RING MOTORS) ............................................................................................................................. 51
4.5. BRUSH-HOLDERS AND BRUSHES (FOR WOUND ROTOR MOTORS)......................................................................................... 51
4.5.1. SHAFT GROUNDING DEVICE......................................................................................................................... 52
4.6. LIFTABLE BRUSH HOLDERS......................................................................................................................................... 53
4.6.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................... 53
4.6.2. PROCEDURE FOR MOTOR STARTING ............................................................................................................ 55
4.6.3. PROCEDURE AFTER MOTOR STARTING......................................................................................................... 55
4.6.4. ASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................................................... 57
4.6.4.1. BRUSH HOLDER LIFTING DEVICE................................................................................................... 57
4.6.4.2. SHORT-CIRCUIT BUSHING MOVEMENT SET.................................................................................... 58
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET................................................................................................... 58
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET................................................................................................... 59
4.6.4.4. RETURN PIN SET........................................................................................................................... 60
4.6.4.5. BRUSH HOLDER SET...................................................................................................................... 60
4.6.5. DISASSEMBLY.............................................................................................................................................. 61
4.6.6. BRUSHES LIFTING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................... 61
4.7. DRYING OF THE WINDINGS........................................................................................................................................ 61
4.8. DESMANTLING AND REASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................................... 61
4.8.1. " MASTER" LINE........................................................................................................................................... 61
4.8.1.1. ROTOR REMOVING........................................................................................................................ 62
4.8.2. A LINE......................................................................................................................................................... 62
4.8.3. F LINE ......................................................................................................................................................... 62
4.8.4. H LINE......................................................................................................................................................... 63
4.8.5. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SCREWS........................................................................................................... 64

Doc. PBPNU5999001
4 Pag. 44/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.9. GENERAL ADVICES ..................................................................................................................................................... 64

4.10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................................................................................................................ 65
5. SPARE PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................................66
5.1. HOW TO ORDER......................................................................................................................................................... 66
5.2. KEEPING STOCK ......................................................................................................................................................... 66
6. ABNORMAL SITUATIONS DURING OPERATION..................................................................................................................67
6.1. COMMON FAILURES ON INDUCTION MOTORS............................................................................................................. 67
6.1.1. SHORT-CIRCUIT BETWEEN TURNS ............................................................................................................... 67
6.1.2. WINDING FAILURES..................................................................................................................................... 67
6.1.3. ROTOR FAILURES (SQUIRREL CAGE) ........................................................................................................... 68
6.1.4. SLIP RING ROTOR FAILURES........................................................................................................................ 68
6.1.5. SHORT BETWEEN TURNS ON SLIP RING MOTORS......................................................................................... 68
6.1.6. BEARING FAILURES...................................................................................................................................... 68
6.1.7. SHAFT BREAKING ........................................................................................................................................ 69
6.1.8. DAMAGE ARISING FROM POORLY FITTED TRANSMISSION PARTS OR IMPROPER MOTOR ALIGNMENT............ 69
6.2. ABNORMAL SITUATIONS DURING OPERATION............................................................................................................. 70
6.3. ABNORMAL BEARING SITUATIONS AND FAILURES DURING OPERATION....................................................................... 72
7. WARRANTY TERMS FOR ENGINEERING PRODUCTS...........................................................................................................73

Doc. PBPNU5999001
5 Pag. 45/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

1. INTRODUCTION

IMPORTANT:
This manual concerns all Weg three-
phase asynchronous squirrel cage
and slip ring motors. Motors with
specialties can be supplied with
specific documents (drawings, connection
diagram, characteristic curves). These
documents must be carefully evaluated together
with this manual, before proceeding the
installation, operation or maintenance of the
motor.
For motors built with high number of special
features, contact WEG whenever an additional
support is required.
All standard and procedures included in this
manual must be followed accordingly to ensure a
proper operation to the equipment as well as to
ensure safety conditions to the personnel involved
in the motor operation.
Following these procedures is also important for
the warranty policy as explained at the end of this
manual.
Therefore, we strongly recommend to any user of
Weg motors to read carefully this manual before
motor installation and operation. In case you still
have further doubts, please contact WEG.

Doc. PBPNU5999001
6 Pag. 46/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS The motors shipped in wooden boxes must be

always lifted by the eyebolts or by forklift
machines and never by the shaft. The box never
2.1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
can be turned around. Lifting and lowering of
such boxes must be done gently in order to avoid
All personnel involved with electrical installations,
damage to the bearings.
either handling, lifting, operation and
Make a visual inspection after the unpacking has
maintenance, should be well-informed and up-to-
been effected. Do not remove the protecting
dated concerning the safety standard and
grease from the shaft end neither the stoppers
principles that govern the work and furthermore,
from the terminal boxes. These protecting devices
they should be advised to heed them.
should remain at their places until the installation
Before work commences, it is the responsibility of
is finished. For motors fitted with shaft locking
the person in charge to ascertain that these have
device, this device must be removed. For motors
been duly complied with and to alert his
fitted with ball bearings, rotate manually the rotor
personnel of the inherent hazards of the job in
several times. If damages are noticed, contact the
hand.
carrier and Weg Mquinas immediately.
It is recommended that these tasks be
undertaken by qualified personnel and they
should be instructed to:
2.3. STORAGE
- Avoid contact with energized circuits or
rotating parts;
- Avoid by-passing or rendering inoperative any 2.3.1. INDOOR STORAGE
safeguards or protective devices;
- Avoid extended exposure in close proximity to When motors are not immediately unpacked,
machinery with high noise levels; boxes should be stored in their normal upright
- Use proper care and procedures in handling, position in a dry temperature place, free of dust
lifting, installing, operating and maintaining the dirt, gases and corrosive atmosphere. Any other
equipment, and objects should not be stacked over or against the
- Follow consistently any instructions and boxes.
Motors must be storaged in places free from
product documentation supplied when they do
such work. vibrations in order to avoid damage to the
Before initiating maintenance procedures, be sure bearings.
that all power sources are disconnected from the
motor and accessories to avoid electric shock.
2.3.2. OUTDOOR STORAGE

If possible choose a dry storage location safe

2.2. UNPACKING
from flooding and free from vibrations. Repair any
damage to the packing before putting the
Prior to shipment motors are factory-tested and
equipment in storage, in so far as this necessary
dynamically balanced.
to ensure proper storage conditions. Position
The adjusting and sliding surfaces are protected
machines, devices and crates on pallets, wooden
with corrosion inhibitors.
beams or foundations that guarantee protection
Upon receipt, we recommend to check the boxes
against ground dampness. Prevent the equipment
to see if any damage has occurred during
from sinking into the ground and the circulation of
transportation.
air underneath the equipment from being
The motors are shipped with a shaft locking
impeded.
device to avoid any damage to the bearings. We
Covers or tarpaulins used to protect the
recommended to keep this device in stock to be
equipment against the weather must not make
used on all further transportation.
contact with the surfaces of the equipment.
Ensure adequate air circulation by positioning
If any damage, contact the carrier and Weg
wooden spacer blocks between the equipment
Mquinas. The lack of notice will void the
and such covers.
warranty.

When lifting the boxes, it is important to observe

the locals appropriate for this purpose as well as
to check the weight of the box and the hoist
capacity.

Doc. PBPNU5999001
7 Pag. 47/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2.3.3. VERTICAL MOTORS STORAGE
Vertical motors with grease lubricated bearings
can be stored so much in the vertical position as
in the horizontal.
Vertical motors with oil lubricated bearings should
be necessarily stored in vertical position and with
the bearings lubricated.
The bearings oil of the vertical motors that are
carried in the horizontal position is withdrawn to
avoid leaks during it carries. When receiving,
these motors must be put in the vertical position
and their bearings should be lubricated.
2.3.4. OTHER CARES DURING STORAGE
For motors fitted with space heaters, these
accessories must be kept switched-on.
If painting has suffered any damage, this must be
repainted to avoid rusting. The same appliers to
the machined surfaces when protecting grease
has been wasted.
For slip ring motors, brushes must be lifted and
removed from their pocket to avoid oxidation
between contacts and rings when these motors
are storage for more than 2 months.
NOTE: Before operating the motor,
brushes must be reset in their pocket
and the fitting must be checked.
Doc. PBPNU5999001
8 Pag. 48/458
2.3.5. INSULATION RESISTANCE
* * WARNING! * *
Before measuring insulation resistance, the
machine must be at standstill and all windings
being tested must be connected to the frame and
to ground for a time to remove all residual
electrostatic charge. Grounds surge capacitors, if
furnished, before disconnecting and isolate from
leads before meggering.
The non observation of these precautions may
result in injury to personnel.
When a motor is not immediately put into
operation, it should be protected against
moisture, high temperatures and impurities in
order to avoid damage to the insulation. The
winding insulation resistance must be measured
before operating the motor.
If the ambient contains high humidity, a periodical
inspection is recommended during storage. It is
difficult to determine rules for the actual insulation
resistance value of a motor as the resistance
varies according to type, size, rated voltage,
condition of the insulating material used and
method of construction of the motor. A lot of
experience is required to decide when a motor is
ready for operation. Periodical records will help to
take such decision.
The isolation resistance should be measure using
a Megohmmeter. The test voltage for the motors
windings should be according the table below in
accordance with the norm IEEE43.
Winding rated Insulation resistance test
voltage (V) direct voltage (V)
< 1000 500
1000 2500 500 1000
2501 5000 1000 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 5000
> 1000 5000 - 10000
The test voltage for space heaters should be
500Vcc and for other accessories 100Vcc. The
insulation resistance measurement for thermal
protectors is not recommended.
If the test is performed at a different
temperature, it is necessary to correct the reading
to 40C by using an insulation resistance variation
curve in relation to temperature, given by the
motor it self. If this curve is not available it is
possible to use an approximate correction given
by the curve of figure 2.3, as per NBR 5383 /
IEEE43 Standards.
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Minimum Insulation Resistance:

- If the insulation resistance measured is smaller
than 100 M, the winding must be dried
according to the procedure below before starting
the motor:
- Disassemble the motor removing the rotor and
the bearings;
- Take the frame with stator winding to an oven
and warms it to a temperature of 130C, keeping
this temperature for at least 8 hours. For great
machines (above of the carcass 630 IEC or 104XX
series NEMA, it can be necessary to the stay for at
least 12 hours).
Use the same procedure for rotor windings of slip
ring motors.
Double check the insulation resistance to verify if
it has reached the acceptable values, according to
table 2.3.a, otherwise, refers to WEG for
instructions.

2.3.6. POLARIZATION INDEX

The polarization index (P.I.) is traditionally defined

as ratio of the 10 min insulation resistance (IR10)
to the 1 min insulation resistance (IR1), tested at
a relatively constant temperature.

Through the polarization index, the user can be

evaluated the motor isolation conditions,
according to the table bellow:
Figure 2.3.
Polarization Index Insulation Level
On old motors, still in operation,
higher values are normally obtained. 1 or smaller Bad
The comparison with values obtained < 1,5 Dangerous
from previous tests on the same 1,5 a 2,0 Abnormal
motor under identical load, temperature and 2,0 a 3,0 Good
humidity conditions will be a better indication of
3,0 a 4,0 Very Good
the insulation conditions in comparison to the
value obtained from a single test. Any sudden or > 4,0 Excellent
high reduction of the value requires careful Table 2.3b. - Polarization index (ratio between 10 and 1
attention. minute).

Insulation Resistance Immediately after the measurement of

Insulation Level
Value the Isolation resistance, the windings
2M or smaller Bad must be grounded to prevent accident.
< 50M Dangerous
50...100M Abnormal
100...500M Good
500...1000M Very good
> 1000M Excellent
Table 2.3a. - Reference limits for insulation resistant of
electric motors.

Doc. PBPNU5999001
9 Pag. 49/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2.4. PROLONGED STORAGE
2.4.1. INTRODUCTION
The instructions for long term storage described
as follow are valid for motors to be long term
stored and/or long periods of standstill before
the commissioning.
2.4.2. GENERALITIES
The existing tendency, especially during the
construction of the plant, of storing the motors
for several years before commissioning or to
install immediately some units, results that the
motors are exposed to influences that cannot be
evaluated in advance for this time's period.
It is difficult to evaluate the different forms of
stress (atmospheric, chemical, thermal, and
mechanic) imposed to the motor, which might
happen during storage maneuvers, assembly,
initial tests and storage until the
commissioning.
Other essential factor is the transportation, for
example, the general contractor may transport
the motor or the complete unit with motor as
joint transportation to the installation location.
The motor internal gaps (air gap, bearings and
interior of connection box) are exposed to the
atmospheric air and temperature fluctuations.
Due to the air humidity, it is possible the liquid
condensation and, depending on the kind and
air contamination degree, aggressive substances
may penetrate into these spaces.
As a consequence after long periods, the
internal components such as the bearings might
get rust, the insulation resistance can decrease
to under the admissible values and the grease
lubricant capacity in the bearings is adversely
affected. This influence increases the damage
risk before commissioning of the plant.
To keep manufacturer's warranty, should
be insured that the described preventive
measures in this instructions, as:
constructive aspects, preservation,
packing, storage and inspections, be
followed and registered.
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001
2.4.3. STORAGE PLACE
In order to provide the best storage conditions
to the motor during long standstill periods, the
storage location should obey rigorously the
criteria described as follow:
2.4.3.1. INTERNAL STORAGE
- Closed storage room with roof;
- The location must be protected against
humidity, vapors, aggressive fumes discharge,
fast heat changes, gnawing and insects.
- It must not present corrosive gases such as
chlorine, sulfur dioxide or acid;
- It must not present continuous or intermittent
severe vibrations.
- To have ventilation system with filter;
- It must not present quickly changes of
temperature;
- Ambient temperature (5 C, > t < 60 C) and
must not present quickly changes of
temperature;
- Relative air humidity < 50%;
- To have prevention against dirt and dust
deposits;
- To have fire detection system.
- Electrical supply for space heater and
illumination must be provided;
If some of these requisites do not be attended
by the storage environment, WEG suggests that
additional protections be incorporated in the
motor packing during the storage period, like
follows:
- Closed wooden or similar box with electrical
installation, enable to the space heaters
supply;
- Closed wooden box or similar with installation
that allows the space heaters be energized;
- If there is a risk of fungus infestation and
formation, the packing must be protected in
the storage location by spraying or painting it
with appropriated chemical agents.
- Preparation of packing must be done with
greatest care by an experienced person. A
reliable packing company must take over of
the packing.
Pag. 50/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2.4.3.2. EXTERNAL STORAGE 2.4.7. INSULATION RESISTANCE

The outdoor storage of the motor is not
recommended.
If the external storage cannot be avoided, the
motor should be packed in specific packing for
this condition, as described bellow.
- For outdoor storage, besides the packing
recommended above, we recommend to cover
completely this packing with a protection
against dust, humidity and other strange
materials.
- Place the packing in pallets, wooden bunches
or foundations that guarantee the protection
against the soil humidity.
- Prevent the packing sink itself in the soil.
- After covering the machine, a shed should be
build to protect it of rain, snow and excessive
sun heat.
IMPORTANT
It is recommendable check the storage local
conditions and the motors condition according to
the maintenance plan for long term storage,
described in this manual.
- During the storage period, the winding
insulation resistance of the motor should be
measured according to item 2.3.5 of this
manual and registered every 3 months and
before the motor installation.
- Eventual drops in the insulation resistance
level must be investigated.
2.4.8. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES
- At factory, all exposed surfaces (for example,
the shaft edge and flanges) are protected with
a temporary protective agent (rust inhibiter).
- This protective coating should be reapplied
every 6 months at least. When this coating is
removed and/or damaged, the same
preventive action must be done.
Recommended products:
Name: Dasco Guard 400 TX AZ, Manufacturer:
D.A. Stuart Ltda.
Name: TARP, Manufacturer: Castrol.

2.4.5. SPARE PARTS

- If parts have been supplied separately

(connection boxes, heat exchanger, covers,
etc...) these parts must be packed as
described above.
- The air relative humidity inside the packing
should not exceed 50% until unpacking the
machine.

2.4.6. SPACE HEATER

- The space heater installed in the motor must

be energized during the storage period to
avoid the moisture condensation inside the
motor and this way keeping the winding
insulation resistance within acceptable levels.

THE SPACE HEATER OF THE MOTOR

MUST BE MANDATORILY ENERGIZED
WHEN THE MOTOR IS STORED IN LOCAL
WITH TEMPERATURE < 5 C AND
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY > 50%.

11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 51/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2.4.9. BEARINGS
2.4.9.1. ANTIFRICTION BEARING
LUBRICATED BY GREASE
The bearings are lubricated in the factory for
make the motor tests.
During the storage period, every two months is
necessary to remove the shaft brake device and
turn the shaft manually to conserve the bearing in
good conditions.
After 6 months of storage and before starting in
operation, the bearings should be regreased, as
item 4.2.1.5 of this manual.
If motor is kept in storage for approximately 2
years or more, the bearings must be inspected
and regreased according to item 4.2 of this
manual.
2.4.9.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARING
LUBRICATED BY OIL
- Depending on the position, the motor can be
transported with or without oil in your
bearings.
- The motor must be stored in its original
position of operation and with oil in the
bearings;
- The oil level should be respected, remaining in
the half the oil sight glass.
During the storage period, every two months is
necessary to remove the shaft brake device and
turn the shaft manually to conserve the bearing in
good conditions.
After 6 months of storage and before starting in
operation, the bearings should be relubricated, as
item 4.2.3.1 of this manual.
If motor is kept in storage for approximately 2
years or more, the bearings must be inspected
and relubricated according to item 4.2 of this
manual.
2.4.9.3. SLEEVE BEARING
- Depending on the position, the motor can be
transported with or without oil in your
bearings;
- The motor must be stored in its original
position of operation and with oil in the
bearings;
- The oil level should be respected, remaining in
the half the oil sight glass;
- During the storage period, every two months is
necessary to remove the shaft brake device
and rotate at about 30 rpm for the oil
circulation and to conserve the bearing in good
conditions.
12
Doc. PBPNU5999001
If is not possible to rotate the shaft of the motor,
the follow procedure should be used to protect
internally the bearing and the contact surfaces
against corrosion:
- Drain the whole bearing oil;
- Dismantle the bearing, following the procedure
described in the item 4.2.4.2 of this manual;
- Clean the bearing;
- Apply the anti-corrosive (ex.: TECTIL 511,
Valvoline or Dasco Guard 400TXAZ) in the
bearing, bearing line (top and bottom half)
and in the shaft contact surface of the motor;
- Assemble the bearing, following the procedure
described in the item 4.2.4.3 of this manual;
- Close all tapped holes with screw plugs;
- Seal the gaps between the shaft and bearing
seal and between bearing seal and bearing
housing by using self-adhesive permanent
tape;
- Connecting flanges (Ex.: Oil inlet and outlet)
must be covered with blank plates.
- Remove the bearing top sight glass and spray
the corrosion inhibitor on the bearing.
- Put some desiccant (silica gel) inside of the
bearing. The desiccant absorbs the humidity
and prevents the formation of moisture and
water condensation inside the bearing.
- Close the bearing tightly with the top sight
glass.
In case the standstill period is longer then 6
months:
- Repeat the procedures described above.
- Replace the desiccant (silica gel) into the
bearing each six months.
In case the standstill period is longer than 2
years:
- Dismantle the bearing;
- Preserve and store the bearing parts.
2.4.10. BRUSHES
- The brushes of the slip rings motors should be
lifted in the brush-holder, because should not
remain in contact with the slip-rings during the
storage period, avoiding thus the slip-rings
oxidation.
- Before the motor installation and
commissioning, the brushes should come back
to the original position.
Pag. 52/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2.4.11. CONNECTION BOX: 2.4.12.3. ISOLATION RESISTANCE

When the winding insulation resistance of the
motor is verified, the terminal box and accessories
box must also be verified:
- The interior should be dry, cleaned and free of
any dust deposit.
- The contacts should be free of rust
(corrosion).
- The seals should be in good conditions.
- The cables inlet should be correctly sealed.
If any of these items is not correct, the parts
must be cleaned or replaced.
VERIFICATION
Before starting in operation the insulation
resistance must be verified, according to the item
2.3.5 of this manual.
2.4.12.4. OTHER
Follow the further procedures described in the
chapter 3.3 Commissioning of this manual,
before putting the machine in operation.

2.4.12. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE AFTER

LONG TERM STORAGE

2.4.12.1. CLEANING

- The machine interior and exterior should be

free of oil, water, dust and dirt. The inside of
the motor should be vacuum cleaned.
- Remove the corrosion inhibitor of the exposed
surfaces with a cloth soaked in petroleum
based solvent.
- Be sure that the bearings and cavities used to
lubrication are free of dirt and the plugs on the
holes are correctly sealed and tighten.
Oxidations and marks on the bearings seats
and shaft should be carefully removed.

2.4.12.2. BEARINGS LUBRICATION

Use grease or oil specified for bearings

lubrication. This information is printed on the
bearings nameplate and the lubrication should be
made as described in the chapter 4 Maintenance
of this Manual, according to the bearing type.
Note: Sleeve bearings, where was applied
internally the protection product against corrosion
and desiccant, these bearings should be
dismounted as the procedure described in the
item 4.2.4.2 of this manual, washes for remove
the anti-corrosive and the desiccants must be
removed.
Assemble again the bearings, as the procedure
described in the item 4.2.4.3 of this manual and
proceeds the re-lubrication.

13
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 53/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2.4.13. MAINTENANCE PLAN FOR STORAGE

During the storage period, the motor maintenance must be executed and registered according to the plan
described in the table below:

Each two Each six Each 2 Before

Monthly Note
months months years operation
Storage local
Inspect the cleaning conditions X X
Inspect the humidity and temperature
X
conditions
Verify signals insects infestations X
Measure the vibration level X
Packing
Inspect physical damages X
Inspect the relative humidity in the
X
interior
Change desiccant in the packing
X When necessary
(if any)
Space heater
Verify the operation conditions X
Complete motor
Make external cleaning X X
Verify the painting conditions X
Verify the rust inhibitor in the exposed
X
parts
Replace the rust inhibitor X
Windings
Measure the insulation resistance X X
Measure the polarization index X X
Connection box and grounding terminals
Clean the inside of the box X X
Inspect the seals and gaskets
Antifriction bearing lubricated by grease or oil
Turn the shaft X
Relubricate the bearing X X
Dismount and clean the bearing X
Sleeve bearing
Turn the shaft X
Apply rust inhibitor and desiccant X
Clean and relubricate the bearings X
Dismount and store the parts X
Brushes (slip-ring motors)
Lift the brushes During the storage
Lower the brushes and verify the
X
contact with the slip-rings

14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 54/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2.5. HANDLING The eyebolts attached to bearing housing, heat

exchanger, end-bells, etc, should be used to
Use only the existing eyebolts to lift the motor. handle these components only.
Never lift the motor by the shaft. Check the motor
weight. Lifting and lowering must be done gently 2.5.2. HANDLING M LINE MOTORS
in order to avoid damage to the bearings.
M LINE
2.5.1. HANDLING H LINE MOTORS

H LINE

Notes:
1) Lifting lugs on the frame are designed for
lifting machine only. Do not use for lifting
coupled equipment such as pumps,
compressors, gears or other equipment;
2) The chains or handles of hoisting must
have on maximum angle of 30 with
regard to vertical line:
3) Use all of eyebolts fixed in the frame,
supplied together with the motor;
4) Failure to observe these precautions may Notes:
result in damage to the equipment, injury 1) Do not the motor by the heat exchanger;
to personnel or both. 2) Lifting without heat exchanger;
3) If gravity center is not exactly in the
middle of the lifting lugs, use one of the
ways as per item 3.

15
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 55/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2.5.3. VERTICAL MOTORS HANDLING 2.5.4. VERTICAL MOTORS POSITIONING

The WEG vertical motors are supplied with 8

eyebolts for lifting, being 4 at the front part and 4
at the back of the motors.
Some motors are carried in the horizontal position
and need to be moved to the running position.
The procedure below should be followed when
handling vertical mounting motors from the
horizontal to vertical position and vice-versa,
independent of the product model or line.

The handling of the WEG vertical motors must be

done as the illustration above.
Always use the 4 eyebolts for motors movement
in vertical position, therefore the lifting chains or
cables can also stay in the vertical position
avoiding thus awful efforts to the eyebolts.

1) Lift the motor through the 4 lateral eyebolts

using 2 cranes;

2) Lower the crane that is fixed in the motor

drive end side and simultaneously lift the
crane that is fixed in the motor non drive end
side until the motor reaches the balance.

3) Loosen the crane that is fixed in the motor

drive end and turn it 180 to allow the fixation
of the crane previously loosen in the other 2
eyebolts located in the motor non drive end.

4) Fasten the loosen crane in the other 2

eyebolts on the motor non drive end and lift it
until the motor gets the vertical position.

16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 56/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3. INSTALLATION
Electric motors should be installed in locations of
easy access for inspection and maintenance. If
the surrounding atmosphere contains humid,
corrosive or flammable substances or particles, it
is essential to ensure an adequate degree of
protection. The installation of motors in ambient
where there are vapours, gases or dusts,
flammable or combustible materials, subject to
fire or explosion, should be done in accordance
with ABNT NBR, NEC Art. 500 (National Electrical
Code) and UL-674 (Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.) Standard.
Under no circumstances, motors can be enclosed
in boxes or covered with materials which may
impede or reduce the free circulation of cooling
air. Motors fitted with external cooling must be
located at least 50mm from the ground to permit
free air circulation. The air inlet and outlet should
never be obstructed or reduced by conductors,
pipes or other objects. The installation site should
permit conditions of air renewal at a rate of 30m
per minute for each 100kW motor output.
3.1. MECHANICAL ASPECTS
3.1.1. MOUNTING
In order to ensure the adequate operation, in
additional to a stable foundation, the motor must
be precisely aligned with the coupled equipment
and the components mounted on the shaft end
must be adequately balanced.
Notice:
With the machine mounted and coupled, the
relation between the foundation natural frequency
and:
- The motor speed frequency;
- The double speed frequency;
- The double line frequency.
Must be as specified according described bellow:
Foundation natural frequency of the 1st order:
- +25% or -20% in relation to the above
frequencies.
Foundation natural frequency of higher order:
- +10% or -10% in relation to the above
frequencies.
17
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.2. FOUNDATIONS
The motor base must be level and free from
vibrations. For this reason, concrete foundation is
recommended.
The type of base to be built will depend on the
nature of the soil at the installation site or on the
floor capacity.
When designing the motor foundation, it must be
taken into consideration the fact that the motor
might, occasionally, be submitted to a torque
higher than the rated torque. If such designing is
not correctly made, vibration problems can occur
to the unit (foundation, motor and driven
machine).
NOTE: On the concrete base, a metallic plate to
support the leveling bolt must be provided.
Based on figure 3.1, the forces over the
foundation can be calculated by the following
formulas:
(4C max)
F1 = +0.5.m.g . +
( A)
(4C max)
F2 = +0.5.m.g.
( A)
Where:
F1 and F2 - Forces on the base (N).
g - Gravity acceleration (9.81m/s).
m - Motor mass (kg).
Cmax - Breakdown torque (Nm).
A - Taken from motor dimensional drawing (m).
Figure 3.1.
NOTE: The drawing above shows the forces over
the motor when running clockwise. For counter
clockwise rotation, forces are reversed (F1, F2,
4.Cmax.).
Pag. 57/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Steel or iron blocks, plane surfaces blocks with
anchorage devices can be fitted in the concrete
foundation to fix the motor feet as suggested in
figure 3.2. It is important that all the structure
equipment are made in such a way that they can
transmit any force or torque which may occur
during the operation.
Figure 3.2. - Motor Fixation Types.
18
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.2.1. TYPES OF BASES
a) Concrete bases
As mentioned above, the concrete bases are the
most commonly used for the fixation of these
motors.
The type and size of the foundation - as well as
other fixing devices for this purpose will depend
on the type and size of the motor.
The motors can be mounted on a concrete base
with four foundation blocks. See dimensions of
the installation components in the table below.
Installation and examples:
Pag. 58/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Fastening bolts Tapered pins

Hole diameter in the Foundation block
(DIN 933) (DIN 258)
motor feet
Number Dimension Number Dimension Number Dimension
28 4 M24 4 M24 x 60 2 14 x 100
36 4 M30 4 M30 x 70 2 14 x 100
42 4 M36 4 M36 x 80 2 14 x 100
48 4 M42 4 M42 x 90 2 14 x 100

Mounting dimensions
Thread
s t u v w
M26 and M30 50 450 220 265 315
M36 70 539 240 300 350
M42 70 600 270 355 400
Table 3.1. - Anchorage measurements (example of installation).

Examples of preparation:
Remove all dirt from the foundation blocks in
order to ensure a perfect anchorage between
the foundation blocks and the motor. Fix the
foundation blocks at the motor feet by means of
bolts.
Provide shims of different thickness (total
trickiness of about 2mm) between the motor
feet and the foundation base to ensure a further
accurate alignment vertically.
Inside the feet holes, the fastening bolts must
be covered with a metal sheet or presspan in
order to center the foundation blocks exactly to
the feet holes and perform an accurate
alignment horizontally.
Figure 3.3 - Example 1. Place shims or leveling bolts under the
foundation blocks in order to obtain a perfect
motor leveling and alignment between the
motor and the driven machine. After introducing
the concrete, make an accurate control of the
alignment. Eventual small corrections can be
done by washers or metal plates or by means of
a new adjustment of the fastening bolt
clearences. Tighten now firmly all fastening
bolts.
Make sure all motor feet surfaces are supported
uniformly without damaging motor frame. After
completing the test, introduce two tapered pins
for correct fastening. For this purpose, use the
pre-drilled holes in the feet.

Figure 3.4 - Example 2.

19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 59/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
b) Slide rails
When drive system is done by pulleys, the motor
should be mounted on slide rails and the lower
part of the belt must be pulling.
The rail that stays near the drive pulley is
positioned in such a manner that the adjusting
bolt be between the motor and the driven
machine. The other rail must be positioned with
the bolt in the opposite position, as shown in
figure 3.5. The motor is bolted to the rails and set
on the base.
The drive pulley is then aligned in such a way that
its center be in the same level of the driven pulley
center.
Motor and driven machine shafts must be in a
parallel position.
The belt should not be excessively stretched, see
figure 3.12. After the alignment, rails are to be
fixed.
Figure 3.5.
c) Metallic bases
The metallic bases must have a flat surface under
motor feet in order to avoid frame deformation.
The bearing housing surface should be so
determined that under the feet of the motor one
can place shim plates of approximately 2mm
thickness.
Motor should not be removed from their common
metallic bases for alignment, the metallic bases
should be leveled on the actual foundation.
When a metallic base is used to adjust the height
of the motor shaft end with the machine shaft
end, it should be leveled on the concrete base.
After the base has been leveled, foundation studs
tightened, and the coupling checked, the metal
base and the studs are then cemented.
20
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.3. ALIGNMENT/LEVELING
The electric motor must be accurately aligned
with the driven machine, particularly in cases of
direct coupling. An incorrect alignment can cause
bearing defects, vibrations and even shaft
breaking.
The best way to ensure correct alignment is to
use dial indicator placed on each coupling half,
one reading radially and the other axially.
In this way, simultaneous readings can be
informed and one can check any parallel (figure
3.6a) or concentricity deviations (figure 3.6b) by
rotating the shaft. The dial indicator should not
exceed 0.05mm. If the operator is sufficiently
skilled, he can obtain alignment with clearance
gauge and a steel ruler, providing that the
couplings be perfect and centered (figure 3.6c).
A measurement at 4 different points of the
circumference should not give a reading
difference larger than 0.03mm.
Figure 3.6a Parallelism deflection.
Figure 3.6b Concentricity deflection.
On the alignment/leveling it is important to take
into consideration the effect of the temperature
over the motor and driven machine. The different
expansion levels of the coupled machines can
modify the alignment/leveling during motor
operation.
After the set (motor and base) is perfectly aligned
either at cold or at hot, motor must be bolted, as
shown in figure 3.7. There are instruments which
use visible laser ray added by specific computer
programs that can perform and ensure high
precision alignment.
Pag. 60/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 3.7.
NOTE: Bolts, nuts and washers can be supplied
with the motor, if required.
3.1.4. COUPLINGS
a) Direct coupling
Whenever possible, it is recommended to use
direct coupling due to lower cost, less space
required, no belt slippage and lower accident risk.
In case of speed ratio drives, it is also common to
use direct coupling with a gearbox.
IMPORTANT: Align carefully the shaft ends
using, whenever possible, flexible coupling,
tolerating a minimum clearance of 3mm between
the couples.
Figure 3.6b - Radial alignment (concentricity).
b) Gearbox coupling
Poorly aligned gearbox couplings normally cause
jerking motions which provoke vibration to the
coupling and to the motor. Therefore, due care
must be given to correct shaft alignment,
perfectly parallel in cases of straight gears, and at
the correct angle for bevel or helical gears.
Perfect gear arrangements can be checked by
inserting a strip of paper on which the teeth
marks will be traced after a single rotation.
21
Doc. PBPNU5999001
c) Belt and pulley coupling
Belt transmission is the most commonly used
when a speed ratio is required.
ASSEMBLY OF PULLEYS: The assembly of
pulleys on shafts featured with keyway and
threaded hole must be done by inserting it
halfway up to the keyway merely by manual
pressure.
On shafts without threaded hole it is
recommended to heat up the pulley to about
80C (figure 3.8).
Figure 3.8. - Assembly or pulleys.
DISASSEMBLY OF PULLEYS: for disassembly
of pulleys it is recommended to use the devices
shown in figure 3.9 in order not to damage the
key neither shaft surface.
Figure 3.9. - Disassembly of pulleys.
Hammers should be avoided when fitting pulleys
and bearings. The fitting of bearings with the aid
of hammers causes spots in the bearing races.
These initially small spots increase with usage and
can develop to a stage that completely damage
the bearing. The correct positioning of a pulley is
shown in figure 3.10.
INCORRECT CORRECT INCORRECT
Figure 3.10.
Pag. 61/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
RUNNING: Avoid unnecessary thrusts on the
bearings by ensuring that the shafts are parallel
and the pulleys perfectly aligned (figure 3.11).
Laterally misaligned pulleys, when running,
transmit alternating knocks to the rotor and can
damage the bearing housing. Belt slippage can be
avoided by applying a resin type material such as
rosin.
Figure 3.11. - Correct pulley alignment.
Belt tension is only required to avoid slippage
during operation (figure 3.12).
Figure 3.12 - Belt tension.
NOTE: A belt with excessive tension increases the
force on the shaft end causing vibrations and
fatigue leading to a possible shaft rupture.
Excessively small pulleys should be avoided; these
cause shaft flexion as belt traction increases with
the decrease of pulley size.
When specific pulleys are required, contact
Weg Mquinas in order to insure a correct
designing.
22
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Due to the existing tensions on the belts, there is
a reaction acting as radial load over the motor
shaft end.
The data to calculate such reaction (radial force)
are:
- Output transmitted [kW] (P);
- Motor speed [rpm] (RPM);
- Diameter of driven pulley [mm] (DPMV);
- Diameter of driven pulley [mm] (DPMT);
- Distance between centers [mm] (I);
- Friction coefficient [-] (MI) - (normally 0.5);
- Slip coefficient [-] (K);
- Belt contact angle on smaller pulley [RAD]
(alfa);
- FR: Radial force acting over the shaft end [N]
(FR).
DPMV DPMT
ALFA =
1
(MIxALFA ) + 1
K = 1. 1x
(MIxALFA ) 1
18836, 25N K 2 x[1 COS ( ALFA ] + 1.21x[1 + COS ( ALFA )]
FR = x
DPMTxRPM 2
NOTE: Always use pulleys duly balanced. Avoid,
in all cases, oversized keys as these can cause
unbalancing. In case these instructions are not
followed accordingly, vibration levels will occur.
3.1.4.1. COUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR
SLEEVE BEARING MOTORS - AXIAL
CLEARANCE
Motors fitted with sleeve bearings should be
directly coupled to the driven machine or even
using a gearbox. Pulley/belt coupling is not
recommended.
These sleeve bearing motors have three
identification marks on the shaft end. The central
mark (red painted) indicated the magnetic center;
the other two indicate the limits for the rotor axial
displacement.
When coupling the motor, the following aspects
must be considered:
- Bearing axial clearance which is shown on the
chart below for each bearing size.
- Axial displacement of the driven machine, if
any.
- Maximum axial clearance allowed by the
coupling.
Pag. 62/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Clearances applied to sleeve bearings for motor

supplied by Weg Mquinas

Total axial clearance

Bearing size
in mm
9 3+3=6
11 4+4=8
14 5 + 5 = 10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
22 12 + 12 = 24
28 12 + 12 = 24
Table 3.3.

The motor must be coupled in such a way that

the arrow attached to the bearing frame be
positioned exactly on the central mark (red
painted) while motor is in operation. Figure 3.15.
During motor starting or even under operation,
rotor should move freely between the two
external lots if the driven machine creates any
3.2. ELECTRICAL ASPECTS
axial force on the motor shaft. Under no
circumstance, motor can operate continuously
with axial force on the bearing. 3.2.1. SUPPLY SYSTEM
Sleeve bearings normally used by Weg Mquinas
are not designed to withstand axial forces Proper electric power supply is very important. All
continuously. the wires and protection system must ensure an
excellent quality of electric power supply on the
The figure 3.14 shows part of the drive end motor terminals within the following parameters:
bearing highlighting a basic configuration of the - Voltage: It can fluctuate within a range of
shaft/bearing set as well as axial clearances. more or less 10% in relation to rated value.
- Frequency: It can fluctuate within a range of -
3 and +5% in relation to rated value.

3.2.2. CONNECTION

In order to connect the supply conductors,

Figure 3.14.
The figure 3.15 shows part of the bearing frame
where the arrow indicates the magnetic center
and the three marks on the shaft.
remove the covers of the rotor and stator terminal
boxes (if any).
Cut the sealing rings (standard motors are not
supplied with cable glands) according to the
diameter to be used.
Insert the conductors into the rings. Cut the
supply conductors to desired length, disbarkt the
ends and assemble the terminals on them.
Connect the metallic covering of the conductors (if
any) to the common grounding.
Cut the grounding terminal to size and connect it
to the existing connector in the terminal box
and/or frame.
Fasten all connections firmly.
NOTE: Do not use, for terminal fastening, eel
washers or other material which do not have
excellent electric conductivity characteristics.

23
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 63/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

It is recommended to apply a grease protection

on all connections before performing the
connection. Insert all sealing rings into the
respective grooves. Screw the terminal box cover
carefully, ensuring that the sealing rings are
correctly introduced.

3.2.3. GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

We are presenting below orientative connection

diagrams for squirrel cage and slip ring induction
motors as well as motors supplied with lighting
arrestors and surge capacitors.

Figure 3.17. - General connection diagram for slip

ring motors.

Figure 3.16. - General connection diagram for

squirrel cage motors.

Figure 3.18. - General connection diagram for

motors supplied with lightning arrestors and
capacitors.

24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 64/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.2.4. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS

The following connection diagrams show terminals identification in the connection box and the possible
connections for stator (phases) and rotor of the three-phase induction motors.
The described numbers in each diagram of the table below, serves for the user identify the correspondent
motor connection diagram through the nameplate fixed on the motor, where are described the code
numbers correspondent to the stator, rotor and accessories connection diagrams.

3.2.4.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard IEC 60034-8)

General terminals identification

U, V, W = Stator
K, L, M = Rotor

STATOR CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

3 TERMINALS 6 TERMINALS 6 TERMINALS - DAHLANDER
9100 9101 9102 9103 9104 9105 9106
YY Y YY
Y

3 TERMINALS
+ NEUTRAL
9121
LOWER HIGHER LOWER LOWER HIGHER
SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED

9 TERMINALS 12 TERMINALS
9107 9108 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114
YY Y YY Y

12 TERMINALS - (part winding)

9115 9116 9117 9118

FOR STARTING FOR STARTING Y ONLY FOR FOR RATED

IN Y IN STARTING SPEED

ROTOR CONNECTION DIAGRAMS (WOUND ROTOR MOTOR)

ROTOR
9120 9119

25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 65/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.2.4.2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard NEMA MG1)

General terminals identification

T1 to T12 = Stator
M1, M2, M3 = Rotor

STATOR CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

3 TERMINALS 6 TERMINALS 6 TERMINALS - DAHLANDER
9200 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 9206
YY Y YY
Y

3 TERMINALS
+ NEUTRAL
9221
LOWER LOWER HIGHER
LOWER HIGHER
SPEED SPEED SPEED
SPEED SPEED

9 TERMINALS 12 TERMINALS
9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214
YY Y YY Y

12 TERMINALS - (part winding)

9215 9216 9217 9218

FOR STARTING FOR STARTING Y ONLY FOR FOR RATED

IN Y IN STARTING SPEED

ROTOR CONNECTION DIAGRAMS (WOUND ROTOR MOTOR)

ROTOR
9220 9219

DIRECTION OF ROTATION
- The direction of rotation is described on the motor nameplate and shall be that of the shaft observed
when facing the D-end.
- Machines with terminal markings according to the chapter 3.2.4.1 and 3.2.4.2 of this manual have a
clockwise direction of rotation.
To invert the direction of the rotation must be inverted the connection of two phases. The motors with only
one direction of rotation, shown by the motor nameplate and an arrow located on the frame possess
unidirectional fan and must only operate in the specified direction. If is really necessary to invert the
direction of the rotation, WEG must be consulted.

26
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 66/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.2.5. ACCESSORIES CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

The following connection diagrams shown terminals identification in the connection box and the connection
diagrams for accessories of the three-phase induction motors.
The described numbers in each diagram of the table below, serves for the user identify the accessories
connection diagram through the nameplate fixed on the motor, where are described the code numbers
correspondent to the stator, rotor and accessories connection diagrams.

General accessories terminals identification

16 to 19 = Space heater.
20 to 27 = RTD (PT100) in winding.
36 to 43 = Thermistors (PTC) in winding.
52 to 59 = Thermostats in winding (Klixon, Compela).
68 to 71 = RTD's in the bearings.
72 to 75 = Thermistors in the bearings.
76 to 79 = Thermostats in bearings.
80 to 82 = Thermometer.
92 to 93 = Brakes.
94 to 99 = Current transformers

ACCESSORIES CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

THERMOSTATS
9029 9030 9031
IN WINDING IN WINDING IN WINDING
1 PER PHASE 1 PER PHASE IN SERIES 2 PER PHASE

ALARM TRIPPING

9032 9036
IN WINDING IN THE BEARINGS
2 PER PHASE IN SERIES 1 PER BEARING

ALARM TRIPPING FRONT REAR

THERMISTORS
9025 9026 9027
IN WINDING IN WINDING IN WINDING
1 PER PHASE 1 PER PHASE IN SERIES 2 PER PHASE

ALARM TRIPPING
9028 9035
IN WINDING IN THE BEARINGS
2 PER PHASE IN SERIES 1 PER BEARING

FRONT REAR
ALARM TRIPPING

27
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 67/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

TERMOSENSORS RDT (PT-100)

9021 9022 9023
IN WINDING IN WINDING IN WINDING
1 PER PHASE 1 PER PHASE WITH 3 WIRES 2 PER PHASE

ALARM TRIPPING

9024 9033 9034

IN WINDING IN THE BEARINGS IN THE BEARINGS
2 PER PHASE WITH 3 WIRES 1 PER BEARING 1 PER BEARING WITH 3 WIRES

FRONT REAR FRONT REAR

ALARM TRIPPING

SPACE HEATER (single voltage) SPACE HEATER (double voltage)

9038 9039 9410
WITH THERMOSTAT LOWER VOLTAGE HIGHER VOLTAGE

THERMOMETER (front bearing) THERMOMETER (rear bearing)

9037 9037

SUPPLEMENTARY ACCESSORIES

In motors with more than 1 bearing for support, the sensor of temperature used in the extra bearing is
identified with the corresponding number to the first bearing preceded of the number 1 (for 1 extra bearing)
or 2 (for 2 extra bearings) Example: Motor with rear support composed of 2 bearings - 1 PT100 with 3 wires
for bearing. The first bearing is identified with numeration 70 - 70 - 71 and the second bearing with
numeration 170 - 170 - 171.
The same rule described above applies also for extra sensors in the stator or extra thermometers in the
bearings.

28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 68/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.2.6. ELECTRICAL MOTORS STARTING
3.2.6.1. STARTING SQUIRREL-CAGE
MOTOR
Whenever possible, three-phase squirrel cage
motors should be started directly at full voltage
through a contactor.
DOL is the easiest method of starting; only
feasible, however, when the starting current does
not affect the power supply.
Normally, the starting current of induction motors
is six to seven times the rated current. Note that
high starting current can cause supply
disturbances to other consumers due to voltage
drops in the main power supply.
This situation can be corrected with one of the
following options:
a) The power supply rated current is so high that
the starting current is not proportionally high;
b) Motor is started under no-load conditions with
a short starting cycle and, as a consequence, a
low starting current with a transient voltage
drop tolerable to other consumers;
c) When duly authorized by the regional Energy
Company (utility).
In the cases where the starting current of the
motor is high, the following harmful consequences
can occur:
a) High voltage droop in the grid of the feeding
system. In function of this, it provokes
interference in equipments installed in this
system;
b) The protection system (lead, contactors) must
be over specified, causing a high cost;
c) The imposition of the electrical energy
companies who limit the voltage droop.
If direct starting is not feasible, either due to
restrictions imposed by the utility or due to the
installation itself, reduced voltage indirect starting
methods can be used in order to reduce the
starting current.
These indirect starting methods (reduced voltage)
are:
- Wye-delta switch;
- Series-parallel switch;
- Compensating Switch or self-transformer;
- Static starting switch or soft-start;
- Frequency Inverter.
29
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.2.6.2. FREQUENCY OF DIRECT STARTINGS
Due to high starting current value on induction
motor, the time required to accelerate high inertia
loads results in sudden motor temperature rise. If
interval between successive starts is significantly
reduced, this will result in excessive winding
temperature causing damage or reduce their life
time. NBR 7094 establishes a minimum starting
system electric motors must be suitable to
withstand:
a) Two successive starts, where the first is made
with motor still cold, that is, with winding at
ambient temperature and the second right
after that. However, only when motor has
decelerated until rest;
b) One start with motor at hot, that is, with
winding at service duty temperature.
The first condition simulates a case where the
first start is affected. For example, due to
protection switching-off, then allowing a second
try right after that one. The second condition
simulates a case of a motor accidental switching-
off at normal operation. For example, due to lack
of power supply, then allowing a second try as
soon as the power supply returns.
3.2.6.3. LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT (Ip/In)
According to NBR7094 Standard, the value of
Ip/In indicated on the motor nameplate is the
relation between the locked rotor current and the
motor rated current.
3.2.6.4. STARTING OF SLIP RING MOTORS
WITH RHEOSTAT
For starting of slip ring motors an external
rheostat is connected to the rotor by means of a
set of brushes and slip rings.
The extra rotor resistance is held in the circuit
during the starting to reduce the starting current
and increase torque. Furthermore, it is possible to
regulate the external resistance so as to have a
starting torque equal to, or close to the motor
breakdown torque.
NOTE: Every time customers intend to use other
than direct starting, inform WEG Mquinas in
advance so we can analyze the starting torques
required by the load.
Pag. 69/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.2.7. MOTOR PROTECTION THERMOSTAT (THERMAL PROBE):

Motors have, in principle, two types of protection:
protection against overload/locked rotor, and
short circuits.
Motors in continuous use should be protected
from overloading by means of a device
incorporated into the motor, or by independent
device, usually a fixed or adjustable thermal relay
equal or inferior to the value derived from
multiplying the rated power supply current at full
load by:
- 1.25 for motors with a service factor equal or
superior to 1.15 or;
- 1.15 for motors with service factor equal to
1.0.
Electric motors are fitted, under customers
request, with overheating protective devices (in
case of overload, locked rotor, voltage drop,
inadequate motor ventilation) such as a
thermostat (thermal probe), thermistors, RTD s.
3.2.7.1. TEMPERATURE LIMITS FOR
WINDINGS
The temperature of the winding hottest point
must be kept below the thermal class limit.
The total temperature corresponds to the sum of
ambient temperature plus temperature rise (T)
plus the difference between average temperature
of the winding and the hottest point.
By standard, maximum ambient temperature is
40C. any temperature above this is considered
special.
The temperature values and the permissible total
temperature at the hottest point are given in the
chart below:
Insulation class B F H used besides the ones indicated
Ambient temperature C 40 40 40
T = Temperature rise
C 80 100 125
(resistance method)
Difference between hottest
point and average temperature
C 10 15 15
Total: Hottest point
C 130 155 180
temperature
Table 3.4.
These are bimetallic thermal detectors with
normally closed silver contacts and they trip at
pre-determined temperatures. Thermostats are
series-connected or independent according to the
connection diagram.
THERMISTORS (PTC or NTC):
They are thermal detectors composed of
semi-conductors PTC which sharply change their
resistance when reaching a set temperature. They
are series-connected or independent according to
the connection diagram
NOTE: Thermostats and thermistors are
connected to a control unit that cuts off the motor
power supply or switches on an alarm system, in
response to the thermistors reaction.
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
(RTD's):
RTD's are resistance thermal detectors usually
made of platinum.
Basically, RTD's operate on the principle that the
electrical resistance of a metallic conductor varies
linearly with the temperature. The detector
terminals are connected to a control panel,
usually fitted with a temperature gauge.
Normally Weg Motors are supplied with one RTD
per phase and one per bearing where these
protective devices are regulated for alarm and
subsequent switch-off. For extra safety reasons, it
is possible to fit two RTD's per phase.
Table 3.7 shows a comparison between the
protection systems.
NOTE:
1) If required by the application,
other protective devices must be
above.
2) Table 3.8 shows the temperature values in
relation to the measured Ohmic resistance.
3) It is recommended to adjust the relays
according to table 3, that is:
Class F:
Alarm: 130C.
Tripping: 155C.
Class H:
Alarm: 155C.
Tripping: 180C.

The alarm and tripping values can be defined

based on experience. However, they can not
exceed the values given previously.

30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 70/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Current-based protection Protection with

Causes of overheating thermal probe in
Fuse and thermal
Fuse only the motor
protector

1. Overload with 1.2 times the rated current. unprotected totally protected totally protected

2. Duty cycles S1 to S8, EB 120. unprotected partially protected totally protected

3. Brakings, reversion and operation with frequent
unprotected partially protected totally protected
starts.

4. Operation with more than 15 starts p/hour. unprotected partially protected totally protected

5. Locked rotor. partially protected partially protected totally protected

6. Fault on one phase. unprotected partially protected totally protected

7. Excessive voltage fluctuation. unprotected totally protected totally protected

8. Frequency fluctuation on power supply. unprotected totally protected totally protected

9. Excessive ambient temperature. unprotected totally protected totally protected

10. External heating caused by bearings, belts,

unprotected unprotected totally protected
pulleys etc.

11. Obstructed ventilation. unprotected unprotected totally protected

Table 3.7 - Comparison between Motor Protection Systems.

C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.95 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12
100 138.50 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.39 140.77 141.15 141.53 141.91
110 142.29 142.66 143.04 143.42 143.80 144.17 144.55 144.93 145.31 145.68
120 146.06 146.44 146.81 147.19 147.57 147.94 148.32 148.70 149.07 149.45
130 149.82 150.20 150.57 150.95 151.33 151.70 152.08 152.45 152.83 153.20
140 153.58 153.95 154.32 154.70 155.07 155.45 155.82 156.19 156.57 156.94
150 157.31 157.69 158.06 158.43 158.81 159.18 159.55 159.93 160.30 160.67

Table 3.8 - Variation of Platinum RTD's.

NOTE: When motors are supplied with accessories T-box, the connection terminals for thermal protectors
and other accessories are fitted in this T-box.

31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 71/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.2.7.2. SPACE HEATERS - Incorrect motor fastening to the base, with

When motors are fitted with space heaters to
avoid water condensation during long periods o
standstill, the space heaters must be connected
so that they are energized immediately after the
motor is switched-off and are de-energized
immediately after the motor is switched-on. A
dimensional drawing and a specific nameplate
existing on the motor indicate the supply voltage
and the characteristics of the space heaters
installed.
loose shims underneath one or more motor
feet and studs incorrectly fastened;
- Improper base, or not firmly built;
- External vibrations caused by other equipment.
Operate the motor with vibration values above
those described above can damage its lifetime
and/or its performance.
3.2.7.4. SHAFT VIBRATION LIMITS

In motors equipped or with forecast for

3.2.7.3. VIBRATION LIMITS installation of proximity sensor (normally used in
sleeve bearing) the shaft surfaces are prepared
WEG motors and generators Are factory balanced with special finishing in the adjacent areas of the
and comply with vibration limits established by bearings, so as to ensure the correct shaft
IEC34-14, NEMA MG1 - Part 7 and NBR 11390 vibration measurement.
Standards (except when the purchasing The shaft vibration in these motors is measured
agreement specifies different values). and must comply with IEC 34-14 and NEMA MG 1
Standards.
Vibration measurements are performed on the The alarm and tripping values of the table 3.6
non-drive and drive end bearings, vertically, represent values of permissible shaft vibration for
horizontally and axially. coupled electric machines as norm ISO7919-3.
They are generic values and serve as a guideline,
When a customer supplies the coupling half where specific application conditions must be
sleeve to WEG, the motor in question is balanced taken into consideration, mainly diametric
with this half sleeve mounted to the shaft. When clearance between shaft and bearing.
this is not the case, based on the above standards
motor is balanced with half key (that is, the key Shaft vibration (m peak to peak)
way is fulfilled with a piece of metal of identical Rated
speed 280 355
width, thickness and height of the keyway). Frame and to > 450
(rpm)
315 450
The maximum allowable vibration levels Alarm 110 130 150
recommended by WEG for motors in operation 1800
Tripping 140 160 190
are given on the table below. These values are
generic and serve as a guideline. Specific Alarm 85 100 120
3600
application conditions must be taken into Tripping 100 120 150
consideration: Table 3.6.

Vibration Levels (mm/s RMS) Operate the motor with shaft vibration
Rated speed 355 values close to alarm and tripping values
(rpm) Frame < 355 to > 630 can damage bearing liners.
630
Alarm 4.5 4.5 5.5 The main reasons to cause increase of vibration
600 n 1800 are:
Tripping 7.0 7.0 8.0
- Unbalance coupling problems and others that
Alarm 3.5 4.5 5.5 can affect the machine;
1800 < n 3600
Tripping 5.5 6.5 7.5 - Shaft manufacturing problems, which are
minimized during the manufacturing;
Table 3.5.
- Residual voltage or magnetism on the shaft
surface where measurement is made;
Vibration causes most frequently found on the
- Scratches, knocks or vibrations when finishing
field are:
the shaft where measurement is made.
- Misalignment between motor and driven
machine;

32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 72/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.3. COMMISSIONING
3.3.1. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Before starting a motor for the first time, or after
long period of standstill, check the following
items:
1) Is the motor clean? Were all packing
materials and cleaning materials removed?
2) Make sure the supply voltage and frequency
correspond to those indicated on the
nameplate.
3) Ascertain that the endbell and bearing-
housing fastening bolts are firmly tightened.
4) Make sure the motor is correctly aligned (as
per item 3.1.3).
5) Are the bearings correctly lubricated (as per
item 4.2).
6) Are the rotor terminals connected? (Only for
slip ring motors).
7) Are the thermal protector conductors, the
rounding terminal and the space heaters
connected?
8) Is the insulation resistance of the rotor and
stator according to the prescribed value ? (as
per item 2.3.5).
9) Were all objects such as tools, measuring
instruments and alignment devices removed
from the area of the motor?
10) Are the brush-holders in order? Are the
brushes making contact? (see item 4.5 and
4.6).
11) Are all motor fixing bolts duly tightened?
12) When the motor is started at no load, does it
rotate freely without abnormal noise? Is the
direction of rotation correct? (To reverse the
rotation, invert any of two terminal leads of
the power supply).
13) Is the motor ventilation OK? Note the
direction of rotation of unidirectional motors.
NOTES:
1) The gap between brush holder and Slip ring
surfaces should be between 2mm to 4mm.
2) Brush pressure on the slip ring should be in
accordance with the specified value, and the
brush incidence to the contact surface should
be perpendicular.
3) If the load (operation rated current) applied to
the motor are not in accordance with the rated
characteristics of such motor (above or below),
the brushes specification must be analyzed in
relation to the actual load requirements. Check
data given in item 4.6.
33
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4) Before changing rotation direction of two-pole
motors, contact Weg Mquinas for analysis.
5) The "H" line motors with special noise level are
built with unidirectional fan (all RPMs). To
reverse rotation direction, contact Weg
Mquinas in order to analyze the fan.
6) The "Master" line motors are also built with
unidirectional fans. So if rotation direction has
to be reversed, contact Weg Mquinas in order
to analyze the fan.
WARNING: The non observation of the items
described above can lead to serious problems to
motor performance, causing excessive wear to
brushes and slip rings (for wound rotor motors),
overheating and possible damage to motor
windings. These problems are not covered under
the warranty terms included in this manual.
3.3.2. START-UP
THREE-PHASE SQUIRREL CAGE ROTOR
MOTOR
After careful examination on the motor, follow the
normal sequence of starting operation listed
above.
THREE-PHASE SLIP RING MOTORS
- The starting method must follow the
manufacturer instructions for starting
methods.
- On motors with permanent contact brushes,
the starting rheostat remains in the "run"
position while the motor is running.
- Special speed control rheostat designed for
permanent connection to resistance contacts
within a given range of settings are an
exception to the above.
- Brushes must be correctly set against the slip
ring.
- In motor with adjustable brush-holder system,
after complete motor acceleration, make sure
that the brush lifting system has worked.
Pag. 73/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.3.3. OPERATION
Run the motor coupled to the load for a period of
at least one hour to check if abnormal noises or
sign of overheating occur. If there will be
excessive vibrations in the unit between the initial
operation condition and the condition after
thermal stability, alignment and leveling must be
rechecked. Compare the line current drawn with
the value shown on the nameplate.
Under continuous duty without load fluctuation,
this should not exceed the rated current times the
service factor, also shown on the nameplate.
All measuring instruments and devices should be
continuously checked in order to correct any
abnormal operation, if required.
On slip-ring motors, the real load condition of the
motor in duty, must be investigated, and if
necessary, specify again the set of brushes. In
case of doubt consult WEG Mquinas.
3.3.4. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE
Before proceed any tasks on the motor, it is
extremely important to observe the following: to
touch any moving part on a running motor, even
switched-off, is a danger to life.
a) THREE-PHASE SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS:
It suffices to open stator circuit switch, and
with the motor stopped, reset the
auto-transformer, if any, to the "start"
position;
b) THREE-PHASE SLIP RING MOTORS: Open
the stator circuit switch. When the motor is
stopped, reset the rheostat to the "start"
position.
*** WARNING ***
The motor connection boxes equipped
capacitors do not have to be opened
before the discharge time:
Time of discharge of the capacitors: 5
minutes after the disconnection of the
motor.
34
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.4. ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES
Day by day, electrical motors are increasingly
used in offices and homes. Under these
circumstances, it is essential that motors operate
silently and safe without contributing to ambient
discomfort. The solution lies in the ever closer
collaboration of the user and the motor
manufacturer.
The proper planning of home, office and factory
acoustics requires knowledge of the sources of
motor noises and how they affect the ambient
noise level wherever motors are located.
The following parts of a motor can generate noise
within the audio-frequency range:
1) Cooling system.
2) Brushes.
3) Bearings.
4) Magnetic circuit.
The part of the motor mainly responsible as noise
source depends on its size, speed, degree of
mechanical protection (casing) and of the driven
machine design. Cooling system noise is airborne
and usually affects only the noise level in the
ambient where motor is installed. How ever, it is a
different matter if the noise source is in the
bearings or in the magnetic circuit. In this case,
the noise is due to mechanical vibration of the
part itself, or of the entire motor, and the sound
is spreaded through the foundation, walls or
ducts. This type of sound propagation, via
structural components of an installation, can be
reduced by installing the motor on suitable
designed vibration dampers. It is important to
note that improper dampers can even increase
vibration.
3.5. MOTOR USED ON HAZARDOUS
AREA EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERES
Motors designed for hazardous areas are fitted
with additional safety features which are defined
in specific standards for each type of hazardous
location, based on its classification.
The general requirements for electrical apparatus
for hazardous locations are described in the
following Brazilian and foreign standards,
respectively:
NBR 9815 = Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres.
General requirements (specifications)
IEC 79-0 = Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres.
EN 50014 = Electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive atmosphere.
General requirements
Pag. 74/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

3.5.1. GENERAL CARE WITH HAZARDOUS

LOCATION MOTORS

Before installing, operating or carrying out

maintenance services on electric motors used on
hazardous locations, care must be taken on the
following:
- The standards listed below, applied to each
case, must be studied and understood;
- All requirements included in the applicable
standards must be understood accordingly.

Exe Increased Safety: IEC 79-7 / NBR 9883 / EN

50019.
Exp Pressurized: IEC 79-2 / NBR 5420.
Exn Non sparking: IEC 7915.

3.5.2. ADDITIONAL CARE RECOMMENDED

FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS

- Before carrying out maintenance services,

inspections or repairs on the motor, make sure
it is de-energized and completely stopped;
- All motor protections must be correctly
installed and duly adjusted before starting the
operation;
- Make sure motors are properly grounded;
- Connection terminals must be properly
connected so as to avoid poor contacts which
can result in overheating or sparking.

NOTE: All other recommendations

referring to storage, handling,
installation and maintenance
included in this manual and applied
to the motor in question must also
be followed accordingly.

35
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 75/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4. MAINTENANCE
A well-programmed maintenance of electric
motors can be summed up as a periodical
inspection of insulation levels, temperature rise
(winding and bearings), wears, bearing lubrication
and useful life, and occasional checking of fan air
flow, vibration levels, brushes and slip rings
wears.
In case one of the above items are not followed
accordingly, you might have unexpected stops of
the equipment. Inspection cycles depend on the
type of the motor and conditions under which it
operates.
Frame must be kept clean, free of dust, dirt or oil
in order to make the cooling process easier.
Transportation care:
On any transportation, motors fitted with roller or
ball bearings must have their shaft locked in order
to avoid bearing damage.
To lock the shaft use the shaft locking device
shipped together with the motor. See item 2.2.
4.1. CLEANLINESS
Motors should be kept clean, free of dust, dirt and
oil. Soft brushes or clean cotton rags should be
used to clean the motors. A jet of compressed air
should be used to remove non-abrasive dust from
the fan cover and any accumulated grime from
the fan and cooling fins.
The heat exchanger tubes (if any) must be kept
clean and free of any obstructing object to
facilitate the air circulation. For the cleanliness of
the tubes, a stick with a round brush at the ends
can be used which, inserted in such tubes,
removed all accumulated dirt.
NOTE: To perform such cleanliness,
remove the ND end bell of the heat
exchanger and insert the brush into
the tubes.
In order to effect this cleanliness, a stick can be
used which, inserted into the tubes, remove all
the accumulated dust. If motor is fitted with air-
water heat exchanger, a periodical cleanliness is
inside the radiator tube is required to remove any
dirt condensation.
On slip-rings motors, the brushes compartment
must be cleaned with vacuum cleaner,
withdrawing the brushes dust outside of the
motor.
The slip-rings must be cleaned with a clean and
dry cloth and that does not leave shreds residues.
36
Doc. PBPNU5999001
The spaces between the rings should be cleaned
with an air vacuum cleaner hose with a plastic
wand on the end.
Do not use cleaning fluids because their vapor will
have a detrimental effect on collector and brushes
action.
Oil or damp impregnated impurities can be
removed with rags soaked in a suitable solvent.
Terminal boxes of IP54 protection motors should
also be cleaned; their terminals should be free of
oxidation, in perfect mechanical condition, and all
unused space dust-free. For aggressive
environment, IP(W)55 protection motors are
recommended.
4.1.1. PARTIAL CLEANING
- Drain the condensed water.
- Clean the inside of the terminal boxes.
- Make a visual inspection of the winding
insulation.
- Clean the slip rings (see 4.4 and 4.5).
- Check the condition of the brushes.
- Clean the heat exchanger.
4.1.2. COMPLETE CLEANING
- Clean the dirty windings with a soft brush.
- Grease, oil and other impurities which adhered
on the winding can be removed with a rag
soaked in alcohol. Dry the windings with a jet
of compressed air.
- A jet of compressed air should be used to
clean the bearings and the air ducts in the
stator and rotor cores.
- Drain the condensed water and clean the
inside of the terminal boxes as well as the slip
rings.
- Measure the insulation resistance (see table
2.3a).
- Clean the brushes/brush holders according to
items 4.5.
- Clean the heat exchanger accordingly.
NOTE: When motor is fitted with air
inlet and/or air outlet filters, these
should be cleaned with a jet of
compressed air.
If the dust is difficult to be removed with a jet of
compressed air, then they should be washed in
cold water with neutral detergent. After that, dry
them in horizontal position.
Pag. 76/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2. LUBRICATION 4.2.1.1. LUBRICATION INTERVALS

4.2.1. GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS
The purpose of this maintenance is to lengthen
bearing life.
Maintenance includes:
a) Attention to the overall status of the bearings;
b) Cleaning and lubrication;
c) Inspection in details of the bearings.
Motor noise should be measured at regular
intervals of one to four months. A well-tuned ear
is perfect capable of distinguishing unusual
noises, even with rudimentary tools such as a
screwdriver, etc. For a more reliable analysis of
the bearings, sophisticated equipment is required.
Bearing temperature control is also
part of routine maintenance. The
temperature rise of grease
lubricated bearings as
recommended under item 4.2.1.2 should not
exceed 60C (T = 60C/max. ambient = 40C,
absolute temperature = T + ambient) measured
at the external bearing cap.
Constant temperature control can be done by
means of external thermometers or by embedded
thermal elements.
WEG motors are supplied with POLYREX EM
103 grease (Supplier: Esso) up to frame 450 and
STABURAGS N12MF grease (Supplier Klber)
for frame 500 and above, enough for the
operating time period indicated on the data sheet
and on the bearing identification nameplate.
Lubrication intervals depend on the size of the
motor, speed, working conditions, type of grease
used and working temperature.
The lubrication period and type of bearings are
indicated on the motor nameplate.
Motors kept in stock should be
relubricated every six months. Once
each 2 months, shaft must be in
order to have the grease
homogenized.
Lubrication intervals, amount of grease and
bearings used on the motors are indicated in
Tables 4.2a and 4.2b, as reference values.
The bearings data, amount and type of
grease and lubrication interval informed
in the nameplate attached in the motor.
Before the procedure of bearings
lubrication, we recommend that these
data are verified.

Alarm and tripping

temperatures for ball and roller
bearings can be set for 100C
and 120C respectively.

Weg motors are normally supplied with grease

lubricated ball or roller bearings.
Bearings should be lubricated to avoid metallic
contact of the moving parts, and also for
protection against corrosion and wear. Lubricant
properties deteriorate in the course of time and
due to mechanical operation and, furthermore, all
lubricants are subject to contamination under
working conditions. For this reason, lubricants
must be renewed or replaced from time to time.

37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 77/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

MAXIMUM LUBRICATION INTERVALS (IN HURS) FOR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED MOTORS - 60Hz
NDE Bearing NDE Bearing slip NDE Bearing slip
DE Bearing (with
DE Bearing (squirrel cage ring motor (Fixed ring rotor
Frame Poles pulley)
rotor) brushes) (Lifting brushes)
Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr.
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 6.400 2.000 8.900 6.600 6.600
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 4.500 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 6.400 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 4.800 1.600 6.400 5.800 5.800
355
6 6322 8.700 NU324 3.900 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 5.800 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.200 1.400 6.400 5.100 3.400
400 6 NU224 4.900 NU228 3.700 6320 10.000 6226 9.300 6230 6.900
8 6.800 5.500 10.000 10.000 9.800
4 2.200 4.800 3.400 6234 2.500
450 6 NU224 4.900 6322 8.700 6230 3.400 5.600
6234
8 6.800 10.000 3.400 8.400
4 1.800 4.800 3.400 2.500
500 6 NU226 4.300 6322 8.700 6230 6.900 6234 5.600
8 6.200 10.000 9.800 8.400
4
6 NU228 3.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 5.500 7.500 4.900 3.900
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 2.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 4.400 7.500 4.900 3.900
4
6 1.200 4.900 3.100 2.300
8 23032 2.200 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 3.100 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6
8 23036 1.600 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 2.400 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
6
8 1.600 6.200 4.400 3.900
23036
10 2.400 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6
8 1.300 6.200 4.400 3.900
23040
10 2.000 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
Grease: Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grease: Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Table 4.2a.

NOTES:
- Normal relubrication interval for ambient temperature of 40C and types of grease specified above;
- For vertically mounted motors, reduce relubrication intervals by half;
- Bearing operating temperature = 70C;
- Apply correction factors given below for relubrication intervals of table above on the following cases:
- Operating temperature below 60C: 1.59.
- Operating temperature of 70C to 80C: 0.63.
- Operating temperature of 80C to 90C: 0.40.
- Operating temperature of 90C to 100C: 0.25.

38
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 78/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

MAXIMUM LUBRICATION INTERVALS (IN HURS) FOR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED MOTORS - 50Hz
NDE Bearing NDE Bearing slip NDE Bearing
DE Bearing (with
DE Bearing (squirrel cage ring motor (Fixed slip ring rotor
Frame Poles pulley)
rotor) brushes) (Liftable brushes)
Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr.
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 8.300 3.000 10.000 8.500 8.500
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 5.700 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 7.600 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 6.500 2.500 8.300 7.700 7.700
355
6 6322 10.000 NU324 5.100 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 6.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6317 3.400 6317 3.400
4 3.300 2.300 8.300 6.900 4.800
400
6 NU224 6.100 NU228 4.900 6320 10.000 6226 10.000 6230 8.700
8 7.900 6.700 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 3.300 6.500 4.800 6234 3.700
450 6 NU224 6.100 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 7.300
6234
8 7.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.800 6.500 4.800 3.700
500 6 NU226 5.500 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 6234 7.300
8 7.300 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.300 3.900 1.900 1.300
6 NU228 4.900 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 6.700 8.600 6.100 5.000
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 3.800 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 5.500 8.600 6.100 5.000
4
6 1.800 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23032 2.900 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 4.400 9.600 8.000 7.100
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6 1.300 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23036 2.300 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 3.700 9.600 8.000 7.100
6 1.300 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 2.300 7.300 5.500 5.000
23036
10 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.700 9.100 7.600 7.100
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6 1.000 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 1.800 7.300 5.500 5.000
23040
10 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.200 9.100 7.600 7.100
Grease: Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grease: Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Table 4.2b.

NOTES:
- Normal relubrication interval for ambient temperature of 40C and types of grease specified above;
- For vertically mounted motors, reduce relubrication intervals by half;
- Bearing operating temperature = 70C;
- Apply correction factors given below for relubrication intervals of table above on the following cases:
- Operating temperature below 60C: 1.59.
- Operating temperature of 70C to 80C: 0.63.
- Operating temperature of 80C to 90C: 0.40.
- Operating temperature of 90C to 100C: 0.25.

39
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 79/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2.1.2. TYPE AND AMOUNT OF GREASE

Greases supplied with the motors

CONSTANT OPERATING
SUPPLIER GREASE APPLICATION
TEMEPRATURE (C)
ESSO POLYREX EM 103 (POLIURIA BASED) (-30 to +170)
NORMAL
KLBER STABURAGS N12MF (SODIUM ANDE MoS2 BASE) (-20 to +140)
Table 4.3a.

Grease options
CONSTANT OPEARATING
SUPPLIER GREASE APPLICATION
TEMEPRATURE (C)
ESSO UNIREX N2 (LITHIUM BASE) (-35 to +175)
PETROBRAS LUBRAX GMA-2 (LITHIUM BASE) (0 to +130) NORMAL
ALVNIA R3 (LITHIUM BASE) (-35 to +130)
SHELL
AEROSHELL 7 (MICROGEL) (-55 to +100)
LOW TEMEPRATURE
ESSO BEACON 325 (LITHIUM BASED) (-50 to +120)
Table 4.3b.

Amount of grease (g)

Roller bearings Self-

Ball bearings Roller bearings
compensating
Bearing Grease (g) Bearing Grease (g) Bearing Grease (g)
6222 40 NU222 40 23032 75
6224 45 NU224 45 23036 105
6226 50 NU226 50 23040 130
6230 65 NU228 55 Table 4.4c
6234 85 NU230 65
6314 30 NU232 70
6316 35 NU234 85
6320 50 Table 4.4b
6322 60
Table 4.4a

4.2.1.3. QUALITY AND QUANTITY OF

GREASE

Correct lubrication is important for proper bearing

operation. It means to say the grease must be
applied correctly and in sufficient amount. On the Never mix greases with different base
other hand, insufficient or excessive greasing are components.
prejudicial. Example: A calcium based grease must
Excessive greasing causes overheating due to not be mixed with a polyurea based
high resistance encountered by the rotating parts grease.
and, in particular, by the compacting of the
lubricant and its eventual loss of lubricating
qualities. 4.2.1.4. COMPATIBILITY
This can cause leakage with the grease
penetrating into the motor winding, commutator The compatibility of different types of grease can
rings or brushes. create occasional problems. When the properties
of the mixture remain within the individual
property range of the greases, we can say the
greases are compatible.

40
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 80/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
To avoid any possible incompatibility grease
problem we recommend performing an
appropriate lubrication which can be summarized
as follows: after removing the old grease and
caring out a complete cleanliness of the grease
cavity, new grease must be pumped in. When this
procedure is not allowed, pump in new grease by
pressure. This must be repeated until new grease
is drained out through the grease relief.
As a general rule, greases with same soap type
are compatible. However depending on the
mixture rate, they can then be recommended to
mix different types of grease before contacting a
service agent and/or WEG.
Same and basic oils can not be mixed as they will
not produce a homogeneous mixture. In this case,
either a hardening or a softening (or drop of the
resulting mixture melting point) can occur.
4.2.1.5. LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS
The lubrication system was designed to allow,
when regreasing, the removal of all grease from
the bearings races through a grease relief which
at the same time impedes the entry of dust or
other contaminants harmful to the bearing.
This grease relief also avoids injury to the
bearings from the already known problem of
over-greasing. It is advisable to relublicated while
the motor is running so as to allow the renewal of
grease in the bearings housing.
If this procedure is not possible due to existing
parts near to the nipple (pulleys, etc), which can
be harmful to the operator, the following
procedure should be followed:
- Inject about half the estimated amount of
grease and run the motor at full speed for
approximately one minute;
- Switch off the motor and inject the remaining
grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor
stopped can cause penetration of a portion of the
lubricant into the motor through the internal seal
of the bearing housing.
NOTE: Grease fittings must be clean before
greasing the motor in order to avoid entry of any
foreign bodies into the bearing.
41
Doc. PBPNU5999001
For lubrication, use only a manual grease gun.
Figure 4.2. - Bearings and lubrication system.
4.2.1.6. BEARING LUBRICATION STEPS
1. Remove the grease relief cover.
2. Clean the area around the grease fitting with a
clean cotton fabric.
3. With the motor running, add grease with a
manual grease gun until the lubricant
commences to expel from the grease relief, or
insert the amount of grease recommended in
Tables herewith indicated.
4. Leave the motor running enough time to drain
all excess of grease.
5. Check bearing temperature to make sure there
has not been any major variation.
4.2.1.7. SPRING DEVICE FOR GREASE
REMOVAL
When grease outlet is not accessible to the
operator, some motors are fitted with a spring
device for grease removal during bearing
relubrication.
Lubrication steps:
1. Before starting bearing lubrication procedure,
clean the grease fitting with a piece of coth;
2. Remove the spring through bolt, clean the
spring and place it back;
3. With the rotor in operation, add the amount of
grease specified on the bearing identification
nameplate with the application of a manual
grease gun.
4. The excess of grease will be drain it through
the bottom grease relief and is dropped on the
spring.
5. Keep the motor running for a time period
enough to drain out all excess of grease.
Pag. 81/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

6. This grease must be removed by pulling the
spring through bolt and then cleaning the
spring. This procedure must be carried out as
many times as it is required up to the point no
grease is on the spring.
7. Check bearing temperature to make sure there
has not been any major modification.
During assembly, bearings cannot be subjected to
direct blows. To make the assembly easier, it is
recommended to heat up (inductive heater) the
bearing.
The aid used to press or strike the bearings
should be applied to the inner ring.

4.2.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARIGS

Grease inlet LUBRICATED BY GREASE VERTICAL
MOTORS

4.2.2.1. CHARACTERISTICS

The bearings characteristics data, amount and

type and quantity of grease and lubrication
interval are informed in the nameplate attached in
Grease removal spring
the motor.

Figure 4.3. Example of a vertically mounted

4.2.2.2. RELUBRICATION STEPS
NDE bearing with grease outlet fitted with spring
device.
1) Before lubricating the bearing, clean the
grease fitting nipples with cotton fabric;
2) Remove the spring bolt at the grease outlet
4.2.1.8. REPLACEMENT OF BEARINGS
(17), clean the spring and replace it.
3) With the motor in operation, add amount of
After removing the bearing cap, avoid demage to
grease indicated on the bearing nameplate
the cores by filling the air gap between the rotor
with the application of a manual grease gun.
and the stator with stiff paper of a proper
4) Excess of grease will drain out through the
thickness. Providing suitable tooling is employed,
bearing bottom drain and dropped in the
disassembly of bearings is not difficult. (See
spring.
bearing extractor with 3 grips in figure 4.4).
5) Leave the motor running for a time period
enough to drain out all excess of grease.
6) This grease must be removed by pulling the
through bolt and cleaning the spring as many
times it is required until completely drained
out.
7) Check bearing temperature to make sure there
has not been a significant variation.

Figure 4.4. - Bearing Extractor.

Bearing repair and replacement
If is necessary cleaning the bearing or remove it
The extractor grips must be applied to the
for maintenance, follows the instructions below:
sidewall of the inner ring to be stripped, or to an
adjacent part.
To ensure perfect functioning and no injury to the
bearing parts, it is essential that the assembly be
done under conditions of complete cleanliness
and by skilled personnel.
New bearings should not be removed from their
packages until they are assembled.
Prior to fitting a new bearing, ascertain that the
shaft has no rough edges or signs of hammering.

42
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 82/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2.2.3. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY OPPOSITE DRIVE-END BEARING

1- Internal bearing cap
2- External bearing cap
3- Grease valve
4- Separator ring
5- Cover grease
6- Closed external ring
7- Spring cover protection
8- Rear cover
9- Pre-loading spring
10- Internal bearing cap
11- Fixation screw
12- Fixation screw
13- Fixation screw
14- External bearing
15- Internal bearing
16- Fixation nut
17- Grease relief
18- Grease relief
Temperature detectors detail 19- Press washer

Before disassembly
- Remove the prolongation tubes of the grease Opposite drive-end bearing reassembly
inlet and outlet; - Clean the bearings completely and inspects the
- Remove the sun shade, cover, fan and other removed parts and the interior of the caps.
components that are in the rear side as sun as - Certify that the bearing, shaft and bearing
the shaft end becomes free for bearing caps surfaces be smooth.
removing. - Put the recommended grease
- Clean completely the outside of bearings. on of the external and
- Remove the temperature detectors from the internal bearing cap deposit and
bearings and provide a prop for support the lubricate the bearing with
shaft and avoid damages. sufficient quantity of grease before reassemble
it.
Opposite drive-end bearing disassembly - Before place the bearing on the shaft, heat the
Care must be taken to avoid damage on the ball bearing to a temperature between 50C and
or roller and shaft surface. 100C. For reassembling the bearings, follow
For disassemble the bearing, follows carefully the the instructions of disassembly in the inverse
instructions below: order.
Keeps all the parts disassembled in an insurance
local.
1) Remove the fixation nut (16)
2) Remove the grease relief (17);
3) Remove the closed external ring (6);
4) Remove the screws (12) which fasten the
external bearing cap;
5) Remove the external bearing cap (2);
6) Remove the screws (11 and 13);
7) Remove the rear cover (8);
8) Remove the external bearing (14), separator
ring (4) and internal bearing (15);
9) Remove the screw which fasten the grease
valve (3) and remove it;
10) Remove the internal bearing cap (1) if
necessary.

43
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 83/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2.2.4. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY DRIVE-END BEARING

1- Internal bearing cap

2- White felt
3- Screw that fixes the bearing caps
4- Screw that fixes the seal disc
5- External bearing cap
6- Ring with labyrinth
7- Screw which fasten the grease valve
8- Grease valve
9- Drawer for waste grease
10- Bearing
11- Grease nipple
12- Thermal protective
13- Seal disc

Before disassembly Drive-end bearing reassembly

- Remove the prolongation tubes of the grease - Clean the bearings completely and inspects
inlet and outlet (if any); the removed parts and the interior of the caps.
- Clean completely the outside of bearings; - Certify that the bearing, shaft and bearing
- Remove the temperature detectors from the caps surfaces be smooth.
bearings; - Put the recommended grease on
- Remove the grounding brush (if any); of external and internal
- Provide a prop for support the shaft and avoid bearing cap deposit and lubricate
damages. the bearing with sufficient
quantity of grease before
Drive-end bearing disassembly reassemble it.
Care must be taken to avoid damage on the ball - Before places the bearing on the shaft, heat
or roller and shaft surface. the bearing to a temperature between 50C
For disassemble the bearing, follows carefully the and 100C.
instructions below: For reassembling the bearings, follow the
Keeps all the parts disassembled in an insurance instructions for disassembly in inverse order.
local.
1) Remove the screws (4) which fasten the seal
disc (13).
2) Remove the ring with labyrinth (6);
3) Remove the screws (3) which fasten the
bearings cap (1 and 5);
4) Remove the external bearing cap (5);
5) Remove the screw (7) which fasten the grease
valve (8);
6) Remove the grease valve (8);
7) Remove the front cover;
8) Remove the bearing (10);
9) Remove the internal bearing cap (1), if
necessary.

44
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 84/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.3. ANTIFRICTION BEARING
LUBRICATED BY OIL
4 recommended by WEG already considers these
1 1- Oil inlet
2- Oil sight glass
2 reached when the lubricant can be seen
3- Oil outlet
4- Temperature sensor
3 The oil level must be checked
4.2.3.1. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
Oil removal
When re-lubrication is necessary, please remove
the oil outlet (3) and oil inlet (1) plugs and quit
the oil completely.
For oil insertion in the bearing:
- Close the oil outlet (3) with the drain plug;
- Remove the filter in the oil inlet (1), if any.
- Add the type and amount of oil up to the level
indicated in the oil sight glass.
NOTES:
1) Make sure that all the openings are closed and
that there is no indication of oil leakage in the
oil reservoir or seals.
2) The proper oil level is obtained when the
lubricant can be seen in the middle of the oil
sight glass.
3) Excessive amount of oil will not damage the
bearings, but it can cause the oil to leak
through the seals.
Oil characteristics
The type of lubricant, lubrication interval and type
of bearings are indicated on the motor nameplate
like to the bearing.
Oil change - The change of the oil in the
bearings should be made according to the table
below, referring the bearing working temperature:
Below of 75C = 20,000 hours
Between 75 and 80C = 16,000 hours
Between 80 and 85C = 12,000 hours
Between 85 and 90C = 8,000 hours
Between 90 and 95C = 6,000 hours
Between 95 and 100C = 4,000 hours
IMPORTANT:
The bearings lifetime, their operating conditions
and motor operating conditions will depend on the
procedures followed by the maintenance
personnel. The following recommendations must
be observed.
45
Doc. PBPNU5999001
- The oil selected for the application must have
the adequate viscosity for the bearing
operating temperature. The type of oil
criteria.
- Insufficient amount of oil can damage the
bearings.
- The minimum recommended oil level is
touching the bottom part of the oil sight glass,
with the motor in the idle condition.
daily, being kept approximately
in the middle of the oil sight
glass.
4.2.3.2. BEARING OPERATION
The operation of motors equipped with oil-
lubricated bearings is similar to the operation of
motors equipped with grease-lubricated bearings.
The bearings performance during start up must
be carefully checked as well as their performance
during the first running hours.
Before running the motor, check:
- If the oil being used is the same as the oil
recommended on the bearings nameplate.
- The oil characteristics;
- The oil level;
- The alarm and trip point for bearings
temperatures;
During the first starting, pay special attention for
excessive vibration or noise when the motor is
running uncoupled. The motor and bearings
should operate quietly and under low vibration.
Have a copy of the factory vibration test report so
you can compare the results obtained during the
test with the results obtained after the
installation. The motor must run for several hours
until the temperature of the bearings stabilize.
If abnormal bearing operating temperature is
noticed, the motor must be shut down and the
installation, bearings and sensors must be re-
checked. Check the whole bearing system (oil
reservoir, seals) to make sure there is no oil
leakage.
4.2.3.3. THERMAL PROTECTIONS SETTING
Each bearing is fitted with a Pt100 temperature
detector installed directly in the bearing liner near
the point where the load is applied. This device
must be connected to a controlling panel with the
purpose of detecting overheating and protect the
bearing when operating under high temperature.
IMPORTANT: The following
temperature must be set on the
bearing protecting system:
ALARM 100C / TRIPPING OFF 120C
Pag. 85/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2.3.4. BEARING MAINTENANCE

1- External oil reservoir
2- Internal oil reservoir
3- External bearing cap
4- Oil valve
5- Screw which fasten the oil
valve
6- Internal bearing cap
7- Roller bearing
8- Ring with labyrinth
9- Screw which fasten the ring
with labyrinth
10- Filter
11- Oil level viewfinder
12- Drain plug (oil outlet)
13- Cover ( oil inlet)
14- Screw which fasten the
bearing caps
15- Thermal protector
16- Screw which fasten the
external oil reservoir
17- Cover

To disassemble the drive-end bearing, please
follow carefully the instructions given below.
Before disassembling
- Clean completely the outside of bearing;
- Remove the drain plug (12);
- Remove all of the oil from the bearings;
- Remove the temperature detectors (15) from
the bearing;
- Remove the grounding brush (if any);
- Provide a support to the shaft so it can rest
during disassembly.
Opposite drive-end bearing disassembly:
- Use extra caution to avoid any damage to the
balls, rollers and shaft surface.
- To disassemble the bearing, carefully follow
the instructions below:
- Keep all the parts disassembled in a safe and
dust free environment.
1) Remove the screw (9) that fixes the ring to
the labyrinth seal (8);
2) Remove the ring with the labyrinth seal (8);
3) Remove the screws (16) that fixes the
external oil reservoir (1);
4) Remove the external oil reservoir (1);
5) Remove the screw (14) that fixes the
external bearing cap (3);
6) Remove the external bearing cap (3);
7) Remove the screws (5) that fix the oil
retaining ring (4) and remove it;
8) Remove the rear cover (17);
9) Remove the spherical roller bearing (7);
10) If it is necessary to completely disassemble
the bearing, remove the internal bearing cap
(6) and the internal oil reservoir (2).
Opposite drive-end bearing reassembly
- Clean the bearings completely and inspect the
parts and the bearing cap.
- Certify that the bearing, shaft and bearing cap
surfaces are smooth, with no sign of pitting or
scratches.
- Before inserting the bearing to the shaft, heat
the bearing to a temperature between 50C
and 100C.
- To reassemble the bearing, follow the
instructions of disassembling in the reverse
order.
Attention
When reassembling, apply Curril T to seal the
surfaces of the oil reservoir.
NOTE: The motors can be supplied with filter
(10) in the location indicated on the drawing
above or in the oil inlet.

46
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 86/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.2.4. SLEEVE BEARINGS

Figure 4.5.

1) Drain plug; 12) Bearing liner - bottom half;

2) Bottom half of the bearing housing; 13) Bearing liner - top half;
3) Motor frame cover; 14) Oil ring;
4) Fixing bolts; 15) Oil inlet;
5) Top half of the bearing housing; 16) Connection for temperature sensor;
6) Bearing housing cap split line bolt; 17) Oil sight glass or oil outlet for lubrication
7) Machine seal; 18) Tapped hole for oil sump temperature
8) Machine seal bolt; measurement;
9) Lifting eyebolt; 19) Stationary baffle bolt;
10) External cover bolts; 20) Labyrinth seal carrier (outboard);
11) External cover; 21) Labyrinth seal carrier (inboard) bearing-
housing.
22) Breathing pipe

47
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 87/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.4.1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Sleeve bearing performance is dependent on
proper installation, lubrication and maintenance.
Before assembling the bearing carefully read all
instructions contained herein to become familiar
with the complete bearing assembly procedure.
A proper maintenance of sleeve bearings include
periodical checking of the level and actual
condition of the lubricating oil, checking of noise
level and vibration of the bearings, follow-up of
the operating temperature, and fastening of the
fixing and assembly bolts. The frame must be
kept clean, free from dust, oil and dirt to facilitate
cooling system.
Threaded holes for connecting the thermometer,
oil sight glass, oil inlet, and immersion heater, or
cooling coil (for oil sump thermometer or
circulating pump with adapter) are provided on
either side, so that all connections can be made
on the right or left side of the bearing housing as
required.
The oil drain plug is located centrally on the
underside of the bearing housing.
In case of circulating oil lubrication, the outlet
connection should be screwed into the threaded
hole of an oil sight glass.
If the bearing is electrically insulated, the
spherical liner seat surfaces in the housing are
lined with a non-conducting material.
Do not remove this lining.
The antirotation pin is also insulated and the shaft
seals are manufactured from a special non-
conducting material.
Temperature monitoring instruments with contact
to the bearing liner should be insulated
appropriately (i.e., insulated protection tubes,
synthetic fittings, etc.)
Water-cooled bearings are provided with the
cooling coil installed. Care must be taken to
protect the connections from damage when
handling the housing prior to installation.
4.2.4.2. DISASSEMBLY OF THE SLEEVE
BEARING SYSTEM (TYPE "EF")
To disassemble the bearing liner and all
associated parts from the bearing housing, carry
out the following instructions. Carefully store all
disassembled parts in a safe location (see figure
4.5).
Drive end side:
- Throughly clean the exterior of the bearing
housing. Loosen and remove the oil drain plug
(1) at the bottom of the bearing housing.
Drain the oil from the bearing housing.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) that connect
the top half of the bearing housing (5) to the
motor frame cover(3).
48
Doc. PBPNU5999001
- Loosen and remove the bolts (6) that join the
top and bottom half of the bearing housing (2
and 5).
- Use the lifting eyebolts (9) to lift (by hand or
hoist) the top half of bearing housing(5)
straight up, so that the cap is completely
disengaged from the lower halves of the
stationary baffle (11) labyrinth seals, labyrinth
seal carrier (20) , and the bearing liner (12).
- Pull the top bearing housing forward out of
and away from the bearing area. Loosen and
remove the bolts (19) securing the top half of
the stationary baffle. Loosen and remove the
bolts (10) securing the upper half of the seal
carrier (20).
- Lift (by hand or hoist) the upper half of the
bearing liner (13) and remove it.
- Loosen and remove the bolts at the split line of
the oil ring (14). Carefully disengage the
dowels holding the oil ring halves together and
remove the oil ring.
- Remove the garter springs that encircle the
labyrinth seals and remove the top half of each
seal. Rotate the bottom half of each seal out
of the grooves in the seal carrier and bearing
housing and remove them.
- Disconnect and remove RTD's, thermocouples,
or any other temperature detecting
instruments that enter the lower half of the
bearing liner.
- Using a hoist or jack, raise the shaft slightly so
that the lower half of the bearing liner can be
rolled out of the bearing housing.
IMPORTANT: To make that feasible it is
necessary that bolts 4 and 6 of the other bearing
half be loose.
- Roll out (be careful not to use excessive force)
the lower half of the bearing liner and remove
it.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (19) securing the
bottom half of the stationary baffle (11) to the
seal carrier. Loosen and remove the bolts (10)
securing the bottom half of the seal carrier
(20) to the bearing housing. Remove the seal
carrier.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4). Remove the
bottom bearing housing (2).
- Remove the frame cover (3).
- Loosen and remove the bolts (8) securing the
machine seal (7) to the frame cover. Remove
the machine seal.
- Thoroughly clean and inspect all individual
parts which have been removed. Clean the
interior of the bearing housing.
- To reassemble the bearing system, follow the
preceding instructions in the reverse order.
NOTE: Festening torque of the bearing fixing
bolts to the motor = 10 Kgfm.
Non drive end side:
- Thoroughly clean the exterior of the bearing
housing. Loosen and remove the oil drain plug
(1) at the bottom of the bearing housing.
Drain the oil from the bearing housing.
Pag. 88/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
- Loosen and remove the bolts (19) and remove
the external cover (11).
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) that fix the
top bearing housing (5) to the motor frame
cover(3).
- Loosen and remove the bolts (6) that join the
top and bottom half of the bearing housing (2
and 5).
- Use the lifting eyebolts (9) to lift (by hand or
hoist) the top half of the bearing housing (5)
straight up, that the cap is completely
disengaged from the lower halves of the
bottom bearing housing (2) and the bearing
liner (12).
- Lift (by hand or hoist) the top half of the
bearing liner (13) and remove it.
- Loosen and remove the bolts at the split line of
the oil ring (14). Carefully disengage the
dowels holding the oil ring halves together and
remove the oil ring.
- Remove the garter spring that encircles the
labyrinth seal. Remove the top half of the seal,
then rotate the bottom half of the seal out the
groove in the bearing housing and remove it.
- Disconnect and remove RTD's, thermocouples,
or any other temperature detecting
instruments that enter the lower half of the
bearing liner.
- Using a hoist or jack, raise the shaft slightly so
that the lower half of the bearing liner (12)
can be rolled out of the bearing housing.
- Roll out (be careful not to use excessive force)
the bottom half of the bearing liner (12) and
remove it.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) and remove
the bottom bearing housing (2).
- Remove the motor frame cover (3).
- Loosen and remove the bolts (8) and remove
the machine seal (7).
- Thoroughly clean and inspect all individual
parts which have been removed. Clean the
interior of the bearing housing.
To reassemble the Bearing System, follow he
preceding instructions in the reverse order.
NOTE: Fastening torque of the bearing fixing
bolts to the motor = 10 Kgfm.
4.2.4.3. SLEEVE BEARING ASSEMBLY
Check contact face and mounting recess of the
bracket making sure it is clean and properly
machined. Inspect shaft to ensure it is smooth (Ra
0.4, equivalent to 32 micro-inch finish, or better),
within the dimensions and tolerances given by
RENK and free of burr or any rough spots.
After removing the upper part of the housing (2)
and the bearing liner (12 and 13) the interior of
the housing and the running surfaces of the liner
are to be cleaned thoroughly and checked for any
damage caused in transit.
With the shaft slightly, locate the bearing base
into the mounting recess of the machine end
shield and bolt into position.
49
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Apply oil to spherical seats in the housing base
and the shaft and rotate the bottom liner half (12)
into position. Special care must be taken so that
the axial surfaces of the locating bearing are not
damaged.
After the split faces of the bottom liner half and
the housing base are aligned, lower the shaft into
place. With a slight hammer blow against the
housing base settle the liner into its seating so
that the liner axis and shaft axis are parallel. The
slight hammer blow produces a high frequency
vibration which reduces the static friction between
the liner and the housing and allows the correct
adjustment of the liner. The self-alignment
feature of the bearing is to compensate for
normal shaft deflection during the assembling
procedure only.
The loose oil ring is installed next. The ring must
be handled with special care as safe operation of
the bearing is also dependent on the effective and
safe functioning of the oil ring. The bolts must be
tightly fastened. Split misalignment must be
avoided and any burrs or edges carefully removed
in order to ensure smooth running of the ring. In
any maintenance care must be taken that the ring
is not distorted and its geometrical shape is
maintained.
The outside of the two liner halves is stamped
with identification numbers or marks near the split
line. Make sure that these marks align and the
split faces are clean when placing the top liner
half into position. Incorrect fitting may lead to
heavy damage to the bearing liners.
Check to ensure that the loose oil ring can still
rotate freely on the shaft. With the top liner half
in place, install the seal on the flange side (see
paragraph "Shaft Seals").
After coating the split faces with a non-hardening
sealing compound, place the housing cap into
position. Care must be taken that the seal fits
properly into the groove. Ensure also that the
anti-rotation pin is seated without any contact
with the corresponding hole in the liner.
NOTE: Housing or liner may be
interchanged as complete assemblies
only. Individual halves are not
interchangeable.
4.2.4.4. SETTING OF THERMAL
PROTECTIONS (PT100)
Each bearing is fitted with a Pt100 temperature
detector installed directly in the bearing liner near
the point where the load is applied. This device
must be connected to a controlling panel with the
purpose of detecting overheating and protect the
bearing when operating under high temperature.
Pag. 89/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
IMPORTANT: The following
temperature must be set on the
bearing protecting system:
ALARM 100C
TRIPPING OFF 120C
4.2.4.5. WATER COOLING SYSTEM
When using water cooling system, the oil
reservoir at the bearing is equipped with cooling
coils through which the water circulates. This
circulating water must present at the bearing inlet
a temperature smaller or equal to the ambient
one in order to make the cooling possible.
The water pressure must be 0.1 bars and the
water flow must be 0.7 L/s. The pH must be
neutral.
NOTE: When connecting the
cooling coils, leaks in or on the
bearings housing and oil
reservoir must be avoided so
that lubricating oil is not
contaminated.
4.2.4.6. LUBRICATION
Bearings self lubricated
Oil change - The change of the oil in the
bearings should be made according to the table
below, referring the bearing working temperature:
Below of 75C = 20,000 hours
Between 75 and 80C = 16,000 hours
Between 80 and 85C = 12,000 hours
Between 85 and 90C = 8,000 hours
Between 90 and 95C = 6,000 hours
Between 95 and 100C = 4,000 hours
Bearings with forced lubrication (external)
The change of the oil in the bearings should be
made every 20,000 working hours, or
whenever the lubricant present alterations in her
characteristics. The viscosity and pH of the oil
should be verified periodically.
50
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Oil level must be checked daily
which must be kept
approximately at the center of
the oil level sight glass.
The bearing must be filled with the prescribed
type of oil through the oil port after removing the
pipe plug.
All holes and threads not used are to be closed by
pipe plugs. Also check all connections for oil leaks.
Filling the bearing with lubricant beyond the
middie of the oil sight glass (II) does not impair
the function of the bearing, but there is a
possibility that excess oil may leak out through
the shaft seals.
IMPORTANT:
The cares taken with bearing
lubrication will determine the life for
such bearings as well as the
assurance of motor operation. For
this reason, it is essential to follow these
recommendations:
- The oil selected must have a viscosity suitable
for the bearing operating temperature. This
must be checked during eventual oil change or
during periodical maintenances.
- If the bearing is filled with oil bellow the
required oil level, or if the oil level is not
checked periodically, insufficient lubrication
may lead to damage to the bearing liner. The
minimum oil level is reached when the oil can
just be seen in the oil sight glass when the
machine is not in operation.
4.2.4.7. SHAFT SEALS
The two halves of the floating labyrinth seal are
held together by a garter spring. They must be
inserted into the groove of the carrier ring in such
a way that the stop pin is always in the
corresponding recess in the upper half of the
housing or carrier ring. Incorrect installation
destroys the seal.
The seal is to be carefully cleaned and coated
with a non-hardening seating compound on the
faces in contact with the grooves. The drain holes
in the lower part of the seal must be clean and
remove obstruction. When installing the bottom
half of the seal, press it lightly against the
underside of the shaft.
An additional sealing is installed inside the motor
to prevent sucking of oil due to low pressure
generated by the motor cooling system.
Pag. 90/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.4.8. OPERATION
The operation of motors fitted with sleeve
bearings is similar to motors fitted with roller
bearings.
It is recommended that the oil circulating system
be accompanied carefully and also the first hours
of operation.
Before the start-up, check the following:
- If the oil used has been prescribed
accordingly.
- Characteristics of the lubricating oil.
- Oil level.
- Alarm and tripping off temperatures set for the
bearings (100C for alarm and 120C for
tripping off).
During the first start-up, check for vibrations or
noises. In case bearing operation is not quiet and
not uniform, motor is to be stopped at once.
Motor must operate for several hours until the
bearing temperature is fixed within the limits
previously indicated. If a temperature overheating
occurs, motor must be stopped immediately and
the temperatures detectors checked.
When bearing operating temperature is reached
check for any oil leakage by the plugs joints or by
the shaft end.
4.3. AIR GAP CHECKING (Large ODP
motors)
After disassembly and assembly of the motor it is
necessary to check the air gap measurement
between the stator and the rotor by using
appropriate gauges. The gap variation at any two
vertically opposite points must be less than 10%
of the average air gap measurement.
4.4. SLIP RINGS (For slip ring motors)
Rings must be accurately centered as at high
speed the mechanical vibrations cause contact
faults, which in turn cause sparking. Rings must
also be kept clean and polished.
As a general rule, cleaning should be done
monthly in order to remove the dust accumulated
between the rings (see item 4.10). Stained or
slightly rough ring surfaces can be polished with
fine sandpaper. Oval or rough surfaced rings will
require machining and repolishing to avoid wear
problems to brushes and brush-holders.
51
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4.5. BRUSH-HOLDERS AND BRUSHES
(for wound rotor motors)
Brush holders must be set radially to the slip ring
and adjusted approximately 4mm away from the
contact surface to avoid brush rupture or injury
(figure 4.6).
CORRECT INCORRECT
Figure 4.6 Brush-holder assembly.
OBS.: Brushes must be checked weekly to ensure
free sliding inside the brush-holder.
Brushes
There is a factory-specified brush type for each
electric motor fitted with slip rings.
NOTA: In case motor is operating
below its rated output (low load) or
intermittent load, the set of brushes
(brush type and quantity) must be
adjusted to the actual operating conditions,
avoiding in this way motor damage. This
adjustment must be done with the help of Weg
Mquinas.
Never use assorted brushes of different types on
the same rings. Any change of brush type must
be authotized by WEG Mquinas, as different
brushes cause performance alterations to the
machine in operation.
Brushes should be constantly checked during
operation. Any brush presenting signs of wear
should be exceeding the mark indicated figure
4.7, immediately replaced.
At the time of replacement and whenever
feasible, all brushes should be replaced. Having
replaced the first one, the second brush should be
replaced after a suitable running-in-period.
Replacement brushes should be sanded to set
perfectly on the ring surface curvature (min.
75%).
Pag. 91/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Shaft

Figure 4.7 Brush wear mark.
On machines that always rotate in the same
direction, the brushes should be set in a single
direction only. During the backward movement of
the shaft the brushes must be lifted (figure 4.8).
Fig. 4.9 Shaft grounding brush.
To avoid shaft damage on WEG motors during
transportation, shaft ends are protected with
protective oil. For a correct Grounding Brush
operation, this protective oil must be removed
from the shaft surface before motor operation as
well as any foreign materials that may be present
between shaft and the brush.
Brush must be checked on permanent basis while
in operation and, when getting to the end of its
life time, must be replaced by another of same
quality (granulation).

Figure 4.8 Brush contact face.

Brushes must be fitted with identical pressure on

the contact surface so as to ensure regular
current balance and low brush wear.
It is important that all brushes have the same
pressure with a tolerance of approximately
10%. Higher deviations lead to irregular current
balance with consequent irregular wear.
Brush pressure control is done with the
application of a dynamometer.
"Tired" springs must be replaced.

4.5.1. SHAFT GROUNDING DEVICE

On some induction motors, specially those

requiring speed control due to frequency inverter
application, a set of brush holder and brushes for
shaft grounding is used.
This devices avoids electric current going through
the bearings, which are highly harmful to their
operation. The brush is put in contact with the
shaft and connected to the machine frame
through a cable, which must be also grounded.

52
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 92/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.6. LIFTABLE BRUSH HOLDERS

4.6.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

AUTOMATIC OPERATION: Description of components:

Operating condition with brushes at lower
position and slip ring not short-circuited.
To ensure brushes are kept lowered, the switches:
- CCA1 - contacts 34 and 35,
- CCA2 - contacts 22 and 23,
- CCD - contacts 13 and 14, must be simultaneously
close (logic "AND").
With this logic, motor is suitable to start.
A - Electromechanical Actuator ATIS
Type: MAI-25.B3.d9-25.10-F10-2CC-2CT-IP65
B - Three-phase induction motor FS 71
6 pole, 0.25kW, Mounting B3L, IPW55
Flange C105-DIN 42948
Voltage and frequency as per client request.
C - End-of-course
Type XCK-P121 Telemecanique

Figure 4.10.

53
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 93/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

Condition: Lifted brushes and short - CCL2 - contacts 25 and 26,

circuited collector ring. - CCE - contacts 16 and 17, must have the
In order to assure the brushes are lifted, the contacts simultaneously closed (logic "AND").
switches: At this condition the motor is in continuous
- CCL1 - contacts 37 and 38, operation.

Figure 4.11.

54
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 94/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

MANUAL OPERATION:
4.6.2. PROCEDURE FOR MOTOR STARTING

Brush position or through a signal coming from

the CCE switch which indicates the brush position,
totally lowered.
In case the signal is not indicating the brush
position totally lowered, motor can not be started
before adjusting the commanding switch to the
position of brushes totally lowered.
This can be done manually through the flywheel
(7), operating the lever (8) or automatically
Figure 4.12. operating the brake motor (9). If the manual
system (7) is used, the lever (8) returns
Simbology: automatically to the previous position operating
CLD = Torque switch for overload switching off the brake motor (9). Under this condition
during lowering of the brushes (or phase (brushes totally lowered), the rings (5) are not
reversion). short-circuited, allowing in this way a series
connection of the external resistances (rheostat)
with the rotor winding through the brushes (6).
In case of fault on the CCD.
NOTE: Perform the commanding tests with the
complete liftable brush holder system before
Figure 4.13. running the motor under load.
CLE = Torque switch for overload switching off
during lifting of the brushes (or phase reversion).
4.6.3. PROCEDURE AFTER MOTOR
STARTING

At the moment motor has reached its rated

In cause the fault on the CCE.
speed, the short-circuit procedure of the collector
rings must be started, operating the lifting and
Figure 4.14. short-circuit device (1), on the reserve way,
through the brake motor (9), or manually through
CCD = End-of-course switch for switching off the flywheel (7).
when brushes are totally lowered. The short-circuit is done through the slide
brushing (2) which holds the silver contacts (3).
Furtherly, the brush lifting mechanism (4) is
CCE = End-of-course switch for switching off
operated.
when brushes are totally lifted.
When brushes are totally lifted, the device is
CLR = Selecting switch indicating manual or automatically switched-off through the CCE
motorized position. switch.
18 19 20 18 19 2 0
OBS.:
1) The automatic brush lifting system is provided
with an overload protection system for the
operation brake motor (9), through the torque
CLR CLR
switches for overload switching off during
lowering (CLD) or lifting of brushes (CLE).
Figures 4.15.

ADDITIONAL END-OF-COURSE SWITCHES FOR

SIGNALIZATION.
CCL1 and CCL2 = End-of-course to indicate when
the brushes are totally lifted.
CCA1 and CCA2 = End-of-course to indicate when
the brushes are totally lowered.

55
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 95/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

2) Before motor start up, make sure CLD, CLE,
CCD and CCE switches are correctly connected
to the panel.
3) When one of the CLE or CLD switches operate,
the system must to be reconnected before
checking the reason they have operated.
4) The end user is supposed to install proper
signal indicating how the logical system
operates on the control panel of the automatic
brush lifting system.
5) The control and signaling system of the brush
lifting system is not supplied by WEG.
6) After motor starting, brushes can not remain in
contact with collector rings, which can lead to
excessive brush and collector ring wear as well
cause problems to the brush lifting system.

Figure 4.16.

Figure 4.17.

56
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 96/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.6.4. ASSEMBLY 2. Mount the bearing in the support pin and fix
with a fixing pin which must be fixed with a
4.6.4.1. BRUSH HOLDER LIFTING DEVICE retaining ring.

1. Fix the pin support disc with the lifting set fixer 3. Fix the bearing support pin on the support
on the protection box of the brush holder set. disc.

NOTE: Bearing of the support pin: 6305 2ZRS1.

Figure 4.18.

57
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 97/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.6.4.2. SHORT-CIRCUIT BUSHING
MOVEMENT SET
1. Mount the roll on the roll bearing on short
bushing movement lever, and then the
bearings, the spacing bushing and fix the
bearing cover.
3. Mount the support pin on the movement lever.
4. Fix the guide support on the support base and
the movement lever on the support. The rolls
must be aligved with the short circuit bushing
in such way that both touch the bushing
simultaneously.

2. Fix the upper pins on one of the movement NOTE: Bearing of the movement levers: 6003Z.
levers.

Figure 4.19.

58
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 98/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET
1. Mount the bearing on the shaft and fix it with
retaining rings. Then put a retaining ring to
hold the second bearing. After that, mount it
with retaining ring.
2. Mount and fix the disc on the operation shaft.
3. Insert the operation shaft in the set flange.
4. Fix the lifting disc on the operation shaft.
5. Mount the bushing on the lever operation shaft
and fix it with a retaining ring. Fix the shaft on
the operation disc.
Figure 4.20.
59
Doc. PBPNU5999001
6. Fix the locking device cover on the
electromechanical device and then fix it to the
device frame.
7. Fix the operation set on the brush holder
protection box.
NOTE:
1) The operation shaft must be fitted between
the upper pins of the lifting lever.
2) All the parts touching mechanically must be
lubricated. After 6 months of use, check the
lubrication of such parts.
Pag. 99/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.6.4.4. RETURN PIN SET

1. Mount the spring shaft on the shaft support.

Mount the shaft guide washer; fit it on the
shaft and lock it on the shaft and lock it with a
nut.
2. Close the set with an external fixing ring and
fix on the brush holder protection box.

Figure 4.21.

4.6.4.5. BRUSH HOLDER SET

1. Fix the brushes on the brush holder. Fix the

isolated pins on the support; mount the
isolated discs, brush holders and contact rings
on the pins.
Figure 4.23. Position Non Short-circuited.
2. Adjust the curvature ray existing on the
brushes with the collector rings and put a
sandpaper between brush and ring. The
sandpaper must be moved back and forth in
order to make a better fitting of the brush ray
with the ring ray. Unfasten the brush holder
fixing bolt and turn the brush holder clockwise
until the brush ray matches perfectly the ring.

Figure 4.24. Position Short-circuited.

Figure 4.22. Brushes lifted. Figure 4.25. Brushes Lovered.

60
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 100/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.6.5. DISASSEMBLY
For the disassembly of the liftable brush holder,
proceed in the reserve way in relation to assembly
procedures.
4.6.6. BRUSHES LIFTING SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT
1. Turn the lifting disc up to the short-circuit
position and then turn it a bit more to release
the rolls to avoid unnecessary thrusts on the
roller bearings.
2. Fasten the adjusting bolt up to the backstop
disc and then lock the adjusting bolt.
3. Turn the lifting disc up to the position of non
short-circuit (brushes lowered) and repeat the
same procedure carried out for the short
circuit position.
4.7. DRYING OF THE WINDINGS
It is recommended that this task be undertaken
carefully and by qualified personnel. The rate of
temperature rise should not exceed 5C per hour
and the winding should not be heated up to more
than 150C.
Excessive temperature as well as too quick
temperature rise can generate steams which
damage the windings. During the drying process,
the temperature should be controlled carefully
and the insulation resistance should be measured
at regular intervals.
In the beginning, the insulation resistance will
decrease due to the temperature increase, but it
will increase during the drying process.
The drying process should be continued until
successive measurements of the insulation
resistance show a constant insulation resistance
which should be higher than the minimum value
specified, as indicated in item 2.3.5.
It is important to provide a good ventilation inside
the motor during the drying process assuring that
the moisture is removed effectively.
61
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4.8. DESMANTLING AND REASSEMBLY
4.8.1. " MASTER" LINE
A) SQUIRREL-CAGE ROTOR
Drive-End:
1. Remove the heat exchanger (if any).
2. Remove the temperature detectors from the
bearing (if any).
3. Unscrew the bolts which fasten the bearing
assembly.
4. Remove the external bearing caps (for roller
bearing motors).
4.1. For ball bearing motors, follow the
procedures described in item 4.2.4.2.
5. Unscrew the bolts of the endshield. After being
removed, the bolts should be screwed
endshields in order to force its removing. To
prevent the rotor falling onto the rotor, provide
a support for it.
6. Remove the bearing(s) (for roller bearing
motors).
7. Remove the internal bearing cap (for roller
bearing motors).
Non Drive-End:
1. Unscrew the protecting screen of the fan
(enclosed motors).
2. Remove the fan by unscrewing the bolts which
fasten it on the shaft.
3. Loosen the four nuts which fasten the fan
cover and remove it.
4. Repeat the procedures 2 to 7 of previous
paragraph.
B) SLIP RING MOTORS
Drive-End:
The procedures are the same as for squirrel cage
rotor motors.
Non Drive-End:
1. Remove the back protecting cover of the brush
holders.
2. Disconnect the cables from the collector ring.
Dismantle the brush holders.
3. Unscrew the brush holder protecting box from
the cooling box.
4. Remove the collector rings and the ventilating.
5. Repeat the procedures 2 to 4 of the "Non
drive-end" for squirrel cage rotor motors.
Pag. 101/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.8.1.1. ROTOR REMOVING

Remove the rotor from the inside of the stator by

means of hoisting ropes or other devices. The
device must avoid that the rotor rubs on the
stator or on the coil heads.

4.8.2. A LINE

Drive-End:
1. Disconnect the space heater leads from the
terminal boxes.
2. Remove the bearing temperature detectors (if
any).
3. Unscrew the bolts of the bearing assembly.
4. Remove the external bearing caps (for roller
bearing motors).
4.1. For ball bearing motors, follow the
procedures described in item 4.2.2.2.
5. Unscrew the end-shield. By using an
appropriate tool, force the end-shield to
release and at the same time turn it to help
the removal. Make sure that the shaft is held
on a plate and so an eventual fall of the rotor
on the stator is avoided.
6. Remove the bearing(s) (for roller bearing
motors).
7. Remove the internal bearing cap.

Non Drive-End:
1. Remove the fan cover.
2. Release the fan retaining ring.
3. Repeat the procedures from 2 to 7 of item
4.8.2 (A).

NOTE:
1. For removing of rotor, observe section 4.8.1.1.
2. It is not necessary to remove the stator from
the frame to perform an eventual rewinding.

4.8.3. F LINE

Drive-End:
Equal as A and H lines.

Non Drive-End:
1. Repeat the procedures 1 to 3 of item 4.8.2 (B).
2. Remove back protecting cover of the brush
holder.
3. Disconnect the cables from the collector ring.
4. Remove the brushes and dismantle the brush-
holder.

62
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 102/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.8.4. H LINE

Figure 4.26.

Pos. Description Pos Description

1 Frame 15 Internal fan
2 Grounding lug 16 Internal non drive end bearing cap
3 Shaft 17 Non drive-end space heater
4 Drive-end grease valve 18 Non drive cover
5 External drive end bearing cap 19 Non drive end bearing temperature sensor
6 Drive end bearing 20 Non drive end bearing
7 Internal drive end bearing cap 21 Non drive-end grease valve
8 Drive end bearing temperature sensor 22 External non drive end bearing cap
9 Drive end cover 23 Accessory connection box
10 Drive-end space heater 24 Stator connection box
11 Complete rotor assembly 25 External fan
12 Stator lamination core 26 Fan cover
13 Stator temperature sensor 27 Non drive end bearing grease fitting
14 Stator fixing pin 28 Drive end bearing grease fitting
Tables 4.5.

Safety!
Ensure that the power cables have
been switched-off.
DISASSEMBLY
1) Disconnect the temperature sensor cables (pos. 8
and 19) of the accessory connection box
terminals;
2) Remove the non drive end fan cover (pos. 26);
3) Unfasten the fixing ring of the external non drive
end bearing cap and remove the fan (pos.25);
4) Unfasten the bolts that fix the external non drive
end bearing caps;
5) Remove the external drive end and non drive end
bearing caps (pos. 5 and 22);
6) Remove the drive end and non drive end grease
valve (pos. 4 and 21), unfastening the bolts that
fix them to the shaft;
7) Place supports underneath the shaft to avoid that
the rotor falls on the stator;
8) Unfasten and remove the drive end and non drive
end covers (pos.9 and 18);
9) Remove drive end and non drive end bearings
(pos.6 and 20) with the application of proper
device;
10) Remove the internal drive end and non drive end
bearing caps (pos. 7 and 16);
11) Applying proper device, remove the rotor (pos.
11) from the stator through the non drive end side
of the motor, and pay attention to avoid that the
rotor rubs the stator or on coil heads.
ASSEMBLY
1) Applying proper device, fit the rotor (pos. 11)
into the stator, from the non drive end side of
the motor, and pay attention to avoid that the
rotor rubs on the stator or on the coil heads;
2) Place the internal bearing caps;
3) Fill out with grease the compartment of the
internal bearing caps and bearings (check type
of grease on the bearing identification nameplate
attached to motor covers);
4) Check carefully shaft and cover surfaces where
bearings will be fitted so as to avoid scratches or
knocks. Also check for correct mechanical
dimension tolerances;
5) Heat up and mount the drive end and non drive
end bearings (pos. 6 and 20);
6) Lift the rotor, place supports underneath the
shaft and mount drive end and non drive end
covers (pos.9 and 18);
7) Mount the drive end and non drive end grease
valve (pos. 4 and 21) and fix them to the shaft;
8) Mount the external drive end and non drive end
bearing caps (pos. 5 and 22), fixing them t the
internal bearing caps (pos. 7 and 16);
9) Mount the external non drive end fan (pos. 25)
fixing it with a retaining ring;
10) Mount the non drive end fan cover (pos. 26);
11) Connect the temperature sensor cables (pos. 8
and 19) to the accessory connection box
terminals;
12) Fill in remaining grease through the drive end
and non drive end grease fitting (pos. 27 and
28).

63
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 103/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.8.5. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SCREWS

The table below presents the tightening torques

of the screws recommended for assembly of the
motor or its parts:

Resistance
4.6 5.8 8.8 12.9
Class
Tightening torque (Nm)
Diameter
tolerance 10%
M6 1.9 3.2 5.1 8.7
M8 4.6 7.7 12.5 21
M10 9.1 15 25 41
M12 16 27 42 70
M16 40 65 100 175
M20 75 125 200 340
M24 130 220 350 590

Notes:
- The resistance class normally is marked in the
head of the hexagonal screws.
- When do not have marking at screws,
indicates that the resistance class is 4.6.
- The internal hexagonal screws (type Allen)
possess resistance class 12.9.

4.9. GENERAL ADVICES

- Any damaged part (cracked, or distorted

machined parts, damaged threads) should be
replaced and never recovered.
- All services herewith described should be
undertaken by qualified personnel in order not
to damage the equipment. In case of further
doubts, contact WEG Mquinas.

64
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 104/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

4.10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

YEARLY EVERY 3 YEARS

EVERY 3
COMPONENT DAILY WEEKLY (PARTIAL (COMPLETE
MONTHS
MAINTEN.) MAINTEN.)
- Drain
- Check the noise
condensed - Retighten the - Dismantle the motor.
- Complete motor. and the
water (it bolts. Check spare parts.
vibration levels.
any).
- Cleanliness: check the
- Visual inspection.
- Winding of the fastenings and the slot
Measure insulation
stator and rotor. wedges; measure the
resistance.
insulation resistance.
- Clean the bearings.
Replace them, if
- Regrease; for required, check bearing
- Check the noise intervals see the liner and replace it, if
- Bearings.
level. greasing plate. required (sleeve
- Vibration control. bearing) check sleeve
race (shaft) and
rebuild, if required.
- Terminal boxes - Clean the inside
- Clean the inside area
and grounding area retighten the
retighten the bolts.
lugs. bolts.

- Coupling: follow
the maintenance
- After the first week
instructions
of operation: check - Check alignment - Check alignment and
contained in the
the alignment and and fastening. fastening.
manual of the
fastening.
coupling
manufacturer.

- Record the - If possible, disassemble

- Monitoring
measurement and check its operating
devices.
values. condition.

- Clean it, if - Clean it, if - Clean it (see section

- Filter.
required. required. 4.1.2).

- Check the
- Inspect the
cleanliness and
- Slip rings area. cleanliness and
clean it, if
clean it, if required.
required.

- Check surface and

- Slip rings.
contact area.

- Check and replace

- Brushes (slip ring
them when 2/3 of
motors);
their height is worn
- Shaft grounding
(check wear mark
brushes (if any).
in fig. 4.5).

- Air/air heat - Clean the pipes of the

exchanger. heat exchanger.

Table 4.6.

65
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 105/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

5. SPARE PARTS

5.1. HOW TO ORDER

When ordering spare parts, motor type and serial

number must be always given as indicated on the
nameplate or on the frame.

5.2. KEEPING STOCK

It is recommended to keep in stock the spare

parts that, under normal use, can have some kind
of wear such as:
- Set of bearings;
- Brushes (type and quantity according to the
specification);
- Felts for filter (if any).
The spare parts must be stored in clean, dry
environments and aired well, if possible, with
constant temperature. The bearing liners also are
spare parts, however, due to the high cost, we
suggest to analyze the real necessity to keep
these parts in stock.

66
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 106/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
6. ABNORMAL SITUATIONS DURING
OPERATION
The majority of the abnormal situations during
operation that affect the running of electric
motors can be avoided by a predictive
maintenance.
Sufficient ventilation, cleanliness and careful
maintenance are the main factors. A further
essential factor is the prompt attention to any
abnormal situation such as vibrations, shaft
knocks, declining insulation resistance, smoke or
fire, sparking or unusual slip ring or brush wear,
sudden changes of bearing temperature.
When failures of an electric or mechanical nature
arise, the first step to be taken is to stop the
motor and perform a subsequent examination of
all mechanical and electrical parts of the
installation.
In the event of having a fire, the motor should be
disconnected from the power supply, which is
normally done by turning off the respective
switches.
In case of starting of fire inside the motor itself,
steps should be taken to retrain and suffocate it
by covering the ventilation openings. To
extinguish a fire, dry chemical or CO
extinguishers should be used. Never use water.
6.1. COMMON FAILURES ON
INDUCTION MOTORS
Motors built by WEG Mquinas are normally
designed for Class F insulation (155C) and for
ambient temperatures up to 40C(as indicated on
the motor nameplate). Most winding failures
occur when temperature limits, due to current
overload, are surpassed throughout the winding
or even in only portions thereof. These failures
are identified by the darkening or carbonizing of
the wire insulation.
6.1.1. SHORT-CIRCUIT BETWEEN TURNS
A short-circuit between turns can be a
consequence of two coincident insulation defects,
or the result of defects arising simultaneously on
two adjacent wires.
In some cases, the three-phase current imbalance
can be so insignificant that the motor protective
device fails to react. A short circuit between turns,
and phases to ground due to insulation failure is
rare, and even so, it normally occurs during the
early stages of operation.
67
Doc. PBPNU5999001
6.1.2. WINDING FAILURES
a) ONE WINDING PHASE BURNT
This failure occurs when a motor runs wired in
delta and current fails in one power supply
conductor. Current rises from 2 to 2.5 times in the
remaining winding with a simultaneous drop of
speed. If the motor stops, the current will
increase from 3.5 to 4 times its rated value. In
most cases, this defect is due to lack of a
protective switch, or because this switch has been
set too high.
b) TWO WINDING PHASES BURNT
This failure occurs when current fails in one
power supply conductor and the motor winding is
star-connected. One of the winding phases
remains current less while the other absorb the
voltage and carries an excessive current. The slip
almost doubles.
c) THREE WINDING PHASES BURNT
Probable cause 1:
Motor protected only by fuses. An overload on the
motor will be the cause of the trouble.
As a consequence, progressive carbonizing of the
wires and insulation will generate a short between
turns, or a short against the frame.
A protective switch placed before the motor would
easily solve this problem.
Probable cause 2:
Motor incorrectly connected.
For example: a motor with windings designed for
220/380V is connected through a stat-delta switch
of 380V.
The drawn current will be so high that the
winding will burn out in a few seconds if the fuses
or a protective switch incorrectly set fail to react
promptly.
Pag. 107/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Probable cause 3:
The star-delta switch is not commutated and the
motor continues to run for a certain time
connected to the star under overload conditions.
As it only develops 1/3 of its torque, the motor
cannot reach rated speed. The increase of slip
results in higher ohmic losses arising from the
Joule effect.
As the stator current, consistent with the load,
may not exceed the rated value for delta
connection, the protective switch will not react.
Consequent to increased winding and motor
losses the motor will overheat and the winding
will burn out.
Probable cause 4:
Failures from this cause are caused by thermal
overload, due to excessive starts under
intermittent operation or to an overly long starting
cycle.
The perfect functioning of motors operating under
these conditions is only assured when the
following values are taken into account.
a) Number of starts per hour;
b) starting with or without load;
c) Mechanical brake or current inversion;
d) Acceleration of load connected to motor shaft;
e) Load torque related to speed during
acceleration and braking.
The continuous effort withstood by the higher
rotor during intermittent starting brings about
losses which provoke overheating. Under certain
circumstances, there is a possibility that the stator
winding be subject to damage with the motor
stopped as a result of the heating on the motor.
6.1.3. ROTOR FAILURES (SQUIRREL CAGE)
If a motor running under load conditions produces
a noises of varied intensity and decreasing
frequency while the load is increased, the reason,
in most cases, will be an unsymmetrical rotor
winding.
In squirrel-cage motors the cause will nearly
always be a break in one or more of the rotor
bars; simultaneously, periodical stator current
fluctuations may be recorded.
68
Doc. PBPNU5999001
As a rule, this defect appears only in molded or
die cast aluminum cages.
Failures due to spot heating in one or another of
the bars in the rotor care are identified by blue
coloration at the affected points.
If there are failures in various contiguous bars,
vibrations and shuddering can occur. When the
rotor core gets a blue or violet coloration, it is a
sign of overloading.
This can be caused by overly high slip, by too
many starts or overlong starting cycles. This
failure can also come from insufficient power
supply voltage.
6.1.4. SLIP RING ROTOR FAILURES
A break in one phase of the rotor winding is
noticed by a strong noise that varies according to
the slip and, in addition, stronger periodical stator
current fluctuations occur.
It is possible, but rarely so, that a rupture could
have occurred in the connection between the
winding and the slip ring. However, it is advisable
to first check if there is a break in the rheostat
starter connection, or even in the part itself.
6.1.5. SHORT BETWEEN TURNS ON SLIP
RING MOTORS
This abnormal situation occurs only under
extremely rare circumstances. Depending on the
magnitude of the short circuit, the start can be
violent even if the rheostat is at the first tap of
its starting position. In this case, heavy starting
currents are not carried through the rings and so
no burn marks will be noticed on them.
6.1.6. BEARING FAILURES
Bearing failure are the most frequent causes for
delayed breakdowns.
The most common reasons for this failure are
identified as excessive vibration, incorrect
operation, bad alignment, unbalanced couplings
and excessive radial and/or axial loads.
Check item 4.2 for bearing maintenance.
Pag. 108/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

6.1.7. SHAFT BREAKING

Although bearings traditionally constitute the

weakest part and the shafts are designed with
wide safety margins, it is possible that a shaft
may break by fatigue from bending stress caused
by excessive belt tension. In most cases, breaking
occurs right behind the drive end bearing.
As a consequence of alternating bending stress
induced by a rotating shaft, breaking travel
inwards from the outside of the shaft until the
point of rupture is reached when resistance of the
remaining shaft cross-section no longer suffices.
At this point, avoid additional drilling on the shaft
(fastening screw holes) as such operations tend to
cause stress concentration.
The replacement of only one or two belts of a belt
drive system is frequently a cause of shaft
breaking, besides being an incorrect practice.
Any used and consequently stretched belts on a
drive system, especially those closer to the motor,
while new and unstretched belts are placed on
the same drive but farther from the bearing, can
cause shaft stress.

6.1.8. DAMAGE ARISING FROM POORLY

FITTED TRANSMISSION PARTS OR
IMPROPER MOTOR ALIGNMENT

Damaged to bearing and breaking of shafts are

often resulted from inadequate fitting of pulley,
couplings or pinions on the shaft.
These parts "knock" when rotating. The defect
can be recognized by the scratches that appear
on the shaft or the eventual scale like flaking of
the shaft end. Keyways with edges pitted by
loosely fitted keys can also cause shaft failures.
Poorly aligned couplings cause knocks and radial
and axial shaking to shaft and bearings. Within a
short while, these bad practices cause the
deterioration of the bearings and the enlargement
of the bearing on the drive end side. In other
cases, motor shaft can break.

69
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 109/458

6.2. ABNORMAL SITUATIONS DURING OPERATION
NOTE: The following chart presents a list of abnormal situations during motor operation, the probable cause
for such abnormal situations, and the corrective measures. In case of further doubts, contact Weg Mquinas.
ABNORMAL SITUATION
- Motor fails to start, neither coupled, nor
uncoupled.
- Motor starts very slowly with load and
does not reach rated speed.
- Motor starts under no load, but is fails
when the load is applied .
- Stator current changes with double
frequency of the slip; during start
humming can be heard.
- No load current too high.
- Rapid overheating of the stator, there is - Parallel or in phase connected wires of
a humming during the operation.
- Areas of heating on the stator winding
- Areas of heating on the rotor.
- Abnormal noise with motor connected
to load.
- Noise occurs when coupled and
disappears when not coupled.
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
PROBABLE CAUSE(S)
- At least two feeding conductors are
broken, no voltage supply.
- The rotor is locked.
- Brushes problem.
- Bearing is damaged.
- Too high load during start.
- Supply voltage too low.
- Too high voltage drop on the feeding
conductors.
- Rotor bars damaged or interrupted.
- One supply conductor remained
interrupted after the starting.
- Rotor winding is interrupted.
- Brushes problem.
- Supply current too high.
the stator winding are broken.
- Short between turns.
- Interruption of conductors connected in
parallel or in phase of the stator winding
- Poor connection.
- Interruption in the rotor winding.
- Mechanical problems.
- Electric problems.
- Failure in the drive components, or on the
driven machine.
- Failure on the gearing.
- Coupling problem.
- Foundation is sunk.
- Poor balancing of the parts or of the
driven machine.
- Supply voltage too high.
- Direction of rotation is not correct.
70
Doc. PBPNU5999001
CORRECTIVE MEASURE(S)
- Check commanding board, switch, fuses,
power supply conductors, terminals and
setting of brushes.
- The brushes might be worn or set
incorrectly.
- Replace the bearing.
- Do not apply load on the machine during
start.
- Measure supply voltage, set the correct
value.
- Check the cross section of the feeding
conductors.
- Check and repair the rotor winding
(squirrel cage), test the short circuit
device (slip ring).
- Check the supply conductors.
- Check and repair rotor winding and
short-circuit device.
- Clean, set correctly or replace the
brushes.
- Measure the supply voltage and set it to
the correct value.
- Measure the resistance of all winding
phases. Replace the stator core with the
winding.
- Rewind the motor.
- Remake the connections.
- Repair the rotor winding, or replace it
- Noise decreases generally with the speed
drop; see also "Noisy operation when
uncoupled"
- Noise disappears when motor is switched
on. Contact the manufacturer
- Check the power transmission, coupling
and alignment.
- Align the driving, check the position
(coupling) of the gearing.
- Align the motor and the driven machine.
- Repair the foundation.
- Test the supply voltage and the noload
current.
- Reverse the connections of two phases.
- Rebalance the unit.
Pag. 110/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
ABNORMAL SITUATION PROBABLE CAUSE(S)
- Poor cooling due to dirty air tubes.
- Load too high.
- Excessive number of starts, or the
inertia is too high.
- Voltage too high and consequently also
the iron losses are too high.
- The voltage is too low and consequently
the current is too high.
- One feeding conductor is interrupted, or
one phase of the winding is interrupted.
- Overheating of the stator winding with
- Rotor is rubbing on the stator.
load.
- The operation mode does not
correspond to the data on the
nameplate.
- Electrical load unbalanced (blown fuse,
incorrect control).
- Dirty windings.
- Obstructed cooling system.
- Dirty filter.
- Rotation direction not compatible with
the fan used.
- Unbalancing.
- One phase of the stator winding is
interrupted.
- Dirt in the air gap.
- Fastening bolts are loose.
- Unbalancing of the rotor increase after
- Noisy operation when uncoupled.
the assembling of the driving
components. Unbalanced rotor.
- Foundation resonance.
- Motor frame is deformed.
- Bent shaft.
- Uneven air gap.
- Control circuit conductors too light.
- Open circuit on rotor circuits.
- Dirt between brush and slip ring.
- Brushes gripe on brush holders.
- Slip ring motor operating at low speed
- Incorrect pressure on brushes.
with external resistance disconnected.
- Rough surfaces on slip rings.
- Eccentric rings.
- High current density on brushes.
- Brushes incorrectly set.
- Poorly set brushes with insufficient
pressure.
- Overload.
- Slip rings in poor condition.
- Brush sparking.
- Oval slip rings.
- Excess of vibration. Rough surfaces and
scored rings.
- Low load causing damage to slip rings.
Table 6.2.
71
Doc. PBPNU5999001
CORRECTIVE MEASURE(S)
- Clean the air tubes of the cooling
system.
- Measure the stator voltage, decrease
the load, use a larger motor.
- Reduce the number of starts.
- Do not exceed more than 110% the
rated voltage, unless specifications on
the nameplate are different.
- Check the voltage supply and the
voltage drop.
- Check the current in all phases and
make correction.
- Check air gap, operation conditions,
bearings, vibrations.
- Maintain the operation mode as
specified on the nameplate, or reduce
the load.
- Verify if there are unbalanced voltages,
or if the two phases are operating.
- Clean.
- Clean the felt of the filter.
- Analyze the fan in relation to motor
rotation direction.
- Noisy operation continues during
rundown time after switching off the
voltage; rebalance the motor.
- Test current input of all feeding
conductors.
- Remove the dirt and clean the air gap.
- Tighten and block bolts.
- Check balancing.
- Level the foundation.
- Check the alignment.
- The shaft can be bent, check the
balancing and the eccentricity of the
rotor.
- Check if the shaft is bent or if the
bearings are damaged.
- Install heavier conductors on control
circuit.
- Bring control closer to motor.
- Test circuit with a magneto, or other
means, and undertake necessary
repairs.
- Clean slip rings and insulation assembly.
- Select brushes of correct size.
- Check pressure on each brush and
adjust it accordingly.
- Clean, sand and polish.
- Machine on lathe or with portable tool
without removing from machine.
- Reduce load or replace brushes.
- Reset brushes correctly.
- Check brush setting, adjust for correct
pressure.
- Reduce load or install motor with higher
capacity.
- Clean rings and reset brushes.
- Polish the slip rings and machine the
same on lathe.
- Balance the rotor, check the brushes for
free movement within holders.
- Check origin of vibration and correct it.
- Adjust the brushes to the actual load
requirement and machine the slip rings.
Pag. 111/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

6.3. ABNORMAL BEARING SITUATIONS AND FAILURES DURING OPERATION

NOTE: The following chart presents abnormal bearing situations and failures during motor operation, the
probable cause for such abnormal situation and the corrective measures. In certain cases, bearing
manufacturer must be contacted to find out the cause of the failure.

ABNORMAL SITUATION POSSIBLE CAUSE(S) CORRECTIVE MEASURE(S)

- The motor "snores" during operation.
- Bearing noisy, dull spots, grooves in the
- Bearing was slanting mounted.
ball races.
- High bearing noise and a high
overheating of the bearing.
- Overheating of bearings.
- Damaged bearings.
- Cage corrosion, small chips in the grease,
- Clean and replace the grease according
race failure due to insufficient grease, or
inadequate clearance.
- Excessive grease.
- Excessive axial or radial strain on belt.
- Bent shaft.
- Lack of grease.
- Hardened grease cause locking on balls.
- Foreign material in the grease.
- Replace the bearing.
- Align the bearing and machine the
bearing seat.
to the specifications. Replace the bearing.
- Remove the grease relief and run the
motor until excess grease is expelled.
- Reduce belt tension.
- Have shaft straightened and check rotor
balance.
- Add grease to bearing.
- Replace bearing.
- Flush out housing and lubricant; regress.

- Dark spots on one side of the ball races - Check the condition between coupling
- Excessive axial strength.
subsequently the formation of grooves. and driving.

- Clean and replace the bearing insulation.

- Dark lines on the ball races or very Install an insulation if there was not any.
- Current on the bearings.
close transversal grooves. - Branch the current avoiding that it
circulates through the bearing.
- If the motor is stopped during a long
- External vibration, mainly when the motor
- Grooves in the races and depressions in period, turn the shaft to an other position
stopped for a long period of time.
the division of the cylindrical elements. from time to time. This is mainly required
- Lack of maintenance during storage.
for spare motors.

Table 6.3.

IMPORTANT:
The motors listed in this manual are constantly updated. For this reason,
the information here with included may change without prior notice.

72
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 112/458
 THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS

7. WARRANTY TERMS FOR ENGINEERING PRODUCTS

These products, when operated under the conditions stipulated by WEG in the operating manual for such
product, are warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for twelve (12) months from startup
date or eighteen (18) months from manufacturer shipment date, whichever occurs first.
However, this warranty does not apply to any product which has been subject to misuse, misapplication,
neglect (including without limitation, inadequate maintenance, accident, improper installation, modification,
adjustment, repair or any other cases originated from inadequate applications).
The company will neither be responsible for any expenses incurred in installation, removal from service,
consequential expenses such as financial losses nor transportation costs as well as tickets and
accommodation expenses of a technician when this is requested by the customer.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when effectuated by WEG within the Warranty
period do not give Warranty extension, unless otherwise expressed in writing by Weg.
This constitutes WEG's only warranty in connection with this sale and is in lieu of all other warranties,
expressed or implied, written or oral.
There are no implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose that apply to this sale.
No employee, agent, dealer, repair shop or other person is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of
WEG nor to assume for WEG any other liability in connection with any of its products.
In case this happens without Weg's authorization, Warranty is automatically cancelled.

LIABILITY

Except as specified in the foregoing paragraph entitled "Warranty Terms for Engineering Products", the
company shall have no obligation or liability whatsoever to the purchaser, including, without limitation, any
claims for consequential damages or labor costs, by reason of any breach of the express warranty described
therein.
The purchaser further hereby agrees to indemnify and hold the company harmless from any causes of action
(other than cost of replacing or repairing the defective product as specified in the foregoing paragraph
entitled "Warranty Terms for Engineering Products"), arising directly or indirectly from the acts, omissions or
negligence of the purchaser in connection with or arising out of the testing, use, operation, replacement or
repair of any product described in this quotation and sold or furnished by the company to the purchaser.

WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELTRICOS S.A. - MQUINAS

Av. Pref. Waldemar Grubba, 3000 89256900 Jaragu do Sul/SC BRAZIL
Phone: (55) 047 372 4000 Fax: (55) 047 372 4030
So Paulo: Phone: (55) 011 5053 2300 Fax: (55) 011 5052 4202
www.weg.com.br

1013.02/0295

73
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 113/458
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 114/458
MANUAL DE INSTALACION
Y MANTENIMIENTO
MOTORES ELECTRICOS DE INDUCCION
TRIFASICOS DE ALTA Y BAJA TENSION

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 115/458

 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

PROLOGO

El motor elctrico es el equipo ms utilizado por el hombre en su caminada en busca del progreso,
ya que la mayora de las mquinas y muchos inventos conocidos dependen de l.

Como desempea un papel muy importante para el conforto y bienestar de la humanidad, el motor
elctrico necesita ser identificado y tratado como una mquina motriz cuyas caractersticas envuelven
determinados cuidados, de los cuales la instalacin y mantenimiento. Esto significa decir que el motor
elctrico debe ser tratado de forma adecuada.

La instalacin y mantenimiento exigen cuidados especficos, para garantizar el perfecto

funcionamiento y prolongar la vida de la mquina motriz.

El manual de instalacin y mantenimiento de MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE ALTA Y BAJA TENSIN,

tiene como objetivo ayudar a los profesionales del ramo, facilitndoles la tarea de arreglar el ms importante
de todos los equipamientos:

El motor elctrico!

WEG INDSTRIAS S.A. - MQUINAS.

---- IMPORTANTE ----

LEA ATENTAMENTE LAS INSTRUCCIONES DE ESTE MANUAL
PARA PERMITIR LA OPERACIN SEGURA Y CONTINUA DEL EQUIPO.

9300.0010 E/4
Octubre 2005

2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 116/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

NDICE
1. INTRODUCCIN ......................................................................................................................................................................5

2. INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES ................................................................................................................................................6

2.1. INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD .................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2. RECIBIMIENTO............................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3. ALMACENAJE................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.3.1. ALMACENAJE INTERNA................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3.2. ALMACENAJE EXTERNA .................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3.3. DEMS ATENCIONES DURANTE LA ALMACENAJE............................................................................................. 7
2.3.4. RODAMIENTOS.............................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3.5. DESCANSOS DE DESLIZAMIENTO ................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.6. RESISTENCIA DEL AISLAMIENTO.................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.7. NDICE DE POLARIZACIN............................................................................................................................. 8
2.4. MANEJO....................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3. INSTALACIN........................................................................................................................................................................10
3.1. ASPECTOS MECNICOS............................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1.1. MONTAJE..................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1.2. FUNDACIONES............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1.2.1. TIPOS DE BASES........................................................................................................................... 11
3.1.3. ALINEAMIENTO/NIVELAMIENTO ................................................................................................................... 13
3.1.4. ACOPLAMIENTOS......................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.4.1. ACOPLAMIENTO DE MOTORES EQUIPADOS CON DESCANSOS DE DESLIZAMIENTO-HOLGURA AXIAL 15
3.2. ASPECTOS ELCTRICOS.............................................................................................................................................. 16
3.2.1. SISTEMA DE ALIMENTACIN........................................................................................................................ 16
3.2.2. CONEXIN................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.3. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIONES GENERALES ..................................................................................................... 17
3.2.4. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES E ROTORES.............................................................................. 18
3.2.4.1. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES Y ROTORES (norma IEC 60034-8)............................... 18
3.2.4.2. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES E ROTORES (norma NEMA MG1)................................. 19
3.2.5. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ACCESORIOS .............................................................................................. 20
3.2.6. ARRANQUE DE MOTORES ELCTRICOS......................................................................................................... 22
3.2.7. PROTECCIN DE LOS MOTORES................................................................................................................... 23
3.2.7.1. LIMITES DE TEMPERATURA PARA LA BOBINA................................................................................. 23
3.2.7.2. RESISTENCIA DE CALENTAMIENTO................................................................................................ 25
3.2.7.3. LIMITES DE VIBRACIN................................................................................................................. 25
3.2.7.4. LMITES DE VIBRACIN DEL EJE.................................................................................................... 25
3.3. ENTRADA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO................................................................................................................................. 26
3.3.1. EXAMEN PRELIMINAR................................................................................................................................... 26
3.3.2. ARRANQUE INICIAL ..................................................................................................................................... 26
3.3.3. FUNCIONAMIENTO....................................................................................................................................... 27
3.3.4. DESCONEXIN............................................................................................................................................. 27
3.4. PROPIEDADES ACSTICAS.......................................................................................................................................... 27
3.5. MOTORES APLICADOS EN AREA DE RIESGO / ATMOSFERAS EXPLOSIVAS..................................................................... 27
3.5.1. CUIDADOS GENERALES CON MOTORES ELCTRICOS APLICADOS EN REA DE RIESGO.................................. 28
3.5.2. CUIDADOS ADICIONALES RECOMENDABLES PARA MOTORES APLICADOS EN REA DE RIESGO..................... 28
4. MANTENIMIENTO..................................................................................................................................................................29
4.1. LIMPIEZA ................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.1. LIMPIEZA PARCIAL....................................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.2. LIMPIEZA COMPLETA ................................................................................................................................... 29
4.2. LUBRICACIN............................................................................................................................................................. 30
4.2.1. DESCANSOS CON RODAMIENTO LUBRICADOS A GRASA............................................................................... 30
4.2.1.1. INTERVALOS DE LUBRICACIN...................................................................................................... 30
4.2.1.2. TIPO Y CANTIDAD DE GRASA......................................................................................................... 33
4.2.1.3. CALIDAD Y CANTIDAD DE LA GRASA.............................................................................................. 33
4.2.1.4. COMPATIBILIDAD.......................................................................................................................... 33
4.2.1.5. INSTRUCCIONES PARA LUBRICACIN............................................................................................ 34
4.2.1.6. ETAPAS DE RELUBRICACIN DE LOS RODAMIENTOS...................................................................... 34
4.2.1.7. DISPOSITIVO DE RESORTE PARA RETIRAR LA GRASA..................................................................... 34
4.2.1.8. SUSTITUCIN DE RODAMIENTOS.................................................................................................. 35
4.2.2. DESCANSOS DE RODAMIENTO A GRASA MOTORES VERTICALES................................................................. 35

3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 117/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.2.1. CARACTERSTICAS ........................................................................................................................ 35

4.2.2.2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA LUBRICACIN ............................................................................................ 35
4.2.2.3. DESMONTAJE / MONTAJE DESCANSO TRASERO ......................................................................... 36
4.2.2.4. DESMONTAJE / MONTAJE DESCANSO DELANTERO ...................................................................... 37
4.2.3. DESCANSOS DE RODAMIENTO LUBRICADOS A ACEITE.................................................................................. 38
4.2.3.1. INSTRUCCIONES PARA LUBRICACIN ............................................................................................ 38
4.2.3.2. OPERACIN DE LOS DESCANSOS................................................................................................... 38
4.2.3.3. AJUSTE DE LAS PROTECCIONES .................................................................................................... 38
4.2.3.4. MANTENIMIENTO DEL DESCANSO ................................................................................................. 39
4.2.4. DESCANSOS DE DESLIZAMIENTO ................................................................................................................. 40
4.2.4.1. INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES ........................................................................................................ 41
4.2.4.2. DESMONTAJE DEL DESCANSO (TIPO EF) ..................................................................................... 41
4.2.4.3. MONTAJE DEL DESCANSO ............................................................................................................. 42
4.2.4.4. AJUSTE DE LAS PROTECCIONES (PT100)........................................................................................ 42
4.2.4.5. REFRIGERACIN CON CIRCULACIN DE AGUA............................................................................... 43
4.2.4.6. LUBRICACIN ............................................................................................................................... 43
4.2.4.7. VEDAS .......................................................................................................................................... 43
4.2.4.8. FUNCIONAMIENTO ........................................................................................................................ 43
4.3. CONTROL DEL ENTREHIERRO (motores abiertos de grande potencia) ........................................................................... 44
4.4. ANILLOS COLECTORES (para motores con rotor bobinado) ........................................................................................... 44
4.5. PORTAESCOBILLAS Y ESCOBILLAS (para motores con rotor bobinado) .......................................................................... 44
4.5.1. DISPOSITIVO DE ATERRAMIENTO DEL EJE ................................................................................................... 45
4.6. PORTAESCOBILLAS LEVANTABLE ................................................................................................................................ 46
4.6.1. ESQUEMA DE CONEXIN.............................................................................................................................. 46
4.6.2. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA ARRANQUE DEL MOTOR ........................................................................................... 48
4.6.3. PROCEDIMIENTO DESPUS DEL ARRANQUE DEL MOTOR .............................................................................. 48
4.6.4. MONTAJE .................................................................................................................................................... 50
4.6.4.1. CONJUNTO DE LEVANTAMIENTO DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS............................................................... 50
4.6.4.2. CONJUNTO DE MOVIMIENTO DEL BUJE DE CORTOCIRCUITO.......................................................... 51
4.6.4.3. CONJUNTO DE ACCIONAMIENTO DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS............................................................... 52
4.6.4.4. CONJUNTO DEL PASADOR DE REPOSICIN................................................................................... 53
4.6.4.5. CONJUNTO DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS ............................................................................................... 53
4.6.5. DESMONTAJE .............................................................................................................................................. 54
4.6.6. AJUSTE DEL SISTEMA E LEVANTAMIENTO DE LAS ESCOBILLAS ..................................................................... 54
4.7. SECADO DE LAS BOBINAS........................................................................................................................................... 54
4.8. MONTAJE Y DESMONTAJE DEL MOTOR ....................................................................................................................... 54
4.8.1. LNEA Master............................................................................................................................................... 54
4.8.1.1. RETIRADA DEL ROTOR .................................................................................................................. 55
4.8.2. LNEA A....................................................................................................................................................... 55
4.8.3. LNEA F ....................................................................................................................................................... 55
4.8.4. LNEA H ...................................................................................................................................................... 56
4.8.5. PAR DE APRIETE DE LOS TORNILLOS ........................................................................................................... 57
4.9. RECOMENDACIONES GENERALES ................................................................................................................................ 57
4.10. PLAN DE MANTENIMIENTO ....................................................................................................................................... 58
5. REPUESTOS ................................................................................................................................................................... 59
5.1. PEDIDO...................................................................................................................................................................... 59
5.2. MANTENIMIENTO EN EXISTENCIA............................................................................................................................... 59
6. ANORMALIDADES EN SERVICIO ................................................................................................................................... 60
6.1. DANOS COMUNES A LOS MOTORES DE INDUCCIN..................................................................................................... 60
6.1.1. CORTO CIRCUITO ENTRE ESPIRAS ............................................................................................................... 60
6.1.2. DANOS CAUSADOS A LAS BOBINAS .............................................................................................................. 60
6.1.3. DANOS CAUSADOS AL ROTOR (jaula) ........................................................................................................... 61
6.1.4. DANOS EN ROTORES CON ANILLOS.............................................................................................................. 61
6.1.5. CORTOS ENTRE ESPIRAS EN MOTORES CON ANILLOS .................................................................................. 61
6.1.6. DANOS A LOS DESCANSOS........................................................................................................................... 61
6.1.7. FRACTURA DEL EJE...................................................................................................................................... 62
6.1.8. DANOS DERIVADOS DE PIEZAS DE TRANSMISIN MAL AJUSTADAS O DE ALINEAMIENTO DEFICIENTE DE LOS
MOTORES ............................................................................................................................................................. 62
6.2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA DETERMINAR CAUSAS Y ELIMINAR LAS CONDICIONES ANORMALES EN EL MOTOR ................... 63
6.3. INSTRUCCIONES PARA DETERMINAR CAUSAS Y ELIMINAR CONDICIONES DESFAVORABLES Y DEFECTOS DE LOS
RODAMIENTOS ................................................................................................................................................................. 65
7. TRMINOS DE GARANTA PARA PRODUCTOS DE INGENIERA .................................................................................... 66

4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 118/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

1. INTRODUCCIN

IMPORTANTE:
Este manual tiene por objetivo
atender todos los motores trifsicos
de induccin con rotor de jaula y
anillos de la Weg Mquinas. Motores con
especialidades pueden ser fornecidos con
documentos especficos (dibujos, esquema de
conexin, curvas caractersticas...). Estos
documentos deben ser criteriosamente evaluados
juntamente con este manual, antes de proceder la
instalacin, operacin o mantenimiento del motor.
Para los motores con grandes especialidades
constructivas, caso sea necesario alguna
aclaracin adicional, solicitamos entrar en
contacto con Weg Mquinas.
Todos los procedimientos y normas que constan
en este manual deben ser seguidos para
garantizar el buen desempeo del equipo y
seguridad de la persona responsable del mismo.
Seguir correctamente los procedimientos es muy
importante para que el trmino de garanta que
consta en la contra capa de este manual tenga
validez.
Aconsejamos por eso, una lectura detallada de
este manual, antes de instalar y poner en
funcionamiento el motor, en caso de alguna duda,
favor entrar en contacto con Weg Mquinas.

5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 119/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
2. INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES
2.1. INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD
Todos los que trabajan con instalaciones
elctricas, sea con montaje, manejo o con
mantenimiento, deben ser permanentemente
informados y actualizados sobre las normas e
instrucciones de seguridad inherentes al trabajo, y
aconsejados a seguirlos. El responsable deber
certificarse antes de iniciar el trabajo de que todo
fue debidamente observado, y avisar a su gente
sobre los peligros y cuidados que existen y deben
tener al efectuar el trabajo propuesto.
Los motores de este tipo cuando son utilizados
inadecuadamente o si reciben un mantenimiento
incorrecto o son reciben intervenciones por
personas sin calificacin, pueden causar graves
accidentes con perjuicios materiales y personales.
Por eso, se recomienda que los servicios deben
ser efectuados por personal calificado. Se
entiende por personal calificado a las personas
que, en funcin de su entrenamiento, experiencia,
nivel de instruccin, conocimientos de normas
relevantes, especificaciones, normas de seguridad
y prevencin de accidentes y conocimiento de las
condiciones de funcionamiento, hayan sido
autorizadas por los responsables para la ejecucin
de los trabajos necesarios y sepan evitar posibles
peligros.
Equipos para combatir los incendios y avisos
sobre primeros auxilios no deben faltar en el local
de trabajo, debiendo estar en lugares bien visibles
y accesibles.
2.2. RECIBIMIENTO
Los motores suministrados pasan por vigorosos
ensayos y estn en perfectas condiciones de
operacin. Las superficies torneadas son
protegidas contra oxidacin. La caja o container
deber ser revisado luego despus de su llegada
para certificarse del perfecto estado o detectar
algn dao causado en el transporte. Los motores
son transportados con un sistema de traba del eje
para prevenir daos en los descansos. Sugerimos
que el dispositivo de traba sea debidamente
almacenado para ser usado cuando el motor
necesite ser transportado.
Cualquier avera deber ser comunicada a la
empresa transportadora, al seguro y a Weg
Mquinas. En caso de no tomar estas
providencias ocasionar la prdida de la
garanta.
Al levantar el embalaje (o container) se deben
observar los puntos de izamiento, el peso indicado
en el embalaje y la capacidad del guindaste.
6
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Motores acondicionados en cajas de madera
siempre deben ser levantados por sus propios
ojales o por la carretilla levantadora
adecuadamente y nunca levantar a travs de las
maderas de la caja.
Nunca debe caer el embalaje, debe ser colocado
con mucho cuidado en el suelo sin provocar
choques bruscos para evitar daos a los cojinetes.
No retire la grasa protectora de la punta del eje ni
las gomas o tapones de cierre de los agujeros de
las cajas de conexiones. Estas protecciones deben
permanecer hasta la hora del montaje final.
Despus de abrir la caja protectora del equipo,
debe ser inspeccionado visualmente el motor.
Para los motores con sistema de traba en el eje,
este debe ser retirado.
Para los motores con soporte de rodamiento, se
debe girar manualmente el rotor algunas veces.
Caso se encuentren daos, comunique
inmediatamente a la empresa transportadora y a
Weg Mquinas.
2.3. ALMACENAJE
2.3.1. ALMACENAJE INTERNA
En caso de que el motor no sea retirado de su
caja protectora, este debe ser colocado en lugar
protegido de humedad, vapores, lugares con
alternancia de calor y frio, roedores y otros
insectos o bichos.
Los motores deben ser almacenados en locales
exentos de vibraciones para que los descansos no
se daen.
2.3.2. ALMACENAJE EXTERNA
Si posible, elija un local de almacenaje seco, libre
de inundaciones y libre de vibraciones.
Repare todos los daos al embalaje antes de
poner el equipo en almacenaje, lo que es
necesario asegurar condiciones de almacenaje
apropiadas.
Posicione las mquinas, los dispositivos y los
embalajes en palletes, gavillas de madera o
fundaciones que garantizan la proteccin contra la
humedad de la tierra.
Impida el equipo de ahondarse en la tierra. La
circulacin del aire debajo del equipo tambin no
puede ser impedida.
La cobertura o lona usada para proteger el equipo
contra intemperies no deben hacer contacto con
las superficies del equipo. Asegure la circulacin
de aire adecuada posicionando bloques de
madera espaciadores entre el equipo y tales
coberturas.
Pag. 120/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
2.3.3. DEMS ATENCIONES DURANTE LA
ALMACENAJE
Para los motores que tienen resistencias de
calentamiento, estas deben ser colocadas en
funcionamiento. Cualquier dao de la pintura o
protecciones contra oxidacin de las partes
torneadas deben ser retocadas.
Para motores de anillos, las escobillas deben ser
levantadas, retiradas del alojamiento para evitar
oxidacin de contacto con los anillos cuando el
motor sea almacenado mas de 2 meses.
OBS: Antes de colocar en operacin,
las escobillas deben ser recolocadas
en el alojamiento y el asentamiento
debe ser cuidado.
2.3.4. RODAMIENTOS
Caso el motor sea colocado en funcionamiento
despus de un tiempo de almacenaje igual o
inferior a seis meses, no es necesario ningn tipo
de control.
Gire el rotor mensualmente (manualmente) para
una otra posicin. Despus de seis meses de
almacenaje, antes de poner en operacin, los
rodamientos deben ser re-lubricados, conforme
item 4.2.1.5.
En caso de que el motor sea colocado en
funcionamiento despus de un periodo prximo o
mayor que dos aos, los rodamientos deben ser
desmontados, lavados con ter de petrleo y
verificados. Despus de montados deben ser
engrasados segn el iten 4.2.1.5. Observar que la
grasera deber ser vaciada.
2.3.5. DESCANSOS DE DESLIZAMIENTO
El desempeo del soporte de deslizamiento
depende de su adecuada instalacin, lubricacin y
mantenimiento. Antes de montar o desmontar el
soporte, lea cuidadosamente las instrucciones. El
procedimiento descrito en el iten 4.2.2. se refiere
al montaje y desmontaje de descansos en
mquinas elctricas con el motor ya debidamente
montado.
7
Doc. PBPNU5999001
2.3.6. RESISTENCIA DEL AISLAMIENTO
* * ATENCIN! * *
Antes de hacer la medicin de la resistencia de
aislamiento, la mquina debe estar desconectada
y parada.
El bobinado en teste debe ser conectado a la
carcasa y a tierra por un perodo at remover la
carga electrosttica residual. Atierre los
capacitores (si suministrados) antes de hacer la
desconexin de los terminales y medir con el
Meghmetro.
La no observacin de estos procedimientos
puede resultar en daos personales.
Cuando el motor no es colocado inmediatamente
a funcionar, lo debemos proteger contra la
humedad, temperaturas elevadas y suciedades en
general, evitando as que la resistencia del
aislamiento sufra con eso.
La resistencia del aislamiento de las bobinas debe
ser medida antes de entrar en servicio.
Cuando el ambiente es muy hmedo, es necesaria
una verificacin peridica durante el almacenaje.
Es difcil indicar reglas fijas para el valor real de la
resistencia del aislamiento de una mquina, ya
que ella varia dependiendo de las condiciones
ambientales (temperatura, humedad), condiciones
de limpieza de la mquina (polvo, aceite, grasa,
suciedad) y calidad y condiciones del material
aislante utilizado. Una buena dosis de sensatez,
fruto de experiencia, debe ser usada, para
determinar si la mquina est o no apta para
funcionar. Anotaciones peridicas son tiles para
esta conclusin.
Las reglas siguientes muestran el orden de los
valores que pueden ser esperados en una
mquina limpia y seca, a 40C, cuando la tensin
de ensayo es aplicada durante un minuto,
indicado por el grfico de la figura 2.1 conforme
NBR 5383 / IEEE43.
La resistencia Rm del aislamiento es dada por la
frmula:
Rm
Rm =
= Un
Un ++11
Donde:
Rm - Resistencia del aislamiento mnima
recomendada en Mega Ohm con las bobinas a
una temperatura de 40C;
Un - Tensin nominal de la mquina, en kV.
Si el ensayo fuera hecho en temperatura
diferente, ser necesario corregir la lectura para
40C, utilizando un grfico de variacin de la
resistencia del aislamiento en funcin de la
temperatura, hecha con la propia mquina. Si no
se dispone de esta curva, podemos emplear la
conexin aproximada que nos provee la figura
2.1., conforme NBR 5383 / IEEE43.
Pag. 121/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

En mquinas viejas, en servicio, Valor de la resistencia Evaluacin del

pueden ser encontrados del aislamiento aislamiento
frecuentemente valores bastante
2M o menor Malo
mayores. La comparacin con
medidas anteriores de la misma mquina, en < 50M Peligroso
condiciones similares de carga, temperatura y 50...100M Regular
humedad sirve como una mejor referencia de las 100...500M Bueno
condiciones de aislamiento en vez de un nico 500...1000M Muybueno
resultado obtenido, podemos desconfiar de > 1000M Excelente
cualquier aumento o disminucin brusca en los
Tabla 2.3a. Lmites orientativos de la resistencia del
resultados subsecuentes. aislamiento en mquinas elctricas.
En general la medida del aislamiento es hecha
con un MEGOHMETRO.
Si la resistencia del aislamiento fuera menor que 2.3.7. NDICE DE POLARIZACIN
los valores obtenidos por la frmula indicada, los
motores tendrn que ser sometidos a un proceso El ndice de polariza (I.P.) es tradicionalmente
de cura, conforme tem 4.8. definido por la relacin entre la resistencia de
aislamiento medida en 10 min. y la resistencia de
aislamiento medida en 1 min. con temperatura
relativamente constante.
A travs del ndice de polarizacin se puede
evaluar las condiciones del aislamiento del motor
conforme tabla abajo:

Evaluacin del
ndice de polarizacin
aislamiento
1 o menor Malo
< 1,5 Peligroso
1,5 2,0 Regular
2,0 3,0 Bueno
3,0 4,0 Muy bueno
> 4,0 Excelente
Tabla 2.3b. ndice de polarizacin (relacin entre 10 y 1
minuto).

Inmediatamente despus de la medicin

de la resistencia de aislamiento, atierre
el bobinado para evitar accidente.

Figura 2.3.

8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 122/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

2.4. MANEJO Los cncamos existentes en las tapas, cojinetes,

radiador, etc., sirven apenas para el manejo de
Para levantar el motor, use solamente los ojales los mismos componentes, nunca use el eje para
existentes en el mismo. En caso de necesidad, levantar el motor por medio de cables, etc.
use una plataforma para proteger el motor.
Observe el peso indicado y nunca levante
bruscamente o a las sacudidas para colocarlo en LNEA M
el suelo con cuidado para no maltratar los
cojinetes del motor.

LNEA H

1) No levante el motor por el intercambiador

Notas: de calor (si hubiere).
1) Los cncamos de suspensin de la carcasa 2) Izaje sin el intercambiador de calor.
son para levantar solamente el motor. No Caso el centro de gravedad no est
los utilice para levantar el conjunto motor + perfectamente en el centro de los cncamos de
mquina accionada. suspensin, utilice una de las formas conforme
2) Las corrientes o cables de izaje deben tener tem 3.
u ngulo mximo de 30 con relacin a
vertical.
3) No observar estas recomendaciones podr
causar danos al equipo, heridas a personas
o ambos.

9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 123/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3. INSTALACIN
Las mquinas elctricas deben ser instaladas en
locales que permitan fcil acceso para inspeccin
y mantenimiento, principalmente en lo referente a
los cojinetes (relubricacin) e inspeccin de las
escobillas.
Si la atmsfera es hmeda, corrosiva o contiene
partculas abrasivas, es importante asegurar el
correcto grado de proteccin.
La instalacin de motores donde existen vapores,
gases, polvaredas peligrosas, inflamables o
combustibles ofreciendo posibilidad de fuego o
explosin, debe ser hecha de acuerdo con las
Normas ABNT NBR, NEC-Art.500 (National
Electrical Code) y UL-674 (Underwriter's
Laboratories Inc.).
En ninguna circunstancia los motores podrn ser
cubiertos por cajas u otras coberturas que puedan
impedir o disminuir la libre circulacin del aire de
ventilacin.
Las mquinas dotadas de ventilacin externa
deben quedarse, como mnimo, a 50mm de altura
del piso a fin de dejar pasar el aire.
Las aberturas de entrada y salida de aire jams
debern ser obstruidas o disminuidas por objetos,
paredes, pilares, etc.
El ambiente en el local de la instalacin deber
tener condiciones de renovar el aire a orden de
20m por minuto para cada 100kW de potencia
de la mquina.
3.1. ASPECTOS MECNICOS
3.1.1. MONTAJE
Afn de asegurar la operacin adecuada, adems
de una fundacin estable, el motor debe estar
precisamente aliado con el equipo acoplado y los
componentes montados en su eje,
adecuadamente balanceados.
Observacin:
Con la mquina montada y acoplada, las
relaciones entre la frecuencia natural de la
fundacin y:
- La frecuencia de giro del motor;
- El doble de la frecuencia de giro;
- El doble de la frecuencia de la lnea.
Deben estar segn especificado abajo:
- Frecuencia natural de 1 orden de la
fundacin:
+25% o -20% con relacin a las frecuencias
arriba.
- Frecuencias naturales de la fundacin de
rdenes superiores:
+10% o -10% con relacin a las frecuencias
arriba.
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.2. FUNDACIONES
Las fundaciones donde ser colocado el motor
deben ser planas y, si posible, exentos de
vibraciones.
Se recomienda, por este motivo, una fundacin de
concreto. El tipo de fundacin elegido depender
de la naturaleza del suelo en el local de montaje,
o de la resistencia de los pisos.
En el dimensionamiento de las fundaciones del
motor debe ser considerado el hecho de que el
motor puede, ocasionalmente, ser sometido a un
par mayor que el par nominal. Si este
dimensionamiento no fuere criteriosamente
ejecutado podr ocasionar serios problemas de
vibracin del conjunto fundaciones-motor y
mquina accionada.
OBS: En la base de concreto deber ser
prevista una placa metlica para apoyo del perno
de nivelamiento.
Con base en la figura 3.1, los esfuerzos sobre la
fundacin pueden ser calculados a travs de las
ecuaciones:
(4C max)
F1 = +0.5.m.g. +
( A)
(4C max)
F2 = +0.5.m.g .
( A)
Donde:
F1 y F2 - Esfuerzo de los pis sobre la base (N)
g - Aceleracin de la gravedad (9,81m/s).
m - masa del motor (Kg).
Cmx - Par mximo (Nm).
A - Se obtiene del dibujo dimensional del motor
(m).
Figura 3.1 - Esfuerzos sobre la base.
NOTA: El dibujo arriba indica los esfuerzos en el
motor cuando el sentido de giro es horario. Para
sentido antihorario. (F1, F2, 4. Cmx).
Pag. 124/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Bloques de hierro o de acero, placas con
superficies planas y con dispositivos de anclaje,
pueden ser fundidos en el concreto para recibir y
fijar los pies del motor, conforme sugestiones en
la figura 3.2.
Es muy importante observar que todos los
equipos de la estructura debern ser adecuados
para transmitir las fuerzas y torques que ocurren
durante la operacin.
Figura 3.2 - Forma de fijar los motores.
11
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.2.1. TIPOS DE BASES
a) Bases de concreto (o fijadas en el
concreto)
Conforme mencionado en el tem anterior, las
bases de concreto son los ms utilizados para
acomodar estos motores.
El tipo y tamao de las fundaciones - resaltes y
reentrancias, tornillos de anclar con placas de
anclar sueltas o fijas en el concreto dependen del
tamao y del tipo del motor.
Los motores pueden ser montados en una base
de concreto sobre cuatro bloques de fundacin.
Ver dimensiones de los componentes de
instalacin en la tabla a seguir.
Instalacin y ejemplos:
Pag. 125/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Tornillos para fijar

de agujeros en los Bloques de fundacin Bujes cnicos (DIN 258)
(DIN 933)
pies del motor
Cantidad Dimensin Cantidad Dimensin Cantidad Dimensin
28 4 M24 4 M24 x 60 2 14 x 100
36 4 M30 4 M30 x 70 2 14 x 100
42 4 M36 4 M36 x 80 2 14 x 100

48 4 M42 4 M42 x 90 2 14 x 100

Dimensiones del montaje

Rosca
s t u v w

M26 e M30 50 450 220 265 315

M36 70 539 240 300 350

M42 70 600 270 355 400

Tabla 3.1. - Medidas para anclar (Ejemplo de instalacin).
Ejemplo de preparacin:
Limpiar bien la fundacin para garantizar
adecuada adherencia entre los bloques de la
fundacin y el cemento.
Fijar los bloques de la fundacin junto a los pies
del motor usando tornillos.
Coloque cuas de diferentes espesores (espesor
total de aproximadamente 2mm) entre los pies
del motor y la superficie del apoyo de las
fundaciones para que posteriormente se pueda
hacer un alineamiento vertical correcto.
Para garantizar la centralizacin de los tornillos en
relacin a los agujeros de los pies, colocar un buje
de chapa metlica o papel rgido (prespan),
posibilitando posterior alineamiento preciso en
sentido horizontal.
Coloque cuas o tornillos de nivelamiento debajo
Figura 3.3. - Ejemplo 1. de los bloques de la fundacin para un adecuado
nivelamiento del motor y para un perfecto
alineamiento del mismo con la mquina que
acciona. Despus de la colocacin del cemento
haga un preciso control del alineamiento.
Eventuales correcciones pueden ser hechas con
arandelas o chapitas de metal y a travs de
reajuste de grado de tolerancias de los tornillos
de soporte.
Apretar firmemente ahora todos los tornillos de
soporte. Se debe tener mucho cuidado para que
las superficies de apoyo de los pies del motor se
apoyen sin destorcer la carcasa del motor.
Para fijar bien, introduzca dos bujes cnicos
despus de terminar el ensayo. Para esto se
deben usar los agujeros previamente abiertos del
pie del motor.
Figura 3.4. - Ejemplo 2.

12
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 126/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
b) Bases deslizantes
Cuando el motor es accionado por poleas, el
motor debe ser montado sobre una base
deslizante (rieles) y la parte de bajo de las
correas deben estar tensionadas.
El riel que queda ms cerca de la polea motora es
colocado de forma que el tornillo de
posicionamiento quede entre el motor y la
mquina accionada. El otro riel debe ser colocado
con el tornillo en posicin opuesta como muestra
la figura 3.5.
El motor es atornillado en los rieles y posicionado
en la fundacin.
La polea motora es alineada de manera que
quede en el mismo plano del centro de la polea
movida y los ejes del motor y de la mquina estn
paralelos.
La correa no debe estar muy tensa, ver figura 3.9.
Despus del alineamiento, los rieles son fijados.
Figura 3.5.
c) Bases metlicas
La base deber tener superficie plana contra los
pies del motor de manera a evitar deformaciones
en la carcasa. La altura de la superficie de apoyo
debe ser determinada de tal manera que debajo
de los pies del motor puedan ser colocadas cuas
de compensacin con un espesor total de dos
milmetros.
Las mquinas no deben ser removidas de la base
comn para alineamiento; la base debe ser
nivelada en la propia fundacin, usando nivel de
burbuja (u otros instrumentos niveladores).
Cuando la base metlica es utilizada para ajustar
la altura de la punta del eje del motor con la
punta del eje de la mquina, esta debe ser
nivelada en la base de concreto.
Despus de haber sido nivelada la base, los
tornillos soportes apretados y los acoples
verificados, la base metlica y los tornillos
soportes son concretados.
13
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.1.3. ALINEAMIENTO/NIVELAMIENTO
La mquina elctrica debe estar perfectamente
alineada con la mquina accionada, especialmente
en los casos donde el acoplamiento es directo.
Un alineamiento incorrecto puede causar defectos
en los rodamientos, vibraciones y hasta ruptura
del eje.
Una manera de conseguir un alineamiento
correcto es usando relojes comparadores,
colocados uno en cada acople, uno apuntando
radialmente y otro axialmente. As es posible
verificar simultneamente el desvio del
paralelismo (Figura 3.6a) y el desvio de
concentricidad (Figura 3.6b), al dar una vuelta
completa a los ejes.
Una medida en cuatro diferentes puntos de
circunferencia no podrn presentar una diferencia
de lectura mayor que 0,03mm.
Figura 3.6a - Desvo de paralelismo.
Figura 3.6b Desvo de concentricidad.
En el alineamiento / nivelamiento debemos llevar
en consideracin el efecto de la temperatura
sobre el motor y la mquina accionada. Las
diferentes dilataciones de las mquinas acopladas
pueden significar una alteracin en el
alineamiento / nivelamiento durante el
funcionamiento de la mquina.
Despus del alineamiento del conjunto y
verificacin del perfecto alineamiento (tanto en
fro como en caliente) se debe fijar el buje del
motor, conforme figura 3.7.
Existen instrumentos que realizan el alineamiento
utilizando rayos laser visible y computador propio
con programas especficos que confieren alta
confiabilidad y precisin en el alineamiento de
mquinas.
Pag. 127/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

c) Acoplamiento por medio de poleas y

correas
Cuando una relacin de velocidad es necesaria, la
transmisin por correas es la ms usada.

MONTAJE DE POLEAS: Para el montaje de

poleas en la punta del eje con el rasgo de la
chaveta y agujero con rosca en la punta, la polea
debe ser encajada hasta la mitad del rasgo de la
chaveta apenas con esfuerzo manual del
montador.
Para ejes sin agujero con rosca se recomienda
calentar la polea hasta 80C (figura 3.8).

Figura 3.7.

OBS: Los bujes, tuercas y arandelas sern

provistos con el motor cuando solicitados.

3.1.4. ACOPLAMIENTOS
a) Acoplamiento directo
Se debe preferir siempre el acoplamiento directo,
debido al menor costo, reducido espacio ocupado,
ausencia de deslizamiento (correas) y mayor
seguridad contra accidentes. En caso de
transmisin con reduccin de velocidad, es usual
tambin el acoplamiento directo a travs de
reductores.
Figura 3.8 - Montaje de poleas.
DESMONTAJE DE POLEAS: Para desmontaje
las poleas se recomienda el uso de dispositivos
como es mostrado en la figura 3.9, procedindose
con mucho cuidado para no daar la chaveta y el
asiento de la polea.

CUIDADOS: Alinear cuidadosamente las puntas

de los ejes, usando acoplamiento flexible, siempre
que se pueda, quedando holgura mnima de 3
mm entre os acoplamientos.

Figura 3.9 - Desmontaje de poleas.

Se debe evitar la utilizacin de martillo en el

montaje de poleas para evitar la formacin de
marcas en las pistas de los rodamientos. Estas
Figura 3.6c - Folga axial. marcas, inicialmente son pequeas, crecen
durante el funcionamiento y pueden evolucionar
b) Acoplamiento por engranajes hasta daar totalmente el rodamiento.
Acoplamiento por engranajes mal alineados, dan El posicionamiento correcto de la polea es
origen a golpes que provocan vibraciones en la mostrado en la figura 3.10.
propia transmisin y en el motor. Es necesario
tomar cuidado para que los ejes queden alineados
perfectamente, rigurosamente paralelos en el
caso de los engranajes rectos y en ngulo
correcto en el caso de los engranajes helicoidales
o cnicos.
El engrenamiento perfecto puede ser controlado a
travs de la insercin de una tira de papel, que
aparecer despus de una vuelta, con la marca de
todos los dientes. Figura 3.10.

14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 128/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
FUNCIONAMIENTO: Deben ser evitados los
esfuerzos radiales desnecesarios en los cojinetes,
situando los ejes paralelos entre s y las poleas
perfectamente alineadas (figura 3.11).
Correas que trabajan lateralmente alternante al
rotor, y pueden daar las escoras del descanso.
El deslice de la correa puede ser evitado con
aplicacin de un material resinoso, como la brea,
por ejemplo.
Figura 3.11 - Correcto alineamiento de las poleas.
La tensin en la correa deber ser apenas
suficiente para evitar el patinado durante en
funcionamiento (figura 3.12).
Figura 3.12 - Tensiones en la correa.
NOTA: Correa con exceso de tensin aumenta el
esfuerzo en la punta del eje, causando vibracin y
fatiga, pudiendo llegar a quebrar el eje.
Debe ser evitado usar poleas demasiado
pequeas; estas provocan flexin en el motor
debido al hecho que la traccin en la correa a
medida que disminuye el dimetro de la polea.
En cada caso especfico de
dimensionamiento de la polea, el sector de
ventas de Weg Mquinas. Deber ser
consultado para garantizar la aplicacin
correcta.
15
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Debido a tensiones existentes en las correas,
curre una reaccin actuando como carga radial en
la punta del eje del motor.
Los datos para calcular esta reaccin (fuerza
radial), son:
- Potencia transmitida [kW] (P);
- Rotacin motora [rpm] (RPM);
- Diametro de la polea movida [mm] (DPMV);
- Diametro de la polea motora [mm] (DPMT);
- Distancia entre los centros [mm] (I);
- Coeficiente del rozamiento [-] (MI) -
(normalmente 0,5);
- Coeficiente de deslizamiento [-] (K);
- ngulo de contacto de la correa en la polea
menor [RAD] (alfa).
DPMV DPMT
ALFA =
1
(MIxALFA) + 1
K = 1.1x
(MIxALFA) 1
18836,25N K 2 x[1 COS ( ALFA] + 1.21x[1 + COS ( ALFA)]
FR = x
DPMTxRPM 2
NOTA: Siempre utilizar acoples y poleas
debidamente torneados y balanceados con
agujeros concntricos y equidistantes.
Evitar, en todos los casos, sobras de la chaveta
pues estas representan un aumento de masa en
el desbalanceo. Si estas observaciones no son
seguidas, ocurrir un aumento en los ndices de
vibracin.
3.1.4.1. ACOPLAMIENTO DE MOTORES
EQUIPADOS CON DESCANSOS DE
DESLIZAMIENTO-HOLGURA AXIAL
Motores equipados con descansos de
deslizamiento deben operar con acoplamiento
directo a mquina accionada o a un reductor. No
es posible acoplamiento a travs de poleas y
correas.
Los motores equipados con descansos de
deslizamiento poseen 03 marcas en la punta del
eje, siendo que la marca central (pintada de rojo)
es la indicacin de centro magntico, y las 02
marcas externas indican los lmites de movimiento
axial del rotor.
Para el acoplamiento del motor es necesario que
sean considerados los siguientes factores:
- Holgura axial del descanso, indicada en la
tabla 1 abajo, para cada tamao de descanso;
- El paseo axial de la mquina accionada (si
hubiera);
- Holgura axial mxima permitida por el
acoplamiento.
Pag. 129/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Holguras utilizadas en descansos de

deslizamiento WEG Mquinas
Holgura axial total en
Tamao del descanso
mm
Holgura Axial
9 3+3=6
11 4+4=8
14 5 + 5= 10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
22 12 + 12 = 24
28 12 + 12 = 24
Tabla 3.3.

El motor debe ser acoplado de manera que la

saeta fijada en la carcasa del descanso quede
posicionada sobre la marca central (pintada de
rojo), cuando el motor se encuentra en operacin.
Durante el arranque, o mismo en operacin el Figura 3.15.
rotor puede moverse libremente entre las dos
ranuras externas, caso la mquina accionada
ejerza alguno esfuerzo axial sobre el eje del
motor, pero en hiptesis ninguna el motor puede 3.2. ASPECTOS ELCTRICOS
operar de manera constante con esfuerzo axial
sobre el descanso. 3.2.1. SISTEMA DE ALIMENTACIN
Los descansos de deslizamiento utilizados
normalmente por WEG no fueran proyectados Es muy importante observar la correcta
para suportar esfuerzo axial constante. alimentacin de energa elctrica. Los conductores
La figura abajo muestra un detalle del descanso y todo el sistema de proteccin deben garantizar
delantero con la configuracin bsica de conjunto una calidad de energa elctrica en los terminales
eje / descanso y la holgura axial. del motor adentro de los siguientes parmetros,
segn la norma IEC60034-1:
- Tensin: puede variar dentro de una faja de
Holgura Axial
10% del valor nominal.
Holgura Axial
- Frecuencia: puede variar dentro de una faja de
-3 e +5% del valor nominal.

3.2.2. CONEXIN

Para conectar los cables de alimentacin,

destornille las tapas de las cajas de conexin del
estator y el rotor (si existe). Cortar los anillos de
veda (motores normales sin prensa-cables)
conforme los dimetros de cables que sern
Eje
utilizados. Colocar los cables dentro de los anillos.
Corte el cable de alimentacin al tamao
Holgura Axial necesario, decapar la extremidad y coloque los
bornes a ser utilizados.
Unir el revestimiento metlico de los cables (caso
exista) al cable de conexin para tierra comn.
Figura 3.14. Corte los cables de conexin para la tierra, al
tamao necesario y conctelo al conector
La figura abajo muestra en detalles la carcasa del existente en la caja de conexiones existente en la
descanso, con la saeta de indicacin de centro carcasa.
magntico y las 03 marcas en el eje. Apretar firmemente todas las conexiones.

OBS.: No utilizar arandelas de acero u otro

material mal conductor de corriente elctrica al
fijar los terminales.

16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 130/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Sugerimos que sea colocado, antes de ser

conectados las conexiones, una grasa de
proteccin de contactos.
Coloque todos los anillos de veda en las
respectivas ranuras. Atornille la tapa de la caja e
conexiones siempre observando si los anillos de
veda estn colocados correctamente.

3.2.3. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIONES

GENERALES

A seguir mostramos los esquemas de conexiones

orientativos para los motores de induccin con
rotor de jaula, rotor bobinado y para proteccin
contra corto circuito (capacitores y pararayos).

Figura 3.17 - Esquema de conexin general para

motores de anillos.

Figura 3.16 - Esquema de conexin general para

motores de Jaula.

Figura 3.18 - Esquema de conexin general para

motores con pararayos y capacitores.

17
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 131/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

3.2.4. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES E ROTORES

Los esquemas de conexin a seguir muestran la identificacin de los terminales en la caja de conexin y las
conexiones posibles para el estator (fases) y rotor de los motores de induccin trifsicos.
Los nmeros descritos en cada esquema en la tabla abajo sirven para el usuario identificar el esquema de
conexin correspondiente al su motor a travs de una tarjeta fijada en el motor donde estn descritos los
nmeros de los cdigos correspondientes a los esquemas de conexin del estator, rotor y accesorios:

3.2.4.1. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES Y ROTORES (norma IEC 60034-8)

Identificacin general dos bornes

U, V, W = Estator
K, L, M = Rotor

ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN DEL ESTATOR

3 BORNES 6 BORNES 6 BORNES - DAHLANDER
9100 9101 9102 9103 9104 9105 9106
YY Y YY
Y

3 BORNES + NEUTRO
9121

MENOR MAYOR MENOR MENOR MAYOR

VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD

9 BORNES 12 BORNES
9107 9108 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114
YY Y YY Y

12 BORNES - (part winding)

9115 9116 9117 9118

PARA ARRANQUE PARA ARRANQUE Y SOLO PARA PARA VELOCIDAD

EN Y EN ARRANQUE NOMINAL

ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN DEL ROTOR (MOTOR DE ANILLOS)

ROTOR
9120 9119

18
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 132/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

3.2.4.2. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ESTATORES E ROTORES (norma NEMA MG1)

Identificacin general de los bornes

T1 a T12 = Estator
M1, M2, M3 = Rotor

ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN DEL ESTATOR

3 BORNES 6 BORNES 6 BORNES - DAHLANDER
9200 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 9206
YY Y YY
Y

3 BORNES + NEUTRO
9221

MENOR MAYOR MENOR MENOR MAYOR

VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD VELOCIDAD

9 BORNES 12 BORNES
9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214
YY Y YY Y

12 BORNES - (part winding)

9215 9216 9217 9218

PARA ARRANQUE PARA ARRANQUE Y SOLO PARA PARA VELOCIDAD

EN Y EN ARRANQUE NOMINAL

ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN DEL ROTOR (MOTOR DE ANILLOS)

ROTOR
9220 9219

SENTIDO DE GIRO
- El sentido de giro est descrito en la tarjeta de identificacin y debe ser visto en la extremidad del eje del lado
accionado del motor.
- Motores con la identificacin de los terminales y conexiones descritas en los captulos 3.2.4.1 y 3.2.4.2 de este
manual poseen sentido de giro horario.
- Para invertir el sentido de giro se debe invertir la conexin de dos fases.
- Los motores con sentido nico de giro, indicados en la tarjeta de identificacin por una seta fija en la carcasa,
poseen ventilador unidireccional e deben operar solamente en el sentido especificado.
- Para inversin del sentido de giro de motores unidireccionales, se debe consultar la WEG.

19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 133/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

3.2.5. ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN PARA ACCESORIOS

Los esquemas de conexin a seguir muestran la identificacin de los terminales en la caja de conexin y las
conexiones de los accesorios de los motores de induccin trifsicos.
Los nmeros descritos en cada esquema de la tabla abajo sirven para el usuario identificar la conexin de
los accesorios correspondiente al su motor a travs de una tarjeta fijada en el motor donde estn descritos
los nmeros de los cdigos correspondientes a los esquemas de conexin del estator, rotor y accesorios:

Identificacin general de los terminales de los accesorios

16 a 29 = Resistencia de calentamiento.
20 a 27 = Termoresistencia en el estator.
36 a 43 = Termistores en el estator.
52 a 59 = Termostatos en el estator.
68 a 71 = Termoresistencias en los descansos.
72 a 75 = Termistores en los descansos.
76 a 79 = Termostatos en los descansos.
80 a 82 = Dnamos taquimtricos.
88 a 91 = Termmetros.
92 a 93 = Frenos.
94 a 99 = Transformadores.

ESQUEMAS DE CONEXIN DE LOS ACCESORIOS

TERMOSTATOS
9029 9030 9031
EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR
1 POR FASE 1 POR FASE EN SERIE 2 POR FASE

ALARMA PARADA

9032 9036
EN EL ESTATOR EN LOS DESCANSOS
2 POR FASE EN SERIE 1 POR DESCANSO

ALARMA PARADA DELANTERO TRASERO

TERMISTORES
9025 9026 9027
EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR
1 POR FASE 1 POR FASE EN SERIE 2 POR FASE

ALARMA PARADA
9028 9035
EN EL ESTATOR EN LOS DESCANSOS
2 POR FASE EN SERIE 1 POR DESCANSO

DELANTERO TRASERO
ALARMA PARADA

20
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 134/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

TERMOSENSORES PT100
9021 9022 9023
EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR
1 POR FASE 1 POR FASE CON 3 CABLES 2 POR FASE

ALARMA PARADA

9024 9033 9023

EN EL ESTATOR EN LOS DESCANSOS EN LOS DESCANSOS
2 POR FASE CON 3 CABLES 1 POR DESCANSO 1 POR DESCANSO CON 3 CABLES

DELANTERO TRASERO DELANTERO TRASERO

ALARMA PARADA

RESISTENCIA DE CALENTAMIENTO (tensin nica) RESISTENCIA DE CALENTAMIENTO (doble tensin)

9038 9039 9410
CON TERMOSTATO MENOR TENSIN MAYOR TENSIN

TERMMETRO (descanso delantero) TERMMETRO (descanso trasero)

9037 9037

ACCESORIOS ADICIONALES

En motores con ms de 1 rodamiento por descanso, el detector de temperatura utilizado em el rodamiento

extra es identificado con el nmero correspondiente al primero rodamiento precedido del nmero 1 (para 1
rodamiento extra) o 2 (para 2 rodamientos extras)
Ejemplo: Motor con descanso trasero compuesto de 2 rodamientos - 1 PT100 con 3 cables por rodamiento.
El primero rodamiento es identificado con la numeracin 70 - 70 - 71 y el segundo con la numeracin 170 -
170 171.
La misma regla descrita arriba se aplica tambin para detectores extras en el estator o termmetros extras
en los descansos.

21
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 135/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3.2.6. ARRANQUE DE MOTORES
ELCTRICOS
3.2.6.1. ARRANQUE MOTOR DE JAULA
Siempre que posible, el arranque de un motor
trifsico con rotor de jaula, debe ser directa (con
tensin plena), por medio de un contactor.
Es el mtodo ms simple, viable sin embargo,
apenas cuando la corriente de arranque no afecta
la red de alimentacin.
Recordando que la corriente de arranque de
motores de induccin alcanza valores en la orden
de 6 a 7 veces la corriente nominal y, como la
corriente nominal es funcin de la potencia, se
configura una situacin en la que la respectiva
corriente de arranque (IP) debe estar en una
relacin con la corriente nominal de la red, tal
que, durante el tiempo de arranque, esta
corriente (IP) no venga a alterar las condiciones
de alimentacin de otros consumidores, por la
mayor cada de tensin causada en la red.
Esa situacin es satisfecha en una de las tres
condiciones:
a) Cuando la red es suficientemente "fuerte" y la
corriente del motor es menospreciable con
relacin la capacidad de la red.
b) El arranque del motor es hecho siempre sin
carga, qu, sobretodo reduce el tiempo de
arranque y, as, la duracin de la corriente de
arranque, siendo soportable para los otros
consumidores la cada de tensin
momentnea.
c) Cuando debidamente autorizada por la
concesionaria de energa elctrica de la regin.
En los casos en que la corriente de arranque del
motor es elevada pueden ocurrir las siguientes
consecuencias prejudiciales:
a) Elevada cada de tensin en el sistema de
alimentacin de la red. En funcin de esto,
provoca la interferencia en equipos instalados
en este sistema;
b) El sistema de proteccin (cables, contactores)
deber ser superdimensionado, ocasionando
un costo elevado;
c) La imposicin de las concesionarias de energa
elctrica que limitan la cada de tensin de la
red.
Caso el arranque directo no sea posible, debido a
los problemas citados arriba, se puede usar
sistema de arranque indirecto para reducir la
corriente de arranque.
Estos sistemas de arranque indirecta (tensin
reducida) son:
- Llave estrella-tringulo;
- Llave serie-paralelo;
- Llave compensadora o auto-transformador;
- Llave de arranque esttica o soft-start;
- Convertidor de frecuencia.
22
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.2.6.2. FRECUENCIA DE ARRANQUES
DIRECTOS
Debido al valor elevado de la corriente de
arranque de los motores de induccin, el tiempo
utilizado en la aceleracin de cargas de inercia
apreciable resulta en elevacin rpida de la
temperatura del motor. Si el intervalo entre
arranques sucesivos sea muy reducido, esto
llevar a una aceleracin de temperatura excesiva
en los enrollamientos, damnificndolos o
reduciendo su vida til. La norma NBR 7094
establece un rgimen de arranque mnimo que los
motores deben ser capaces de realizar:
a) Dos arranques sucesivos, siendo el
primero hecho con el motor fro, esto es, con sus
bobinados a la temperatura ambiente y el
segundo luego enseguida, sin embargo, despus
del motor haber desacelerado hasta el reposo;
b) Un arranque con el motor caliente, o sea,
con los bobinados a la temperatura de rgimen.
La primera condicin simula el caso en que el
primero arranque del motor es abortado, por
ejemplo, por actuacin de la proteccin,
permitindose una segunda tentativa luego a
enseguida.
La segunda condicin simula el caso de
desconexin accidental del motor en
funcionamiento normal, por ejemplo, por falta de
energa en la red, permitindose retomar el
funcionamiento despus del restablecimiento de
la energa.
3.2.6.3. CORRIENTE DE ROTOR TRABADO
(Ip/In)
De acuerdo con la norma NBR 7094, est indicado
en la placa de caractersticas el valor de IP/In,
que es la relacin entre la corriente de rotor
trabado y la corriente nominal.
3.2.6.4. ARRANQUES DE MOTORES
TRIFSICOS, CON ROTOR DE ANILLOS, CON
REOSTATO.
En el arranque de los motores de anillos, un
restato externo es conectado al circuito rotrico,
a travs del conjunto de escobillas y anillos
rozantes.
La resistencia rotrica adicional es mantenida en
el circuito durante el arranque, para reducir la
corriente de arranque y aumentar el par. Es
posible an, regularse la resistencia externa, de
forma a lograrse el par de arranque igual o
prximo al valor del propio par mximo.
OBS.: Siempre que fuera utilizado un sistema de
arranque diferente del directo, WEG deber ser
comunicada con antecedencia a fin de analizar los
pares requeridos por la carga.
Pag. 136/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3.2.7. PROTECCIN DE LOS MOTORES
En los circuitos de los motores, hay en principio,
dos tipos de proteccin: la proteccin de los
motores contra sobrecarga/rotor bloqueado y
proteccin de los circuitos (conectores de
distribucin) contra corto circuito.
Los motores utilizados en rgimen continuo deben
ser protegidos contra sobrecargas, o por un
dispositivo integrante del motor, o un dispositivo
de proteccin independiente, generalmente con
relay trmico com corriente nominal o de ajuste,
igual o inferior al valor obtenido multiplicndose la
corriente nominal de la alimentacin a plena carga
del motor por:
- 1,25 para motores con factor de
funcionamiento igual o superior a 1,15 o;
- 1,15 para motores con factor de servicio igual
a 1,0.
Algunos motores poseen, cuando son solicitados
por el cliente como parte integrante, dispositivos
de proteccin contra sobre-elevacin de
temperatura (en caso de sobrecargas,
trabamiento del motor, baja tensin, falta de
ventilacin del motor), tales como: termostato
(sonda trmica), termistor, termoresistores tipo
PT100.
3.2.7.1. LIMITES DE TEMPERATURA PARA
LA BOBINA
La temperatura del punto ms caliente del
bobinado debe ser mantenida menor del lmite de
la clase trmica. La temperatura total es igual a la
suma de la temperatura ambiente con la
elevacin de temperatura (T) mas la diferencia
que existe entre la temperatura media del
bobinado y el punto mas caliente.
La temperatura ambiente es como mximo 40C,
por norma, mayor que esta las condiciones de
trabajo son consideradas especiales.
Los valores numricos y la composicin de la
temperatura permitida del punto mas caliente,
son indicados en la siguiente tabla:
Clase de aislamiento B F
Temperatura ambiente C 40 40 40
T = diferencia de temperatura
C 80 100 125
(mtodo de la resistencia)
Diferencia entre el punto mas
C 10 15 15
caliente y a temperatura media
Total: temperatura del punto mas
C 130 155 180
caliente
Tabla 3.4.
Doc. PBPNU5999001
TERMOSTATO (BIMETALICO)
Son detectores trmicos del tipo bimetlico, con
contactos de plata normalmente cerrados. Estos
se abren con determinada temperatura. Los
termostatos son conectados en serie o
independientes conforme el esquema de
conexin.
TERMISTORES (TIPO PTC o NTC)
Son detectores trmicos, compuestos de
semiconductores que varan su resistencia
bruscamente al alcanzar una determinada
temperatura. Los termistores son conectados en
serie o independientes conforme el esquema de
conexin.
NOTA: Los termostatos y los termistores debern
ser conectados a una unidad de control que
interrumpir la corriente del motor o accionar un
dispositivo de sealizacin.
TERMORESISTENCIA (TIPO PT100-RTD)
La termoresistencia es un elemento de resistencia
calibrada hecho de platino.
Su funcionamiento se basa en el principio de que
la resistencia elctrica de un conductor metlico
vara linealmente con la temperatura. Los
conectores del detector son conectados a un
cuadro de comando, que incluye un medidor de
temperatura.
Normalmente son instalados a una resistencia
calibrada por fase y un por soporte, regulndose
los dispositivos de control para alarma y posterior
desconexin del motor (por motivo de seguridad
extra, es posible instalar dos protectores por
fase).
La tabla 3.7 muestra una comparacin entre los
sistemas de proteccin.
OBS.:
1. Adems de los dispositivos de
proteccin aqu indicados, otros
debern ser utilizados cuando se
haga necesario.
2. La tabla 3.8 muestra los valores de
H temperatura en funcin de la resistencia
ohmica medida.
3. Se recomienda que los rels sean ajustados
como esta indicado abajo:
Clase F:
Alarma: 130C.
Parada: 155C.
Clase H:
Alarma: 155C.
Parada: 180C.
Los valores de alarma y parada pueden ser
definidos en funcin de la experiencia, mas no
deben ultrapasar a los indicados anteriormente.
23
Pag. 137/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Proteccin em funcin de la corriente Proteccin con

Causas de sobrecalentamiento sondas trmicas
Fusible y protector en el motor
Solo fusible
trmico
1. Sobrecarga con corriente 1,2 corriente nominal no protegido protegido protegido
2. Rgimen de trabajo S1 a S8 EB 120 no protegido semi-protegido protegido
3. Frenadas, reversiones y funcionamiento con
no protegido semi-protegido protegido
arranques frecuentes
4. Funcionamiento con ms de 15 arranques por
no protegido semi-protegido protegido
hora
5. Rotor trabado semi-protegido semi-protegido protegido
6. Falta de fase no protegido semi-protegido protegido
7. Variacin de tensin excesiva no protegido protegido protegido
8. Variacin de frecuencia en la red elctrica no protegido protegido protegido
9. Temperatura ambiente excesiva no protegido protegido protegido
10. Calentamiento externo provocado por
no protegido no protegido protegido
rodamientos, correas, poleas, etc.
11. Obstruccin de la ventilacin no protegido no protegido protegido
Tabla 3.7 - Comparacin entre sistemas de proteccin de motores.

o
C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.95 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12
100 138.50 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.39 140.77 141.15 141.53 141.91
110 142.29 142.66 143.04 143.42 143.80 144.17 144.55 144.93 145.31 145.68
120 146.06 146.44 146.81 147.19 147.57 147.94 148.32 148.70 149.07 149.45
130 149.82 150.20 150.57 150.95 151.33 151.70 152.08 152.45 152.83 153.20
140 153.58 153.95 154.32 154.70 155.07 155.45 155.82 156.19 156.57 156.94
150 157.31 157.69 158.06 158.43 158.81 159.18 159.55 159.93 160.30 160.67
Tabla 3.8 - Variacin de la resistencia calibrada de Platino.

OBS.: Cuando exista previsin de una caja de conexin para accesorios, en esta caja estarn los conectores
de instalacin de los protectores trmicos y otros accesorios. Caso contrario, los conectores de los accesorios
estarn en la caja principal.

24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 138/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

3.2.7.2. RESISTENCIA DE CALENTAMIENTO - Fijacin del motor en base inadecuada, con

Cuando el motor se encuentra equipado con
resistencia de calentamiento para impedir la
condensacin del agua durante largos periodos
sin funcionamiento, estas deben ser conectadas
de manera a ser siempre energizadas luego
despus a la desconexin del motor y ser
desenergizada as que el motor entre en
funcionamiento. El dibujo dimensional y una placa
de identificacin especfica existente en el motor
indican el valor de la tensin de alimentacin y la
potencia de las resistencias instaladas.
suplementos sueltos debajo de uno o ms
pies del motor y tornillos de fijacin poco
apretados;
- Base inadecuada o con falta de rigidez;
- Vibraciones externas provenientes de otros
equipamientos.
Operar el motor con valores de vibracin
mayores que los descriptos arriba puede
perjudicar su vida til y su desempeo.
3.2.7.4. LMITES DE VIBRACIN DEL EJE

3.2.7.3. LIMITES DE VIBRACIN En motores equipados o con previsin para

instalacin de detector de proximidad
Los motores y generadores WEG son balanceados (normalmente utilizados en descansos de
en fabrica atendiendo los lmites de vibracin deslizamiento) las superficies del eje son hechas
establecidos por las normas IEC34-14, NEMA MG1 con acabamiento especial en las reas adyacentes
Parte 7 y NBR 11390 (excepto cuando el a los descansos, visando garantizar la correcta
contrato de compra especifique valores medicin de vibracin del eje. La vibracin del eje
diferentes). en estos motores es medida y debe atender a las
normas IEC 34-14 o NEMA MG 1.
Las mediciones de vibracin son realizadas en los Los valores de alarma y parada de la tabla 3.6
descansos trasero y delantero, en las direcciones representan valores de vibracin del eje
vertical, horizontal y axial. admisibles para mquinas elctricas acopladas
conforme norma ISO7919-3.
Cuando el cliente enva medio manchn de Estos valores son para orientacin y genricos,
acoplamiento, el motor es balanceado con el siendo que las condiciones especficas de la
mismo montado en el eje. De otra manera, de aplicacin deben ser consideradas, principalmente
acuerdo con las normas arriba indicadas, el motor la holgura diametral entre el eje y el descanso.
es balanceado con media chaveta (o sea, el
chavetero es llenado con una barra de mismo Rotacin Vibracin del Eje (m pico-a-pico)
largo, espesor y altura que el canal durante el nominal 280 y 355 a
(rpm) Carcasa > 450
balanceo). 315 450
Alarma 110 130 150
1800
Los niveles mximos de vibracin recomendados Desconexin 140 160 190
por WEG para motores en operacin son Alarma 85 100 120
3600
informados en la tabla siguiente. Estos valores Desconexin 100 120 150
son para orientacin y genricos, siendo que Tabla 3.6.
condiciones especficas de la aplicacin deben ser
consideradas. Operar el motor con valores de vibracin del eje
en el rango de alarma o desconexin puede
causar daos al casquillo del cojinete.
Niveles de vibracin (mm/s RMS)
Rotacin
nominal (rpm) 355 Las principales causas de aumento en la vibracin
Carcasa < 355 > 630
a 630 del eje son:
Alarma 4,5 4,5 5,5 - Problemas de desbalanceo, acoplamiento o
600 n 1800
Desconexin 7,0 7,0 8,0 otros problemas que repercuten tambin en la
Alarma 3,5 4,5 5,5 vibracin de la mquina;
1800 < n 3600
Desconexin 5,5 6,5 7,5 - Problemas de forma del eje en la regin de
Tabla 3.5. medicin, minimizados durante la fabricacin;
- Tensin o magnetismo residual en la superficie
Las causas de vibracin encontradas ms
el eje donde es hecha la medicin;
frecuentemente en el campo son:
- Rayaduras, golpes o variaciones en el
- Desalineamiento entre el motor y el
acabamiento del eje en la regin de la
equipamiento accionado;
medicin.

25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 139/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3.3. ENTRADA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
3.3.1. EXAMEN PRELIMINAR
Antes de dar el arranque inicial de un motor o
despus de mucho tiempo parado verifique:
1) El motor esta limpio? Fueron retirados los
materiales del embalaje y los elementos de
proteccin?
2) Combina la tensin y la frecuencia del motor
con la de la red elctrica local? (Ver placa de
identificacin).
3) Las partes de conexin del acoplamiento
estn en perfecto estado y debidamente
apretados y engrasados cuando necesario?
4) El motor esta alineado? (Conforme tem
3.1.2)
5) Los rodamientos estn debidamente
lubrificados? (Conforme tem 4.2)
6) Estn conectados los bornes del motor? (En
caso de motores de anillos).
7) Estn conectados los cables de los
protectores trmicos, conexin a tierra y de
las resistencias de calentamiento?
8) La resistencia del aislamiento del estator y
del rotor tienen el valor prescrito? (Conforme
tem 2.3.3)
9) Fueron removidos todos los objetos, como
herramientas, instrumentos de medir y
dispositivos de alineamiento del rea de
trabajo del motor?
10) Los portaescobillas estn en orden? Las
escobillas estn correctamente asentadas?
(Ver tem 4.6)
11) Todos los tornillos de motor estn
debidamente apretados?
12) El motor funciona suavemente y sin ruidos
extraos cuando puesto a funcionar sin
carga? El sentido de rotacin esta correcto?
(Observar para invertir la conexin a la red
elctrica de dos conectores cualquier).
13) La ventilacin del motor esta OK? (Observar
en el sentido de giro para motores
unidireccionales).
OBS.:
1) La distancia entre los portaescobillas y la
superficie de las anillos colectoras, deber ser
de 2mm a 4mm.
2) La presin de la escobilla sobre los anillos,
deber estar de acuerdo con el especificado y
todava deber incidir perpendicularmente
sobre la superficie de contacto si las escobillas
fueren radiales.
3) En el caso que la condicin de carga (corriente
nominal de trabajo) impuesta al motor no este
de acuerdo con las caractersticas nominales
del mismo (arriba o abajo) es necesario
analizar la especificacin de las escobillas en
funcin de la real condicin de carga, verificar
el destrito en el tem 4.6.
26
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4) Para invertir el sentido de giro de los motores
de 2 polos es necesario consultar a Weg
Mquinas para analizar la eficiencia del
ventilador.
5) Los motores de la lnea H con nivel de ruido
especial poseen ventilador unidireccional
(todas las polaridades), para cambiar el
sentido de giro es necesario consultar a Weg
Maquinas para analice del ventilador.
6) Los motores de la lnea Master son
unidireccionales, por lo tanto en el caso de
haber la necesidad de cambiar el sentido de
giro es necesario consultar a Weg Mquinas
para analizar el ventilador.
ATENCIN: La no consideracin de lo descrito
anteriormente provocar problemas serios en el
desempeo de los motores, pudiendo ocurrir
desgastes excesivos de las escobillas. y anillos
colectores (para motores con motor bobinado),
calentamiento excesivo y hasta el dao del
bobinado de los motores, estos problemas no son
incluidos en el termino de garanta, en la
contracapa de este manual.
3.3.2. ARRANQUE INICIAL
MOTOR CON ROTOR DE JAULA:
Despus del examen preliminar, dar el arranque
inicial de acuerdo con una de las formas citadas
anteriormente.
MOTOR CON ROTOR DE ANILLOS:
- El mtodo de arranque deber seguir las
orientaciones del fabricante del sistema de
arranque.
- En motores con escobillas en contacto
permanente, el restato de arranque es
mantenido en la posicin de "trabajo" durante
todo el tiempo de funcionamiento del motor.
- Una excepcin es hecha con los restatos
especiales destinados a regular la velocidad
de rotacin, los cuales son proyectados para
conexin permanente de los contactos de la
resistencia dentro del rango de reglaje.
- Las escobillas debern estar correctamente
asentadas.
- En motores con portaescobillas motorizado,
Despus de la aceleracin completa del motor,
debemos tener la garanta de que el sistema
de levantamiento de las escobillas actu.
Pag. 140/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3.3.3. FUNCIONAMIENTO
Accionar el motor acoplado a la carga hasta llegar
a su estabilidad trmica y observar si aparecen
ruidos y vibraciones anormales o temperaturas
excesivas. Caso aparezcan variaciones de
vibraciones significativas en el conjunto, entre la
condicin inicial de funcionamiento y la condicin
despus de la estabilidad trmica, es necesario
reanalizar el alineamiento y el nivelamiento.
Comparar la corriente de linea absorvida, con el
valor indicado en la placa de identificacin.
En regimen continuo, sin oscilacin de carga, este
no debe exceder la corriente nominal por el factor
de servicio indicado en la placa.
Todos los instrumentos y aparatos de medicin y
control, debern quedar sobre observacin
permanente a fin de que eventuales alteraciones
puedan ser constatadas y sanadas sus causas.
En caso de motores de anillos se debe hacer un
levantamiento real de las condiciones de la carga
a la que el motor ser sometido en regimen de
trabajo, y si necesario recalcular el conjunto de
escobillas. En caso de duda, consultar a Weg
Mquinas.
3.3.4. DESCONEXIN
Cabe aqu, antes de cualquier situacin, una
advertencia muy seria: mientras hay un motor
girando, aunque despus de ser desconectado,
constituye peligro de vida tocar en cualquier
parte activa de este.
a) MOTOR CON ROTOR DE JAULA:
Bastar abrir la llave del circuito estatrico y una
vez parado el motor, recolocar
autotransformador, si existe, en la posicin de
arranque.
b) MOTOR CON ROTOR DE ANILLOS:
Deber ser abierta la cuchilla del circuito
estatrico. Despus de la parada, el restato
deber ser recolocado en la posicin de
"arranque".
*** ATENCIN ***
Las cajas de conexin de motores
equipados con capacitores no deben ser
abiertas antes del tiempo de descarga:
Tiempo de descarga de los capacitores: 5
minutos despus de la desconexin del
motor.
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.4. PROPIEDADES ACSTICAS
Para un buen planeamiento del nivel de conforto
acstico en residencias, oficinas y fbricas, es
muy importante observar como se origina el ruido
de motores y como afecta el nivel de ruido del
ambiente donde estn instalados. Las siguientes
partes de un motor pueden producir ruido en la
faja audible:
1) El sistema de refrigeracin.
2) Las escobillas.
3) Los rodamientos.
4) El circuito magntico.
La parte del motor que predomina como fuente
de ruido depende del tamao de la mquina, de
su velocidad de giro, del grado de proteccin
mecnica (involucro) y de la mquina. El ruido
debido al sistema de refrigeracin es propagado
por aire y generalmente afecta el nivel de ruido
apenas del ambiente donde est instalado. Pero,
si el ruido se origina en los rodamientos o en el
circuito magntico, la situacin es distinta: el
ruido se debe a vibraciones mecnicas de parte o
de toda la mquina, y el sonido puede propagarse
a travs de las fundaciones, de las paredes o
tubos de la mquina. Este tipo de propagacin, a
travs de los componentes estructurales de la
instalacin, puede ser reducido por el montaje de
la mquina sobre amortiguadores adecuadamente
calculados; se debe tener presente que los
amortiguadores colocados inadecuadamente
pueden amplificar las vibraciones.
3.5. MOTORES APLICADOS EN AREA DE
RIESGO / ATMOSFERAS EXPLOSIVAS
Los motores especificados para operar en reas
de riesgo poseen caractersticas adicionales de
el
seguridad que estn definidas en normas
especficas para cada tipo de rea de riesgo,
conforme su clasificacin.
Los requerimientos generales para equipamientos
que operan en reas de riesgo, estn descriptos
en las siguientes normas brasileas e
internacionales respectivamente:
NBR 9518 = Equipamientos Elctricos para
atmsferas explosivas.
Requerimientos generales (especificaciones).
IEC 79-0 = Electrical Apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres.
General Requirements.
EN 50014 = Electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive atmospheres.
General Requirements.
27
Pag. 141/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

3.5.1. CUIDADOS GENERALES CON

MOTORES ELCTRICOS APLICADOS EN
REA DE RIESGO

Antes de instalar, operar o proceder con

mantenimiento en motores elctricos de rea de
riesgo, deben ser tomados los siguientes
cuidados:
- Las normas mencionadas abajo, aplicables
para el caso en cuestin, deben ser estudiadas
y entendidas;
- Todos los requerimientos exigidos en las
normas aplicables deben ser atendidos:
Exe - Seguridad Aumentada: IEC 79-7/NBR
9883/EN 50019.
Exp - Presurizado: IEC 79-2/NBR 5420.
Exn - No encendible: IEC 7915.

3.5.2. CUIDADOS ADICIONALES

RECOMENDABLES PARA MOTORES
APLICADOS EN REA DE RIESGO

- Desernegizar el motor y aguardar que el

mismo est completamente parado antes de
ejecutar cualquier proceso de mantenimiento,
inspeccin o arreglo en los motores;
- Todas las protecciones existentes deben estar
instaladas y debidamente ajustadas antes de
la entrada en operacin;
- Certificarse que los motores estn
debidamente aterrados;
- Los terminales de conexin deben estar
debidamente conectados de modo a evitar
cualquier tipo de mal contacto que pueda
generar calentamiento o chispas.

NOTA: Todas las otras instrucciones

cuanto a almacenaje, manoseo,
instalacin y mantenimiento
existentes en ese manual y aplicable
al tipo de motor en cuestin, tambin deben ser
observadas.

28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 142/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4. MANTENIMIENTO
En un mantenimiento de motores elctricos,
adecuadamente aplicada, se debe inspeccionar
peridicamente niveles de aislamiento, la
elevacin de temperatura (bobinas y descansos),
desgastes, lubricacin de los rodamientos, vida
til de los descansos, examinar eventualmente el
ventilador, cuanto al correcto flujo de aire, niveles
de vibraciones, desgastes de escobillas y anillos
colectoras.
El descaso de uno de los tens anteriores puede
significar paradas no deseadas del equipo. La
frecuencia con que deben ser hechas las
inspecciones, depende del tipo del motor y de las
condiciones locales de aplicacin.
La carcasa debe ser mantenida limpia, sin
acumulo de aceite o polvo en su parte externa
para facilitar el intercambio de calor con el medio.
Advertencia cunto al transporte:
Los motores previstos con rodamientos de esferas
o rodillos, siempre que necesiten ser
transportado, observar que el eje debe ser
debidamente trabado, a fin de evitar daos a los
descansos. Utilizar el dispositivo de traba ofrecido
juntamente con el motor (vea tem 2.2).
4.1. LIMPIEZA
Los motores deben ser mantenidos limpios,
exentos de polvareda, detritos y aceites. Para
limpiarlos, se debe utilizar sepillos o trapos limpios
de algodn. Si el polvo no es abrasivo, se debe
emplear un soplete de aire comprimido, soplando
la suciedad de la tapa deflectora y eliminando
todo el acumulo de polvo contenido en las aletas
del ventilador y en las aletas de refrigeracin.
Los tubos de los intercambiadores de calor (s
existen) deben ser mantenidos limpios y
desobstruidos para garantizar un perfecto
intercambio de calor. Para la limpieza de los
tubos, puede ser utilizada una baqueta con un
cepillo redondo en la extremidad, que al ser
introducida en los tubos, retira la suciedad
acumulada.
NOTA: Para la limpieza de los tubos,
retirar la tapa trasera del
intercambiador de calor e introducir
el cepillo en los tubos.
En caso de intercambiador de calor aire-agua, es
necesario una limpieza peridica en la tubera del
radiador para retirar cualquier incrustacin que
pueda existir.
29
Doc. PBPNU5999001
En motores de anillos, el compartimiento de las
escobillas / anillos colectores, nunca deber ser
limpiado con aire comprimido y si con un
aspirador de polvo o con trapos humedecidos con
solventes adecuados (ver tem 4.5).
Los restos impregnados de aceite o humedad
pueden ser limpiados con trapos embebidos en
solventes adecuados.
En motores con proteccin IP 54, se recomienda
una limpieza en la caja de conexin.
Esta debe presentar los bornes limpios, sin
oxidacin, en perfectas condiciones mecnicas y
sin depsitos de polvo en los espacios vacos.
En ambiente agresivo, se recomienda utilizar
motores con proteccin IP(W)55.
4.1.1. LIMPIEZA PARCIAL
- Drene el agua condensada.
- Limpie el interior de la caja de conexin.
- Inspeccin visual del aislamiento de las
bobinas.
- Limpie los anillos colectores (ver tem 4.4 y
4.5).
- Verificar las condiciones de la escobilla.
- Limpieza del intercambiador de calor.
4.1.2. LIMPIEZA COMPLETA
- Limpie las bobinas sucias con un pincel o
cepillo. Use un trapo humedecido con alcohol o
con solventes adecuados para remover grasa,
aceite y otras suciedades que estn adheridos
sobre las bobinas. Seque con aire seco.
- Pase aire comprimido por entre los canales de
ventilacin en el paquete de chapas del
estator, rotor y descansos.
- Drene el agua condensada, limpie el interior de
las cajas de conexin y de las anillos
colectoras.
- Mida la resistencia del aislamiento (ver tabla
2.1).
- Limpie el conjunto escobillas / portaescobillas
conforme tem 4.4 y 4.5.
- Limpie completamente el intercambiador de
calor.
NOTA: En caso del motor poseer
filtros en la entrada y la salida de
aire, los mismos debern ser
limpiados a travs de pasaje del aire
comprimido.
Caso la polvareda sea de difcil limpieza, lavarlo en
agua fra con un detergente neutro y squelo en la
posicin horizontal.
Pag. 143/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2. LUBRICACIN 4.2.1.1. INTERVALOS DE LUBRICACIN

4.2.1. DESCANSOS CON RODAMIENTO
LUBRICADOS A GRASA
La finalidad del mantenimiento, en este caso, es
prolongar lo mximo, la vida til del sistema de
descansos.
El mantenimiento requiere:
a) Observacin del estado general en que se
encuentran los descansos.
b) Lubricacin y limpieza.
c) Examen ms minucioso de los rodamientos.
El ruido en los motores deber ser observado en
intervalos regulares de 1 a 4 meses. Un odo bien
entrenado es perfectamente capaz de distinguir el
aparecimiento de ruidos anmalos, aunque
empleando medios bien simples (como un
desarmador, etc.).
Para un anlisis ms confiable de los descansos,
aconsejamos la utilizacin de equipos que
permitan hacer anlisis predictivas.
El control de la temperatura en los
descansos tambin hace parte de la
rutina del mantenimiento. Donde los
descansos deben ser
lubrificados
utilizando grasas recomendados segn el iten
4.2.1.2 y la temperatura nunca deber ultrapasar
los 60oC (T = 60C / Ambiente mximo = 40C,
temperatura absoluta = T + ambiente) medido
en el anillo externo del rodamiento.
La temperatura puede ser controlada
permanentemente con termmetros, colocados de
lado de fuera del soporte, o con termo-elementos
embutidos.
Los motores WEG son suministrados con grasa
POLYREX EM 103 (Fabricante: Esso) hasta la
carcasa 450 y grasa STABURAGS N12MF
(Fabricante: Klber) para la carcasa 500 y
mayores, en cantidad suficiente para el periodo
de funcionamiento indicado en la hoja de datos y
en la tarjeta de identificacin de los rodamientos.
Los intervalos de lubricacin, cantidad de grasa y
los rodamientos usados en los motores, estn en
las tablas anexadas, como valores orientativos.
El periodo de relubricacin depende del tamao
del motor, de la velocidad de rotacin, de las
condiciones de trabajo, del tipo de grasa utilizado
y de la temperatura de trabajo.
El periodo de lubricacin y el tipo de rodamientos
para cada motor estn gravados en la plaqueta
de identificacin colocada en el motor.
El motor que permanecer en
existencia debe ser re-lubricado a
cada 6 meses. Todos los meses se
debe girar el eje algunas vueltas para
homogeneizar la grasa por los
descansos.
Los intervalos de lubricacin, cantidad de grasa y
los rodamientos usados en los motores, estn en
las tablas 4.2 a y 4.2 b, como valores orientativos.
Los datos de los rodamientos, cantidad y
tipo de grasa y intervalo de lubricacin
son informados en una placa de
identificacin fijada en el motor.
Antes del procedimiento de lubricacin
de los descansos, verifique estos datos.

Las temperaturas de alarma y

parada para los descansos de
rodamiento pueden ser
ajustadas para 90C y 110C.

Los motores Weg son normalmente equipados

con rodamientos de esfera o de rodillos,
lubricados con grasa. Los rodamientos deben ser
lubricados para evitar el contacto metlico entre
los cuerpos girantes y tambin para proteger los
mismos contra oxidacin y desgaste.
Las propiedades de los lubrificantes se deterioran
en virtud del desgaste y trabajo mecnico, y ms,
todos los lubrificantes sufren contaminacin en el
trabajo, por sta razn se deben sustituir de
tiempo en tiempo.

30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 144/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

INTERVALO MXIMO DE LUBRICACIN (EN HORAS) PARA MOTORES CON EJE HORIZONTAL 60HZ
Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero motor de anillos
delantero (con motor de anillos
Carcasa Polos delantero (motor de jaula) (escobillas
polea) (escobillas fijas)
levantables)
Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 6.400 2.000 8.900 6.600 6.600
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 4.500 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 6.400 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 4.800 1.600 6.400 5.800 5.800
355
6 6322 8.700 NU324 3.900 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 5.800 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.200 1.400 6.400 5.100 3.400
400 6 NU224 4.900 NU228 3.700 6320 10.000 6226 9.300 6230 6.900
8 6.800 5.500 10.000 10.000 9.800
4 2.200 4.800 3.400 6234 2.500
450 6 NU224 4.900 6322 8.700 6230 3.400 5.600
6234
8 6.800 10.000 3.400 8.400
4 1.800 4.800 3.400 2.500
500 6 NU226 4.300 6322 8.700 6230 6.900 6234 5.600
8 6.200 10.000 9.800 8.400
4
6 NU228 3.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 5.500 7.500 4.900 3.900
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 2.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 4.400 7.500 4.900 3.900
4
6 1.200 4.900 3.100 2.300
8 23032 2.200 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 3.100 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6
8 23036 1.600 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 2.400 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
6
8 1.600 6.200 4.400 3.900
23036
10 2.400 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6
8 1.300 6.200 4.400 3.900
23040
10 2.000 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
Grasa Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grasa Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Tabla 4.2a.

NOTAS:
- Intervalo de relubricacin normal adoptado para temperatura ambiente de 40C y tipos de grasa
especificados arriba;
- Para aplicacin de los descansos en posicin vertical, disminuir los intervalos a la mitad;
- Temperatura de trabajo del rodamiento = 70C;
- Adoptar los factores de correccin de abajo en los intervalos de lubricacin de la tabla de arriba, en los
siguientes casos:
- Temperatura de operacin menor que 60C: 1,59.
- Temperatura de operacin de 70C hasta 80C: 0,63.
- Temperatura de operacin de 80C hasta 90C: 0,40.

31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 145/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

INTERVALO MXIMO DE LUBRICACIN (EN HORAS) PARA MOTORES CON EJE HORIZONTAL - 50Hz
Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero motor de anillos
delantero (con motor de anillos
Carcasa Polos delantero (motor de jaula) (escobillas
polea) (escobillas fijas)
levantables)
Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 8.300 3.000 10.000 8.500 8.500
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 5.700 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 7.600 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 6.500 2.500 8.300 7.700 7.700
355
6 6322 10.000 NU324 5.100 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 6.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6317 3.400 6317 3.400
4 3.300 2.300 8.300 6.900 4.800
400
6 NU224 6.100 NU228 4.900 6320 10.000 6226 10.000 6230 8.700
8 7.900 6.700 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 3.300 6.500 4.800 6234 3.700
450 6 NU224 6.100 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 7.300
6234
8 7.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.800 6.500 4.800 3.700
500 6 NU226 5.500 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 6234 7.300
8 7.300 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.300 3.900 1.900 1.300
6 NU228 4.900 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 6.700 8.600 6.100 5.000
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 3.800 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 5.500 8.600 6.100 5.000
4
6 1.800 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23032 2.900 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 4.400 9.600 8.000 7.100
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6 1.300 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23036 2.300 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 3.700 9.600 8.000 7.100
6 1.300 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 2.300 7.300 5.500 5.000
23036
10 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.700 9.100 7.600 7.100
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6 1.000 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 1.800 7.300 5.500 5.000
23040
10 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.200 9.100 7.600 7.100
Grasa Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grasa Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Tabla 4.2b.

NOTAS:
- Intervalo de relubricacin normal adoptado para temperatura ambiente de 40C y tipos de grasa
especificados arriba;
- Para aplicacin de los descansos en posicin vertical, disminuir los intervalos a la mitad;
- Temperatura de trabajo del rodamiento = 70C;
- Adoptar los factores de correccin de abajo en los intervalos de lubricacin de la tabla de arriba,
en los siguientes casos:
- Temperatura de operacin menor que 60C: 1,59.
- Temperatura de operacin de 70C hasta 80C: 0,63.
- Temperatura de operacin de 80C hasta 90C: 0,40.

32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 146/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.1.2. TIPO Y CANTIDAD DE GRASA

Grasas suministradas con los motores

TEMPERATURA DE TRABAJO
FABRICANTE GRASA APLICACIN
CONSTANTE (C)
ESSO POLYREX EM 103 (BASE DE POLIUREIA) (-30 hasta +170)
NORMAL
KLBER STABURAGS N12MF (BASE DE COMPLEXO DE SDIO E MoS2) (-20 hasta +140)
Tabela 4.3a.

Opciones de grasas
TEMPERATURA DE TRABAJO
FABRICANTE GRASA APLICACIN
CONSTANTE (C)
ESSO UNIREX N2 (BASE COMPLEXO DE LTIO) (-35 hasta +175)
PETROBRAS LUBRAX GMA-2 (BASE DE LTIO) (0 hasta +130) NORMAL
ALVNIA R3 (BASE DE LTIO) (-35 hasta +130)
SHELL
AEROSHELL 7 (MICROGEL) (-55 hasta +100)
BAJA TEMPERATURA
ESSO BEACON 325 (BASE DE LTIO) (-50 hasta +120)
Tabla 4.3b.

Cantidad de grasa (g)

Rodamiento de rodillos
Rodamiento de esferas Rodamiento de rodillos
Auto compensador
Rodamiento Grasa (g) Rodamiento Grasa (g) Rodamiento Grasa (g)
6222 40 NU222 40 23032 75
6224 45 NU224 45 23036 105
6226 50 NU226 50 23040 130
6230 65 NU228 55 Tabla 4.4c.
6234 85 NU230 65
6314 30 NU232 70
6316 35 NU234 85
6320 50 Tabla 4.4b.
6322 60
Tabla 4.4a.

4.2.1.3. CALIDAD Y CANTIDAD DE LA

GRASA

Es importante que se haga una lubricacin

adecuada, o sea, aplicar una grasa correcta y en
cantidad indicada, ya que una lubricacin
deficiente como una lubricacin en exceso,
provocan efectos prejudiciales.
La lubricacin en exceso ocasiona aumento de
temperatura, debido a la gran resistencia que
ofrece al movimiento de las partes rotativas, y
principalmente debido a la licuacin de la grasa,
que acaba por perder completamente sus
caractersticas de lubricacin. 4.2.1.4. COMPATIBILIDAD
Esto puede provocar vaciamiento, con
penetracin de grasa para el interior del motor,
depositndose sobre las bobinas, anillos
colectores y escobillas.
Grasas con diferentes tipos de base
nunca debern ser mezcladas.
Ejemplo: Grasas basadas en Litio nunca
deben ser mezcladas con otras que
sean basadas en sodio o calcio.
La compatibilidad de los diversos tipos de grasas
constituye, ocasionalmente, un problema. Se
puede decir que las grasas son compatibles,
cuando las propiedades de la mezcla se
encuentran entre las fajas de propiedades de las
grasas individualmente.

33
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 147/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Para se evitar cualquier posible problema de no
compatibilidad de grasas, una buena prctica de
lubricacin consiste en se introducir una nueva
grasa en el equipamiento, eliminndose por
completo la grasa vieja y limpiando perfectamente
el local que ser lubricado.
Cuando esto no fuere posible, se debe aplicar
grasa nueva bajo presin, expulsndose la
antigua, hasta salir la grasa limpia por el dreno
del descanso.
En general, grasas con el mismo tipo de jabn
son compatibles entre si, pero dependiendo de la
proporcin de mezcla, puede haber no
compatibilidad. As siendo, no es recomendable la
mezcla de diferentes tipos de grasas, sin antes
consultar el representante tcnico o la WEG.
Algunos espesantes y aceites bsicos, no pueden
ser mezclados entre si.
Se forma entonces una mezcla no homognea.
En este caso, no se puede despreciar una
tendencia al endurecimiento, o al contrario, un
ablandamiento de la grasa (o cada del punto de
gota de la mezcla resultante).
4.2.1.5. INSTRUCCIONES PARA
LUBRICACIN
Todos los motores de alta/baja tensin poseen
graseras para lubricacin de los rodamientos. El
sistema de lubricacin fue proyectado para que
en la relubricacin de los rodamientos, toda la
grasa sea retirada de las pistas de los
rodamientos y expelida a travs de un dreno que
permita la salida e impide la entrada de polvos u
otros contaminantes nocivos al rodamiento. Este
dreno tambin evita el dao de los rodamientos
por el conocido problema de la relubricacin
excesiva. Es aconsejable hacer la relubricacin
durante el funcionamiento del motor, de modo a
permitir la renovacin de la grasa en el
alojamiento de rodamiento. Si esto no fuera
posible debido a la presencia de las piezas
girantes cerca de la engrasadora (poleas, etc.)
que pueden poner en riesgo la integridad fsica
del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera:
- Se inyecta aproximadamente mitad de la
cantidad total estimada de la grasa y se coloca
el motor a girar durante aproximadamente 1
minuto en plena rotacin;
- Se para el motor y se inyecta el restante de la
grasa.
La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor
parado puede llevar a entrar una parte del
lubrificante en el interior del motor, a travs de la
veda interna de la caja del rodamiento.
OBS.: Es importante mantener las graseras
limpias antes de la introduccin de la grasa con el
34
Doc. PBPNU5999001
fin de evitar la entrada de materiales extraos en
los rodamientos.
Para lubricacin, use exclusivamente pistola
engrasadora manual.
Figura 4.2 - Rodamientos y sistemas de
lubricacin.
4.2.1.6. ETAPAS DE RELUBRICACIN DE
LOS RODAMIENTOS
1. Retirar la tapa del dreno.
2. Limpiar con trapo de algodn las proximidades
del agujero de la grasera.
3. Con el motor en funcionamiento, adicionar la
grasa por medio de la pistola engrasadora
manual hasta que la grasa comiese a salir por
el dreno o hasta haber sido introducida la
cantidad de grasa recomendada en la tabla.
4. Dejar el motor funcionando durante el tiempo
suficiente para que se drene todo el exceso de
grasa.
5. Verifique la temperatura del cojinete para
verificar que no ocurri ninguna alteracin
significativa.
4.2.1.7. DISPOSITIVO DE RESORTE PARA
RETIRAR LA GRASA
Cuando la salida de grasa del cojinete no est
accesible al operador, algunos motores son
provistos con un dispositivo con resorte para
retirar la grasa durante la relubricacin de los
cojinetes.
Etapas para relubricacin:
1. Antes de empezar el procedimiento de
lubricacin del cojinete, limpie la grasera con
un trapo de algodn;
2. Retire la varilla con resorte, limpie el resorte y
coloque nuevamente;
3. Con el rotor en funcionamiento, adicione la
cantidad de grasa especificada en la tarjeta de
identificacin de los rodamientos por medio de
equipamiento engrasador manual.
4. El exceso de grasa sale por el drenaje inferior
del cojinete y se almacena en el resorte.
Pag. 148/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
5. Mantener el motor funcionando durante el
tiempo suficiente para que se drene todo el
exceso de grasa.
6. Esta grasa debe ser retirada tirando la varilla
del resorte y limpiando el resorte. Este
procedimiento debe ser hecho tantas veces
cuanto sea necesario hasta que el resorte se
quede sin grasa.
7. Verifique la temperatura del cojinete para
verificar que ocurri ninguna alteracin
significativa.
Entrada de grasa
Resorte para retirar la grasa
Figura 4.3. Ejemplo de un cojinete trasero
vertical con salida de grasa con dispositivo de
resorte.
4.2.1.8. SUSTITUCIN DE RODAMIENTOS
Con la finalidad de evitar daos a los ncleos,
ser necesario despus de retirar la tapa del
soporte calzar el rotor en el entrehierro con
cartulina de espesor correspondiente. El
desmontaje de los rodamientos no es difcil,
desde que sea usado herramientas adecuadas
(extractor de rodamientos con 3 garras conforme
figura 4.4).
Figura 4.4. Extractor de rodamientos.
Las garras del extractor debern ser aplicadas
sobre la fase lateral del anillo a ser desmontada,
o sobre una pieza adyacente.
Es esencial que el montaje de los rodamientos
sea efectuado en condiciones de rigurosa
limpieza y por personas competentes, para
asegurar un buen funcionamiento y evitar daos.
Rodamientos nuevos solamente debern ser
retirados del embalaje en el momento de ser
montados.
35
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Antes de la colocacin d el rodamiento nuevo,
ser necesario corregir cualquier seal de rebaba
o golpes en el asiento del rodamiento del eje.
Los rodamientos no pueden recibir golpes
directos durante el montaje. Se recomienda que
sea calentados (calentador inductivo) visando, a
partir de la dilatacin del anillo interno, facilitar el
montaje. El apoyo para prensar el rodamiento
debe ser aplicado sobre el anillo interno.
4.2.2. DESCANSOS DE RODAMIENTO A
GRASA MOTORES VERTICALES
4.2.2.1. CARACTERSTICAS
Los datos caractersticos de los descansos, tales
como, tipo de rodamiento, intervalo de
lubricacin cantidad y tipo de grasa, estn
descritos en una tarjeta de caractersticas en el
motor.
4.2.2.2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA
LUBRICACIN
1) Antes de iniciar la lubricacin del descanso,
limpie la grasera con un pao limpio.
2) Retire el dispositivo de resorte (17), la limpie y
la recoloque en el local.
3) Con el motor en operacin, agregue la
cantidad de grasa indicada en la tarjeta de
caractersticas del descanso, de preferencia
con engrasadora manual.
4) El exceso de grasa sale por el dreno de salida
de grasa y debe ser retirado a travs del
dispositivo de resorte.
5) Mantenga el motor funcionando por un
perodo suficiente para drenaje de todo el
exceso de grasa.
6) Este exceso de grasa debe ser retirado
retirando el dispositivo de resorte y limpiando
el resorte tantas veces cuanto necesario hasta
que todo el exceso de grasa sea drenado.
7) Verifique la temperatura del descanso
cerciorndose de que no hubo ninguna
variacin significante.
Mantenimiento y cambio del rodamiento
Si es necesaria la limpieza o la retirada del
rodamiento para mantenimiento, siga las
instrucciones a seguir:
Pag. 149/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.2.3. DESMONTAJE / MONTAJE DESCANSO TRASERO

1- Anillo de fijacin interno
2- Anillo de fijacin externo
3- Centrifugador de grasa
4- Anillo separador
5- Tapa de grasa
6- Disco de cerramiento externo
7- Proteccin del resorte
8- Tapa trasera
9- Resorte de pr-carga
10- Anillo interno
11- Tornillo de fijacin
12- Tornillo de fijacin
13- Tornillo de fijacin
14- Rodamiento externo
15- Rodamiento interno
16- Tuerca de fijacin
17- Resorte retirada grasa
18- Alivio de grasa
Detalle de los sensores de temperatura 19- Arandela de presin

Antes de desmontar: Montaje del descanso trasero

- Retire los tubos de prolongamiento de la - Limpie los descansos completamente y
entrada y salida de grasa; inspeccione las piezas desmontadas y el
- Retire la tapa deflectora (si hay) ventilador y interior de los anillos de fijacin.
otros componentes que estn en la parte - - Cercirese que las superficies del
trasera del motor de tal forma que la punta de rodamiento, eje y anillos de fijacin estn
eje trasera se quede libre para la retirada del perfectamente lisas.
rodamiento. - Coloque la grasa recomendada
- Limpie completamente la parte externa del en del depsito de los anillos
descanso. de fijacin interno y externo (foto
- Retire los sensores de temperatura del al lado) y lubrique el rodamiento
descanso y providencie un soporte para el eje con cantidad suficiente de grasa
para evitar daos. antes de montarlo.
- Antes de montar el rodamiento en el eje, lo
Desmontaje del descanso trasero caliente a una temperatura entre 50C y
- Tenga cuidado especial para evitar daos en 100C.
las esferas, rollos y superficies del rodamiento - Para montaje completa del descanso, siga las
y eje. instrucciones para desmontaje en orden
- Para desmontaje del descanso, siga inversa.
cuidadosamente las instrucciones a seguir,
manteniendo todas las piezas en local seguro:
1) Retire la tuerca de fijacin (16);
2) Retire el dispositivo de resorte (17);
3) Retire el disco de cerramiento externo (6);
4) Retire los tornillos (12) que fijan el anillo de
fijacin externo;
5) Retire el anillo de fijacin externo (2);
6) Retire los tornillos (11 y 13);
7) Retire la tapa trasera (8);
8) Retire el rodamiento externo (14), anillo
separador (4) y rodamiento interno (15);
9) Retire el tornillo que fija el centrifugador de
grasa (3) y lo remueva;
10) Retire el anillo de fijacin interno (1), si
necesario.

36
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 150/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.2.4. DESMONTAJE / MONTAJE DESCANSO DELANTERO

1- Anillo de fijacin interno

2- Fieltro blanco
3- Tornillo de fijacin de los anillos
4- Tornillo de fijacin del disco
5- Anillo de fijacin externo
6- Anillo con laberinto
7- Tornillo de fijacin del centrifugador
8- Centrifugador de grasa
9- Cajn para salida de la grasa
10- Rodamiento
11- Grasera
12- Protector trmico
13- Disco de cerramiento externo

Antes de desmontar: Montaje

- Retire los tubos de prolongamiento de la - Limpie los descansos completamente e
entrada y salida de grasa; inspeccione las piezas desmontadas y el
- Limpie completamente la parte exterior del interior de los anillos de fijacin.
descanso; - Cercirese que las superficies del rodamiento,
- Retire la escobilla de aterramiento (si hay); eje y anillos de fijacin estn perfectamente
- Retire los sensores de temperatura del lisas.
descanso y providencie un soporte para el eje - Coloque la grasa recomendado en del
para evitar daos. depsito de los anillos de fijacin interno y
externo (foto al lado) y lubrique el rodamiento
Desmontaje con cantidad suficiente de grasa antes de
Tenga cuidado especial para evitar daos en las montarlo.
esferas, rollos y superficies del rodamiento y eje. - Antes de montar el rodamiento en el eje, lo
Para desmontaje del descanso, siga caliente a una temperatura entre 50C y
cuidadosamente las instrucciones a seguir, 100C.
manteniendo todas las piezas en local seguro: - Para montaje completa del descanso, siga las
instrucciones para desmontaje en orden
1) Retire los tornillos (4) que fijan el disco de inversa.
cerramiento (13).
2) Retire el anillo con laberinto (6);
3) Retire los tornillos (3) que fijan los anillos de
fijacin (1 y 5);
4) Retire el anillo de fijacin externo (5);
5) Retire el tornillo (7) que fija el centrifugador
de grasa (8);
6) Retire el centrifugador de grasa (8);
7) Retire la tapa delantera;
8) Retire el rodamiento (10).
9) Retire el anillo de fijacin interno (1), si
necesario;

37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 151/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.2.3. DESCANSOS DE RODAMIENTO
LUBRICADOS A ACEITE
4 alcanzado cuando el lubricante puede ser visto
1- Entrada de aceite
2- Visor de nivel de aceite
1 inspeccionado diariamente y debe
3- Salida de aceite
2 4- Detector de temperatura
3 La operacin de motores equipados con
4.2.3.1. INSTRUCCIONES PARA
LUBRICACIN
Retirada del aceite
Cuando es necesario efectuar el cambio del aceite
del descanso, remueva la tapa de la salida de
aceite (3) y deje salir el aceite completamente.
Para insercin de aceite en el descanso:
- Cierre la salida de aceite con la tapa (3).
- Remueva la tapa de la entrada de aceite o
filtrador (1) (si hay).
- Coloque el aceite especificado hasta el nivel
indicado en el visor de aceite.
NOTAS:
1) Todos los agujeros roscados no usados deben
estar cerrados por enchufes y ninguna
conexin debe presentar vaciamiento.
2) El nivel de aceite es alcanzado cuando el
lubricante puede ser visto aproximadamente
en el medio del visor de nivel.
3) El uso de mayor cantidad de aceite no
perjudica el descanso, pero puede ocasionar
vaciamientos a travs de las vedas de eje.
Tipo de aceite
El tipo y cantidad de aceite a ser utilizado estn
especificados en la tarjeta de caractersticas fijada
en el motor cerca del descanso
IMPORTANTE:
La vida til de los descansos depende de sus
condiciones de operacin, de las condiciones de
operacin del motor y de los procedimientos
seguidos por el personal de mantenimiento.
Las siguientes recomendaciones deben ser
observadas:
- El aceite seleccionado para la aplicacin debe
tener la viscosidad adecuada para la
temperatura de operacin del descanso. El tipo
de aceite recomendado por WEG ya considera
estos criterios.
38
Doc. PBPNU5999001
- Cantidad insuficiente de aceite puede
damnificar el descanso.
- El nivel de aceite mnimo recomendado es
en la parte inferior del visor de nivel de aceite,
con el motor parado.
El nivel de aceite debe ser
permanecer en medio al visor de
nivel de aceite.
4.2.3.2. OPERACIN DE LOS DESCANSOS
descansos de rodamiento lubricado a aceite es
similar a de motores equipados con descansos de
rodamiento a grasa.
La arranque del sistema debe ser acompaada
cuidadosamente, as como las primeras horas de
operacin.
Antes de la arranque verifique:
- Si el aceite utilizado est de acuerdo con el
especificado en la tarjeta de caractersticas.
- Las caractersticas del lubricante
- El nivel de aceite.
- Las temperaturas de alarma y parada
ajustadas para el descanso.
Durante el primero arranque se debe quedar
atento para vibraciones o ruidos. Caso el
descanso no trabaje de manera silenciosa y
uniforme el motor debe ser desconectado
inmediatamente.
El motor debe operar durante varias horas hasta
que la temperatura de los descansos se estabilice
adentro de los lmites citados anteriormente. Caso
ocurra una sobre elevacin de temperatura el
motor deber ser desconectado y los descansos y
sensores de temperatura chequeados.
Despus de alcanzada la temperatura de trabajo
de los descansos cheque si no hay vaciamiento de
aceite por los enchufes, juntas o por la punta de
eje.
4.2.3.3. AJUSTE DE LAS PROTECCIONES
Cada descanso est equipado con un detector de
temperatura (4) tipo PT100. Este dispositivo
deber ser conectado a un tablero de control con
la funcin de indicar sobre calentamientos y de
proteger el descanso de daos debido a operacin
con temperatura elevada.
IMPORTANTE: Las siguientes temperaturas deben
ser ajustadas en el sistema de proteccin del
descanso:
ALARMA 100C
PARADA 120C
Pag. 152/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.3.4. MANTENIMIENTO DEL DESCANSO

1- Depsito de aceite externo

2- Depsito de aceite interno
3- Anillo de fijacin externo
4- Centrifugador de aceite
5- Tornillo
6- Anillo de fijacin interno
7- Rodamiento
8- Anillo con laberinto
9- Tornillo
10- Filtrador
11- Visor de nivel de aceite
12- Dreno (salida de aceite)
13- Tapa (entrada de aceite)
14- Tornillo
15- Protector trmico (RTD)
16- Tornillo
17- Tapa

Para desmontar el descanso, siga las 9) Retire el rodamiento (7).

instrucciones abajo:
Antes de desmontar
- Limpie externamente todo el descanso.
- Remueva el dreno (12);
- Remueva completamente el aceite del
descanso;
- Remueva el sensor de temperatura (15) del
descanso;
- Remueva la escobilla de aterramiento (si hay);
- Providencie un soporte para el eje para
sostener el rotor durante la desmontaje.
Desmontaje del descanso:
- Tenga cuidado para evitar daos en las
esferas, rollos o en la superficie del eje.
- Para desmontar el descanso, siga con cuidado
las informaciones abajo:
- Mantenga las piezas desmontadas en local
seguro y limpio.
1) Retire el tornillo (9) que fija el anillo con
laberinto (8);
2) Retire el anillo con laberinto (8);
3) Retire los tornillos (16) que fijan el depsito
de aceite externo (1);
4) Retire el depsito externo de aceite (1);
5) Retire los tornillos (14) que fijan el anillo de
fijacin externo (3);
6) Retire el anillo de fijacin externo (3).
7) Retire los tornillos (5) que fijan el
centrifugador de aceite (4) y lo remueva.
8) Retire la tapa delantera (17);
10) Si es necesaria a desmontaje completa del
descanso, retire el anillo de fijacin interno
(6) y el depsito interno de aceite (2).
Montaje del descanso
Limpie completamente el rodamiento, el depsito
de aceite y inspeccione todas las piezas para
montaje del descanso.
- Cercirese que las superficies de contacto del
rodamiento, anillos estn lisas, sin seales de
riesgos o corrosin.
- Antes de la insercin del rodamiento en el eje,
calentar el mismo a una temperatura entre 50
y 100C.
- Para montaje completa del descanso, siga las
instrucciones de desmontaje en orden inversa.
Atencin
En el montaje del descanso, aadir Curril T para
vedar las superficies del depsito de aceite.
NOTA: Los motores pueden ser suministrados
con filtrador (10) en el local indicado en el dibujo
arriba o en la entrada de aceite.

39
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 153/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.2.4. DESCANSOS DE DESLIZAMIENTO

Figura 4.5.

1) Tapn de dreno; 12) Casquillo inferior;

2) Carcasa del soporte; 13) Casquillo superior;
3) Carcasa del motor; 14) Anillo pescador;
4) Tornillos; 15) Entrada del aceite;
5) Tapa de la carcasa del soporte; 16) Conexin para sensor de temperatura;
6) Tornillos de la tapa del soporte bipartido; 17) Nivel de aceite o salida de aceite para
7) Sello de la maquina; lubricacin;
8) Tornillos del sello maquina; 18) Tapn para tubos;
9) Ojal para suspender; 19) Tornillos de proteccin externa;
10) Tornillos de la tapa externa; 20) Alojamiento del laberinto;
11) Tapa externa 21) Mitad inferior del alojamiento del laberinto.
22) Tubo de respiro

40
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 154/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.2.4.1. INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES
El mantenimiento de descansos de deslizamiento
incluye la verificacin peridica del nivel y de las
condiciones del lubrificante, verificar los niveles de
ruido y de vibraciones del soporte, acompaar el
nivel de temperatura de trabajo y ajuste de los
tornillos de montaje. La carcasa debe ser
mantenida limpia, sin acumulo de aceite o polvo
en la parte externa para facilitar el intercambio de
calor con el medio ambiente.
Agujeros con rosca para conexin de termmetro,
visor de nivel, entrada y salida de aceite, bomba
de circulacin de aceite o termmetro para lectura
en el depsito son entregados en ambos lados, de
manera que las conexiones puedan ser hechas
por el lado derecho o izquierdo de la carcasa del
soporte.
El dreno del aceite esta localizado en la parte
inferior del soporte.
En caso de descansos con lubricacin por
circulacin de aceite la tubera de salida debe ser
conectada en la posicin del visor de nivel.
Si el soporte es elctricamente aislado las
superficies esfricas del asiento del casquillo en la
carcasa son encapadas con un material aislante.
Nunca retire esta capa.
La traba anti-giro tambin es aislada, y los sellos
de veda son hechos de material no conductor.
Instrumentos de control de temperatura que
estn en contacto con el casquillo tambin deben
ser debidamente aislados.
Descansos refrigerados con agua son
suministrados con serpentina de refrigeracin
instalada y deben ser manejados con cuidado
especialmente para no daar las conexiones
durante el transporte y la propia instalacin.
4.2.4.2. DESMONTAJE DEL DESCANSO (TIPO
EF)
Para desmontar el descanso y tener acceso a los
casquillos, bien como a otros componentes siga
cuidadosamente las instrucciones indicadas a
seguir. Guardar todas las piezas desmontadas en
un local seguro (ver figura 4.5).
Lado accionado:
- Limpie completamente el exterior de la
carcasa. Desatornille y retire el enchufe del
dreno del aceite (1) localizado en la parte
inferior de la carcasa permitiendo que todo el
aceite chorree.
- Remover los tornillos (4) que fijan la parte
superior de la carcasa (5) en el motor (3).
- Retire los tornillos (6) que unen las caras
bipartidas de la carcasa (2 y 5).
41
Doc. PBPNU5999001
- Use los tornillos con ojales (9) para levantar la
parte superior de la carcasa (5)
desencajndola completamente de la inferior
de la veda externa (11), los laberintos de
veda, de los alojamientos de los laberintos
(20) y de casquillo (12).
- Siga desmontando la parte superior de la
carcasa sobre una banca. Destornille los
tornillos (19) y retire la parte superior de la
proteccin externa. Remover los tornillos (10)
y desencaje la parte superior del alojamiento
del laberinto (20).
- Desencaje y retire la parte superior del
casquillo (13).
- Remover los tornillos que unen las dos partes
de la anillo pescador (14) y separarlos
cuidadosamente y sacarles.
- Retire los resortes circulares de la anillo
laberinto y remover la parte superior de cada
anillo. Gire las partes inferiores de las anillos
para fuera de sus alojamientos y retiradas.
- Desconecte y retire el sensor de temperatura
que est en la parte inferior del casquillo.
- Usando un levantador o una gata, levantar el
eje apenas unos milmetros para que la parte
inferior del casquillo pueda girar para fuera de
su asiento.
IMPORTANTE: Para esto es necesario que los
tornillos 4 y 6 de la otra parte del soporte estn
sueltos.
- Gire cuidadosamente la parte inferior del
casquillo sobre el eje y retirarla.
- Desatornille los tornillos (19) y retire la parte
inferior de la proteccin externa (11).
- Desatornille los tornillos (10) y remover la
parte inferior del alojamiento del anillo
laberinto (21).
- Retire los tornillos (4) y remover la parte
inferior de la carcasa (2).
- Desatornille los tornillos (8) y remover el sello
mquina (7).
- Limpie y inspeccione completamente las piezas
removidas y el interior de la carcasa.
- Para montar el soporte siga las instrucciones
dadas para desmontar en orden inversa.
NOTA: Par de apriete de los tornillos de fijacin
del soporte al motor = 10 Kgfm.
Lado no accionado:
- Limpie completamente el exterior de la
carcasa. Suelte y retire el enchufe (1) del
dreno del aceite localizado en la parte inferior
de la carcasa, permitiendo as para que todo el
aceite lubrificante chorree.
- Suelte los tornillos (19) y retire la tapa de
soporte (11).
Pag. 155/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
- Destornille los tornillos (4) que fijan la parte
superior de la carcasa (5) al motor (3). Retire
los tornillos (6) que unen las fases bipartidas
de la carcasa del soporte (2 y 5).
- Use los tornillos de ojales (9) para levantar la
parte superior de la carcasa (5)
desencajndola completamente de la parte
inferior de la carcasa (2), del laberinto de veda
y del casquillo (12).
- Desencaje y retire la parte superior del
casquillo (13).
- Remover los tornillos que unen las dos partes
del anillo pescadora (14) y separarlos
cuidadosamente y retirarlas.
- Retire el resorte circular del anillo laberinto y
remover la parte superior del anillo. Gire la
parte inferior del anillo laberinto para fuera de
su alojamiento y retirarla.
- Desconecte y remueva el sensor de
temperatura que esta en la parte inferior del
casquillo.
- Usando un levantador o una gata levante el
eje apenas unos milmetros para que la parte
inferior del casquillo pueda girar para fuera de
su asiento.
- Gire cuidadosamente la parte inferior del
casquillo (12) sobre el eje y removerlo.
- Retire los tornillos (4) y remueva la parte
inferior de la carcasa (2).
- Desatornille los tornillos (8) y remueva el sello
mquina (7).
- Limpie e inspeccione completamente las piezas
removidas y el interior de la carcasa.
- Para montar el soporte siga las instrucciones
dadas para desmontar de forma inversa.
NOTA: Par de apriete de los tornillos de fijacin
del soporte al motor = 10 Kgfm.
4.2.4.3. MONTAJE DEL DESCANSO
Verificar las superficies del encaje de la brida
certificndose para que estn limpias, planas y sin
rebabas.
Verifique si las medidas del eje estn dentro de
las tolerancias especificadas por la Renk y si la
rugosidad esta dentro de lo exigido (< 0,4).
Remueva la parte superior de la carcasa (2) y los
casquillos (12 y 13), verifique si no hubo ningn
dao durante el transporte y limpie
completamente las superficies de contacto.
Levante el eje algunos milmetros y encaje la
brida de la parte inferior del bancal en el rebajo
torneado en la tapa de la mquina atornillndola
en esta posicin. Aplique aceite en el asiento
esfrico de la carcasa y el eje, coloque el casquillo
inferior (12) sobre el eje y gire para su posicin
42
Doc. PBPNU5999001
cuidando para que las superficies axiales de
posicionamiento no sean daadas.
Despus alinear cuidadosamente las caras de la
parte inferior del casquillo y de la carcasa baje
con mucho cuidado el eje hasta la posicin de
trabajo. Con un martillo golpee suavemente en la
carcasa para que el casquillo se posicione
correctamente en relacin a su asiento y su eje.
Este procedimiento genera una vibracin de alta
frecuencia que disminuye el rozamiento esttico
entre el casquillo y la carcasa y facilita el correcto
alineamiento. La capacidad de auto-alineamiento
del soporte tiene la funcin de compensar solo la
deflexin normal del eje durante el montaje. En
seguida debe montarse el anillo pescador, lo que
tendr que ser hecho con mucho cuidado, pues el
funcionamiento perfecto del soporte depende de
la lubricacin provista por el anillo. Los tornillos
deben ser apretados levemente y cualquier
rebaba cuidadosamente retirada para
proporcionar un funcionamiento suave y uniforme
del anillo. En un eventual mantenimiento se debe
cuidar para que la geometra del anillo no sea
alterada.
Las partes inferior y superior del casquillo poseen
nmeros de identificacin o marcaciones para
orientar su posicionamiento. Posicione la parte
superior del casquillo alineado con las marcas con
las correspondientes de la parte inferior. Montajes
incorrectos pueden causar serios daos a los
casquillos.
Verifique si el anillo pescador gira libremente
sobre el eje. Con la parte inferior del casquillo
posicionada instale el sello de veda del lado de la
brida del soporte. (Ver pargrafo "Vedas").
Despus revestir las fases bipartidas de la carcasa
con un componente de vedas que no endurezca
rpidamente, monte la parte superior de la
carcasa (5) cuidando para que los sellos de veda
ajusten perfectamente en sus encajes.
Certifquese tambin que el buje anti-giro est
encajado sin ningn contacto con el agujero
correspondiente en el casquillo.
NOTA: Carcasa o casquillo son
intercambiables siempre que
considerados completos (mitades
individuales no son intercambiables).
4.2.4.4. AJUSTE DE LAS PROTECCIONES
(PT100)
Cada soporte est equipado con un detector de
temperatura tipo PT100 instalado directamente en
el casquillo, prximo a la zona de la carga. Este
dispositivo deber ser conectado a un panel de
comando con la funcin de indicar
sobrecalentamientos y de proteger el soporte de
daos debido al trabajo con temperatura elevada.
Pag. 156/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
IMPORTANTE: Las temperaturas
deben ser ajustadas en el sistema
de proteccin del soporte:
ALARMA 100C.
PARADA 120C.
4.2.4.5. REFRIGERACIN CON
CIRCULACIN DE AGUA
En estos casos el depsito de aceite, en el
soporte, posee una serpentina por donde circula
el agua. El agua que circula debe presentar, en la
entrada del soporte, una temperatura menor o
igual a la del ambiente, con la finalidad de que
ocurra la refrigeracin.
La presin del agua debe ser de 0,1 Bar y el
caudal igual a 0,7 l/s. El P.h. debe ser neutro.
NOTA: Bajo ninguna hiptesis
puede haber infiltracin de agua
para el interior del depsito de
aceite, lo que resultara en
contaminacin del aceite.
4.2.4.6. LUBRICACIN
El cambio de aceite de los descansos debe ser
efectuada a cada 8000 horas de trabajo, o
siempre que el aceite demuestre sus
caractersticas alteradas. La viscosidad y el Ph del
aceite deben ser verificados peridicamente.
El nivel del aceite debe ser
acompaado diariamente,
debiendo ser mantenido
aproximadamente en el medio
del visor de nivel.
El cojinete debe ser lubricado con el aceite
especificado a travs del orificio del visor superior.
Todos los agujeros roscados no utilizados deben
estar cerrados con tapones y ninguna conexin
debe presentar derrames.
El nivel de aceite es correcto cuando el lubricante
puede ser visto aproximadamente a la mitad del
visor de nivel. El uso de mayor cantidad de aceite
no daa el descanso, pero puede ocasionar
derrames a travs de los retenes del eje.
IMPORTANTE:
Los cuidados tomados con la
lubricacin determinarn la vida til
de los descansos y la seguridad en
el funcionamiento del motor. Por
esto, es de extrema importancia
observar las siguientes
recomendaciones:
43
Doc. PBPNU5999001
- El aceite seleccionado debe ser aquel que
tenga la viscosidad adecuada para la
temperatura de trabajo de los descansos. Eso
debe ser observado en un cambio eventual de
aceite o en manutenciones peridicas.
- Cantidad insuficiente de aceite, debido a la
colocacin incompleta o falta de
acompaamiento del nivel puede daar los
casquillos. El nivel mnimo es alcanzado
cuando el lubrificante puede ser visto tocando
en la parte inferior del visor de nivel con el
motor fuera de funcionamiento.
4.2.4.7. VEDAS
Las dos mitades de el anillo laberinto de veda son
unidas por un resorte circular. Ellas deben ser
inseridas en el alojamiento del anillo de modo que
el buje de trabamiento este encajado en su rebajo
de la parte superior de la carcasa. La instalacin
incorrecta destruye la veda.
Antes de montar las vedas limpie cuidadosamente
las fases del contacto del anillo y de su
alojamiento, y recubrirlas con un componente de
veda que no endurezca. Los agujeros de drenaje
existen en la parte inferior del anillo deben ser
limpios y desobstruidos. Al instalar la otra mitad
del anillo de veda, apriete levemente contra la
parte inferior del eje.
Una veda adicional est instalada internamente al
motor para prevenir la succin de aceite debido a
la baja presin que genera el sistema de
ventilacin de la mquina.
4.2.4.8. FUNCIONAMIENTO
El funcionamiento de motores equipados con
descansos de deslizamiento es similar al de
motores equipados con descansos de rodamiento.
El arranque del sistema debe ser acompaado
cuidadosamente, as como las primeras horas de
funcionamiento.
Antes arrancar verifique:
- Si el aceite especificado esta conforme la
especificacin.
- Las caractersticas del aceite.
- El nivel del aceite.
- Las temperaturas de alarma y desconexin
ajustadas para el soporte (respectivamente
100 y 120C para alarma y desconexin).
Durante el primer arranque se debe estar atento
para las vibraciones o ruidos. Caso el soporte no
trabaje de manera silenciosa y uniforme el motor
debe ser desconectado inmediatamente.
El motor debe funcionar durante varias horas
hasta que la temperatura de los descansos se
estabilice dentro de los lmites citados
Pag. 157/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
anteriormente. Caso ocurra una elevacin
anormal de la temperatura el motor deber ser
desconectado y los descansos as como los
sensores debern ser revisados.
Despus de ser alcanzada la temperatura de
trabajo de los descansos revise si no existe
algunas infiltraciones de aceite por las conectores,
juntas o por el punta eje.
4.3. CONTROL DEL ENTREHIERRO
(motores abiertos de grande potencia)
Despus de desconectar y montar el motor, ser
necesario analizar la medida del entrehierro para
controlar la concentricidad del mismo. La
variacin del entrehierro en dos puntos
diametralmente opuestos, tendr que ser inferior
a 10% de la medida del entrehierro medio.
4.4. ANILLOS COLECTORES (para
motores con rotor bobinado)
Estos debern ser mantenidos limpios y lisos. La
limpieza deber ser hecha a cada mes, ocasin en
que deber ser retirado el polvo depositado entre
las anillos (ver tem 4.10).
En caso de desmontaje de los anillos colectores,
el montaje debe garantizar su centralizacin
evitando ovalizacin o golpes radiales. Tambin
deber ser garantizado el correcto
posicionamiento de las escobillas sobre los anillos
(100% de contacto). Si estos cuidados no son
tomados, ocurrirn problemas de desgaste de los
anillos colectores y escobillas.
4.5. PORTAESCOBILLAS Y ESCOBILLAS
(para motores con rotor bobinado)
Los portaescobillas deben quedar en sentido
radial con referencia al anillo colector, y
separados 4mm como mximo, de la superficie de
contacto, con la finalidad de evitar ruptura o
daos de las escobillas (figura 4.6).
CORRECTO INCORRECTO
Figura 4.6 Montaje del portaescobillas.
OBS.: Semanalmente, las escobillas debern ser
verificadas para garantizar el libre deslizamiento
en el alojamiento del portaescobillas.
44
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Escobillas
Los motores elctricos dotados de anillos
colectoras, son entregados con un determinado
tipo de escobillas, que son especificadas para la
potencia nominal del motor.
NOTA: En caso que el motor este
operando abajo de su potencia
nominal (carga baja) o carga
intermitente, el conjunto de
escobillas (tipo de escobilla y cantidad), debern
ser adecuados a las condiciones reales de trabajo,
bajo pena del motor sufrir daos graves. Esta
adecuacin deber ser hecha bajo consulta y
consentimiento de la Weg Mquinas.
Nunca deben mezclarse sobre el mismo anillo,
escobillas de tipos diferentes. Cualquier
alteracin en el tipo de escobilla solamente ser
hecha, con la autorizacin de la Weg Mquinas,
porque las diferentes especies de escobillas
provocan modificaciones en el comportamiento
de la mquina en servicio.
Las escobillas debern ser observadas
semanalmente durante el funcionamiento. Las
que revelan desgaste, ultrapasando la marca
indicada en figura 4.7, debern ser substituidas
en tiempo hbil.
Por ocasin del cambio y siempre que sea posible
deber ser substituido para cada anillo,
primeramente una escobilla, cambindose el
segundo despus de haber pasado algn tiempo,
a fin de dar tiempo necesario para su
asentamiento. Al ser substituidas, las escobillas
debern ser lijadas a fin de que se moldeen
perfectamente a la curvatura de la superficie del
anillo (mnimo 75%).
Figura 4.7 - Marca de desgaste de la escobilla.
En mquinas que se trabajan siempre con el
mismo sentido de rotacin, el asentamiento de
las escobillas deber ser hecho solamente en el
mismo sentido y no en movimientos alternados,
debiendo ser levantada la escobilla durante el
movimiento de retorno del eje (figura 4.8).
Pag. 158/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Para evitar daos en los ejes de los motores WEG

durante el transporte, los mismos son protegidos
con aceite secante. Para un funcionamiento
adecuado de la escobilla de aterramiento, se debe
remover este aceite de la superficie del eje antes
de la puesta en marcha de la mquina, as como
cualquier residuo que estuviere entre el eje y la
escobilla.
Figura 4.8 - Asentamiento de las escobillas. La escobilla deber ser constantemente
observada durante su funcionamiento y al final de
Las escobillas debern asentar con una presin su vida til debe ser substituida por otra de la
uniforme sobre la superficie de contacto, para que misma calidad (granulacin).
quede asegurada una distribuicin uniforme de la
corriente y un bajo desgaste de las escobillas.
Es importante que en todas las escobillas
montadas, la presin sea igual, con una tolerancia
de ms o menos 10%. Desvios mayores llevan a
una distribuicin desigual de la corriente y con
eso hay desgastes desiguales de las escobillas.
El control de la presin de las escobillas es hecho
con un dinammetro.
Resortes cansados deben ser substituidos.

4.5.1. DISPOSITIVO DE ATERRAMIENTO

DEL EJE

En algunos motores de induccin, principalmente

en los que haya necesidad de control de la
velocidad mediante convertidor de frecuencia, es
utilizado un conjunto de portaescobillas y escobilla
para puesta a tierra en el eje.
Este dispositivo evita la circulacin de corriente
elctrica por los cojinetes, que es altamente
perjudicial para el funcionamiento. La escobilla es
colocada en contacto con el eje y ligada a travs
de un cable a la carcasa de la mquina, que debe
estar puesta a tierra. Se debe verificar la fijacin
del portaescobillas y su conexin con la carcasa.

Fig. 4.9 - Escobilla para puesta a tierra del eje.

45
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 159/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.6. PORTAESCOBILLAS LEVANTABLE

4.6.1. ESQUEMA DE CONEXIN

OPERACIN MOTORIZADA: Descripcin de los componentes:

Condicin para operacin con escobillas
asentadas y anillos colectores no A - Actuador eletromecnico ATIS.
cortocircuitados. Tipo: MAI-25. B3. d9-25.10-F10-2CC-2CT-IP65.
Para garantizar que las escobillas estn bajadas, B - Motor trifsico N 71.
las llaves: 06 Plos - 0,25kW - F.C. B3E - IPW55.
- CCA1 - contactos 34 y 35, Brida C105 - DIN 42948.
- CCA2 - contactos 22 y 23, Tensin y frecuencia conforme solicitacin del
- CCD - contactos 13 y 14, deben estar cliente.
simultneamente cerrados (lgica "AND"). C - Llave fin de curso con doble aislamiento.
Con esta lgica el motor est apto para arrancar. Tipo XCK-P121 - Telemecanique.

Figura 4.10.

46
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 160/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

Condicin para operacin con escobillas - CCL2 - contactos 25 y 26,

levantadas y anillos colectores no - CCE - contactos 16 y 17, deben estar
cortocircuitados. simultneamente cerrados (lgica "AND").
Para garantizar que las escobillas estn Con esta lgica el motor est en rgimen.
levantadas, las llaves:
- CCL1 - contactos 37 y 38,

Figura 4.11.

47
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 161/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

OPERACIN MANUAL: 4.6.2. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA ARRANQUE

DEL MOTOR

Antes de efectuar el arranque del motor, deber

ser hecho una inspeccin en el dispositivo de
cortocircuito (1) y levantamiento verificando a
travs de la tapa de inspeccin la posicin de la
escobilla o a travs de una sealizacin
proveniente de la llave CCD, que indica la posicin
de la escobilla, totalmente asentada.
Caso esta sealizacin no estuviere indicando la
posicin de escobillas totalmente asentadas, no se
Figura 4.12. debe arrancar el motor, sin antes llevar el
comando para la posicin de escobillas totalmente
SIMBOLOGA: asentadas.
CLD = Llave de par para desconexin en sobre Esto podr ser hecho manualmente, a travs del
carga durante el asentamiento de las escobillas (o volante (7), accionndose la palanca (8) o
inversin de fases). automticamente accionndose el actuador
eletromecnico (9). Caso sea utilizado el sistema
manual (7), la palanca (8) retorna
automticamente a la posicin anterior
Si hubiere falla en CCD. accionndose el actuador eletromecnico (9). En
esta condicin (escobillas totalmente asentadas),
los anillos (5) no se encuentran cortocircuitados,
Figura 4.13. permitiendo de esta forma la conexin de las
resistencias externas (restato) en serie con el
CLE = Llave de par para desconexin en sobre bobinado rotrico, a travs de las escobillas (6).
carga durante el levantamiento de las escobillas
(o inversin de fases). NOTA: Realizar los testes de comando con todo
el sistema de portaescobillas levantables antes del
arranque bajo carga del motor.
Si hubiere falla en CCE.

4.6.3. PROCEDIMIENTO DESPUS DEL

Figura 4.14. ARRANQUE DEL MOTOR
CCD = Llave fin de curso para indicar cuando las
escobillas estuvieren totalmente asentadas. Cuando el motor tuviere atingido la rotacin
nominal, debe ser iniciado el procedimiento de
CCE = Llave fin de curso para indicar cuando las cortocircuito de los anillos colectores,
escobillas estuvieren totalmente levantadas. accionndose el dispositivo de cortocircuito (1) y
levantamiento em sentido opuesto, a travs del
CLR = Llave selectora indicando posicin manual actuador eletromecnico (9), o manualmente a
o motorizado. travs del volante (7).
El cortocircuito se realiza a travs del casquillo de
18 19 20 18 19 20
deslizamiento (2) que soporta los contactos de
plata (3).
Enseguida, es accionado el mecanismo de
levantamiento de las escobillas (4).
CLR CLR
Cuando las escobillas estuvieren totalmente
levantadas, el dispositivo es desconectado
Figuras 4.15. automticamente, a travs de la llave CCE.

LLAVES FIN DE CURSO ADICIONALES PARA
SEALIZACIN
CCL1 y CCL2 = Llave fin de curso para indicar
cuando las escobillas estuvieren totalmente
levantadas.
CCA1 y CCA2 = Llave fin de curso para indicar
cuando las escobillas estuvieren totalmente
asentadas.
OBS.:
1) El sistema automtico de levantamiento de las
escobillas, posee un sistema de proteccin de
sobrecarga del actuador eletromecnico de
accionamiento (9), a travs de las llaves de
par para desconexin bajo sobrecarga, durante
el asentamiento (CLD) o levantamiento de las
escobillas (CLE).

48
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 162/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

2) Antes de la puesta en marcha del motor, 5) El sistema de comando y sealizacin del

asegrese de que las llaves CLD, CLE, CCD y sistema de levantamiento de escobillas no es
CCE estn correctamente conectadas en el suministrado por WEG.
panel.
6) Despus del arranque del motor, las escobillas
3) Cuando una de las llaves CLE o CLD actuaren, no podrn quedar en contacto con los anillos
debe ser evitado el uso del sistema colectores, porque pueden causar desgaste
nuevamente, antes que sea verificado el excesivo en las escobillas y anillos colectores,
motivo por cual ellas actuaron. como tambin causar daos al sistema de
levantamiento de las escobillas.
4) El usuario deber instalar sealizacin
indicando el funcionamiento de la lgica del
sistema en el panel de comando del sistema
motorizado de levantamiento de las escobillas.

Figura 4.16.

Figura 4.17.

49
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 163/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.6.4. MONTAJE retencin. Fijar el pasador retentor del

4.6.4.1. CONJUNTO DE LEVANTAMIENTO
DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS
1. Fijar el disco soporte de las clavijas con fijador
del conjunto de levantamiento en la caja de
proteccin del conjunto portaescobillas.
2. Montar el rodamiento en el pasador retentor y
fijar con clavija que debe ser fija con anillo de
rodamiento en el disco soporte.
3. Fijar las clavijas de levantamiento del
portaescobillas en el disco soporte de las
clavijas.
OBS.: Rodamiento del pasador retentor: 6305
2ZRS1.

PASSADOR RETENTOR
CLAVIJA DEL RODILLO

RODAMIENTO

LA ZONA REBAJADA
DEBE ESTAR EN ESTA
POSICION PARA QUE EL
PASADOR RETENTOR NO
CHOQUE COM EL DISCO
DE LEVANTAMIENTO

DETALLE X

DISCO
SUPORTE DE
FIJADOR DEL CONJUNTO CLAVIJA DE
LAS CLAVIJAS
DE LEVANTAMIENTO LEVANTAMIENTO

Figura 4.18.

50
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 164/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.6.4.2. CONJUNTO DE MOVIMIENTO DEL 3. Montar el pasador del soporte de encaje en

BUJE DE CORTOCIRCUITO este.

1. Montar el rodillo en el casquillo del rodillo en el
brazo de movimiento del casquillo de corto y
enseguida, los rodamientos, el casquillo
distanciador y fijar la tapa del rodamiento.
2. Fijar los pasadores superiores en un de los
brazos de movimiento.
4. Fijar el soporte de encaje en la base del
soporte y los brazos de movimiento en el
soporte. Los rodillos debern estar alineados
con el casquillo de cortocircuito de manera que
estos toquen simultaneamente en el casquillo.
NOTA.: Rodamiento del brazos de movimiento:
6003Z.

PASSADOR DEL SOPORTE PASSADOR SUPERIOR DEL BRAZO

DE ENCAJE

BASE DEL SOPORTE DE ENCAJE

SOPORTE DE ENCAJE

RODAMIENTOS

BRAZO DE
MOVIMIENTO
TAPA DEL
CASQUILLO

DETALLE X
CASQUILLO
RODILLO DEL CASQUILLO DISTANCIADOR
DETALLE X

Figura 4.19.

51
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 165/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.6.4.3. CONJUNTO DE ACCIONAMIENTO 5. Montar el casquillo en el eje de accionamiento

DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS del brazo y fijar con el anillo de retencin. Fijar
el eje en el disco de accionamiento.
1. Montar el rodamiento en el eje y fijar con 6. Fijar en la tapa el dispositivo de trabamiento
anillo de retencin, enseguida colocar el anillo en el actuador electromecnico y enseguida
de retencin para apoyo del segundo fijarla a la carcasa del dispositivo.
rodamiento y despus montarlo con anillo de
retencin. 7. Fijar en la tapa el dispositivo de trabamiento
en el actuador electromecnico y enseguida
2. Montar y fijar el disco en el eje del fijarla a la carcasa del dispositivo.
accionamiento.
OBS:
3. Introducir el eje de accionamiento en la platina 1) El eje de accionamiento debe pasar entre los
del conjunto. pinos superiores del brazo de levantamiento.

4. Fijar el disco de levantamiento en el eje de 2) Todas las partes con contactos mecnicos
accionamiento. debern ser lubricados. Despus de 6 meses
de uso, verificar la lubricacin de estas partes.

ACTUADOR ELECTROMECANICO

TAPA DEL DISPOSITIVO EJE DE ACCIONAMIENTO

TORNILLO DE AJUSTE
DISCO BATIENTE

CARCASA DEL DISPOSITIVO

DE TRABAMIENTO

PLATINA DEL CONJUNTO DE

RODAMIENTO ACCIONAMIENTO

EJE DE ACCIONAMIENTO DISCO DE LEVANTAMIENTO

CASQUILLO

Figura 4.20.

52
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 166/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.6.4.4. CONJUNTO DEL PASADOR DE

REPOSICIN

1. Montar el eje del resorte en el soporte del eje.

Montar la arandela gua del eje, colocarla en el
eje y trabarla con la tuerca.
2. Cerrar el conjunto con el anillo de fijacin
fijarlo en la caja de proteccin del
portaescobillas.

ARANDELA GUIA SOPORTE DEL EJE RESORTE

EJE DEL RESORTE

ANILLO DE FIJACIN EXTERNO

Figura 4.21.

4.6.4.5. CONJUNTO DEL PORTAESCOBILLAS

1. Fijar las escobillas en el portaescobillas. Fijar

los pasadores aislados en el soporte. Montar
los discos aislantes, portaescobillas y anillos de
contacto sobre los pasadores.
Figura 4.23 Posicion no cortocirtuitado.
2. Alinear el radio de curvatura existente en las
escobillas con los anillos colectores y colocar
una lija entre la escobilla y el anillo. La lija
debe ser movida de un lado para otro para
promover en mejor asentamiento del radio de
la escobilla con el radio del anillo. Desprender
el tornillo de fijacin del portaescobilla y girar
el portaescobillas en sentido horario hasta que
el radio de la escobilla se ajuste perfectamente Figura 4.24 Posicion cortocirtuitado.
al anillo.

Figura 4.22 Escobillas levantadas. Figura 4.25 Escobillas asentadas.

53
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 167/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.6.5. DESMONTAJE
Para el desmontaje del portaescobillas levantable,
proceder de la manera inversa al proceso de
montaje.
4.6.6. AJUSTE DEL SISTEMA E
LEVANTAMIENTO DE LAS ESCOBILLAS
1. Girar el disco de levantamiento hasta la
posicin de cortocircuito y enseguida girar um
poco ms hasta liberar los rodillos, para evitar
esfuerzos desnecesarios sobre los rodamientos
del rodillo.
2. Roscar el tornillo de ajuste hasta el disco
batiente y despus trabar el tornillo de ajuste.
3. Girar el disco de levantamiento hasta la
posicin de no cortocircuito (escobillas
asentadas) y repetir la misma operacin
realizada para la posicin de cortocircuito.
4.7. SECADO DE LAS BOBINAS
Esta operacin debe ser hecha con el mximo
cuidado y, solamente por personas calificadas.
La faja de incremento de la temperatura no debe
exceder a 5C por hora, y la temperatura final no
debe pasar de 150C. Tanto una temperatura
final cuanto una faja de incremento de la
temperatura muy elevada puede generar vapor,
perjudicando el aislamiento.
Durante el proceso de secado, la temperatura
debe ser cuidadosamente controlada y la
resistencia del aislamiento medido a intervalos
regulares.
En el inicio del proceso, la resistencia ira disminuir
en consecuencia del aumento de temperatura,
para crecer a medida que el aislamiento este
secando.
El proceso del secado debe continuar hasta que
sucesivas mediciones de resistencia
aislamiento indiquen que sta llego al valor
mnimo indicado, conforme indicado en iten 2.3.3.
Es muy importante imponer una buena ventilacin
en el interior del motor durante la operacin del
secado para asegurar que la humedad sea
efectivamente retirada.
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4.8. MONTAJE Y DESMONTAJE DEL
MOTOR
4.8.1. LNEA Master
A) ROTOR DE JAULA:
Lado accionado:
1. Retire el intercambiador de calor (si existir).
2. Retire los detectores de temperatura del
soporte (si existir).
3. Suelte los tornillos que fijan el conjunto de
soporte.
4. Retire las anillos externos de fijacin (para
motores con descansos de rodamiento).
4.1. Para motores con descansos de
deslizamiento seguir el procedimiento
descrito en el tem 4.2.2.2.
5. Desatornille la tapa. Los tornillos despus de
ser retirados debern ser colocados en las
roscas vacas existentes en las tapas para
forzar su salida. Certifquese que el eje este
apoyado para evitar la cada del rotor sobre el
estator.
6. Remueva el(los) rodamiento(s) (para motores
con descansos de rodamiento).
7. Retire el anillo interno de fijacin (para
motores con descansos de rodamiento).
Lado no accionado:
1. Desatornille la tela de proteccin del ventilador
(motores cerrados).
2. Retire el ventilador soltando los tornillos que lo
sujetan sobre el eje.
3. Suelte las 4 tuercas que fijan la caja de
proteccin del ventilador y remuvalo. Retire
los tornillos distanciadores.
4. Repita la operacin 2 a 7 del tem anterior.
B) ROTOR DE ANILLOS
Lado accionado:
Idntico al de rotor de jaula.
del
Lado no accionado:
1. Retire la tapa trasera de proteccin del
portaescobillas.
2. Desconecte los cables de los anillos colectores.
Retire las escobillas y desmonte el
portaescobillas.
3. Desatornille la caja de proteccin del
portaescobillas de la caja de ventilacin.
4. Retire el colector de anillos y el disco de
ventilacin.
5. Repita las operaciones 2 a 4 del "lado no
accionado" para motores de jaula.
54
Pag. 168/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.8.1.1. RETIRADA DEL ROTOR

Por medio de un dispositivo adecuado, retire el

rotor de dentro del estator. El dispositivo deber
impedir que el rotor se raspe en el paquete del
estator o en las cabezas de la bobina.

4.8.2. LNEA A

Lado accionado:
1. Desconecte los cables de las resistencias de
calentamiento de las cajas de conexin.
2. Retire los detectores de temperatura de los
soportes (si hay).
3. Suelte los tornillos que fijan el conjunto del
soporte.
4. Retire los anillos externos de fijacin (para
motores con descansos de rodamiento).
4.1. Para motores con descansos de
deslizamiento, seguir el procedimiento
descrito en el tem 4.2.2.2.
5. Desatornille la tapa. Por medio de herramienta
adecuada vaya forzando la tapa para que
salga, girndola. Certifquese que el eje este
apoyado para evitar la cada del rotor sobre el
estator.
6. Remueva el(los) rodamiento(s) (para motores
con descansos de rodamiento).
7. Retire el anillo interno de fijacin.

Lado no accionado:
1. Retire la tapa deflectora.
5. Suelte el anillo de retencin del ventilador.
6. Repita las operaciones 2 a 7 del tem 4.8.2(a).

OBS.:
1. Para retirar el rotor observe el tem 4.8.1.2.
2. El estator no necesita ser retirado de la
carcasa para eventual reparos en el bobinado.

4.8.3. LNEA F

Lado accionado:
Idntico lnea A y H.

Lado no accionado:
1. Repetir operaciones 1 a 3 del tem 4.8.2(b).
2. Retire la tapa trasera de la proteccin de los
portaescobillas.
3. Desconecte los cables de las anillos colectores.
4. Retire las escobillas y desmonte el
portaescobillas.

55
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 169/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.8.4. LNEA H

Figura 4.26.

Pos. Denominacin Pos Denominacin

1 Carcasa 15 Ventilador interno
2 Terminal de tierra 16 Anillo de fijacin trasero interno
3 Eje 17 Resistencia de calentamiento trasera
4 Centrifugador de grasa delantero 18 Tapa trasera
5 Anillo de fijacin delantero externo 19 Sensor de temperatura del descanso trasero
6 Rodamiento delantero 20 Rodamiento trasero
7 Anillo de fijacin delantero interno 21 Centrifugador de grasa trasero
8 Sensor de temperatura del descanso delantero 22 Anillo de fijacin trasero externo
9 Tapa delantera 23 Caja de conexin de los accesorios
10 Resistencia de calentamiento delantera 24 Caja de conexin del estator
11 Rotor completo 25 Ventilador externo
12 Paquete Del estator 26 Tapa deflectora
13 Sensor de temperatura del estator 27 Grasera del cojinete trasero
14 Espina de fijacin del estator 28 Grasera del cojinete delantero
Tabla 4.5.

Seguridad! MONTAJE
Garantir que los cables fuerza 1) Utilizando el dispositivo adecuado, coloque el rotor
fueran desligados. (pos. 11) dentro del estator, insertndolo por la
parte trasera del motor y con los debidos cuidados
para que el rotor no roce en el paquete del estator
DESMONTAJE
o en las cabezas de bobina;
1) Desconecte los cables de los sensores de
2) Coloque los anillos de fijacin internos;
temperatura (pos. 8 y 19) de los terminales de la
3) Llenar con grasa del compartimiento de los
caja de conexin de los accesorios;
anillos internos y del rodamiento (ver tipo de grasa
2) Retire el deflector trasero (pos. 26)
en las tarjetas de caractersticas de los rodamientos,
3) Suelte el anillo de retencin del ventilador trasero
fijados en las tapas del motor);
externo y retire el ventilador (pos.25)
4) Examinar con cuidado las superficies del eje y de las
4) Suelte los tornillos que fijan los anillos de fijacin
tapas donde quedarn alojados los rodamientos
externos de los cojinetes;
verificando que no existan golpes y certificando las
5) Retire los anillos de fijacin externos delantero y
correctas tolerancias de las dimensiones mecnicas;
trasero (pos. 5 y 22);
5) Calentar y colocar los rodamientos delantero y
6) Retire los centrifugadores de grasa delantero y
trasero (pos. 6 y 20)
trasero (pos. 4 y 21), soltando los tornillos que los
6) Levante el rotor, coloque apoyos abajo del eje y
fijan en el eje;
coloque las tapas delantera y trasera (pos. 9 y 18);
7) Colocar apoyos abajo del eje para evitar la cada
7) Coloque el centrifugador de grasa delantero y
del rotor sobre el estator;
trasero (pos. 4 y 21) y fjelos en el eje;
8) Destornille y retire las tapas delantera y trasera
8) Colocar los anillos de fijacin externos delantero y
(pos. 9 y 18);
trasero (pos. 5 y 22) fijndolos junto con los anillos
9) Retire los rodamientos delantero y trasero (pos. 6
de fijacin internos (pos. 7 y 16)
y 20) utilizando un extractor apropiado;
9) Colocar el ventilador trasero externo (pos. 25)
10) Retire los anillos de fijacin internos delantero y
fijndolo con el anillo de retencin
trasero (pos. 7 y 16)
10) Colocar la tapa deflectora trasera (pos. 26);
11) Utilizando el dispositivo adecuado, retire el rotor
11) Conectar los cables de los sensores de temperatura
(pos. 11) de adentro del estator por la parte
(pos. 8 y 19) en los terminales de la caja de
trasera del motor y con los debidos cuidados para
conexin de los accesorios;
que el rotor no roce en el paquete del estator o en
12) Llenar la grasa de los rodamientos a travs de las
las cabezas de bobina.
graseras trasera y delantera (pos. 27 y 28).

56
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 170/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.8.5. PAR DE APRIETE DE LOS TORNILLOS

La tabla abajo presenta los pares de apriete de

los tornillos recomendados para montaje del
motor o de sus piezas:

Clase de
4.6 5.8 8.8 12.9
resistencia
Dimetro Par de apriete (Nm) tolerancia 10%
M6 1.9 3.2 5.1 8.7
M8 4.6 7.7 12.5 21
M10 9.1 15 25 41
M12 16 27 42 70
M16 40 65 100 175
M20 75 125 200 340
M24 130 220 350 590

NOTAS:
- La clase de resistencia normalmente est
indicada en la cabeza de los tornillos
sextavados.
- Cuando no hay marcacin en el tornillo, indica
que la clase de resistencia del tornillo es 4.6.
- Los tornillos sextavados internos tipo Allen
son de clase de resistencia 12.9.

4.9. RECOMENDACIONES GENERALES

- Cualquier pieza maltratada (rajaduras, golpes

de partes torneadas, roscas defectuosas), debe
ser, de preferencia sustituida, evitndose
recuperaciones.
- Todos los servicios aqu descriptos debern ser
efectuados por personal especializado y con
experiencia bajo pena de ocasionar daos
completos al equipo. En caso de dudas,
consulte a Weg Mquinas.

57
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 171/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

4.10. PLAN DE MANTENIMIENTO

CADA 3 ANUALMENTE CADA 3 ANOS

COMPONENTE DIARIAMENTE SEMANALMENTE
MESES (revisin parcial) (revisin completa)
- Inspeccin de - Drenar agua - Desmontar el motor;
- Reapretar los
- Motor completo. ruido y de condensada - Verificar partes y
tornillos.
vibracin. (si hay). piezas.
- Limpieza;
- Inspeccin visual; - Verificar la fijacin de
- Bobinas del
- Medir resistencia las bobinas;
estator y rotor.
del aislamiento. - Medir resistencia del
aislamiento.
- Limpieza de los
descansos, sustituir, si
necesario;
- Reengrasar: respetar
- Inspeccionar casquillo y
intervalos conforme
- Descansos. - Control de ruido. sustituir, si necesario
placa de lubricacin.
(soporte de manguito);
- Control de vibracin.
- Inspeccionar pista de
desliz (eje) y recuperar
cuando necesario.

- Cajas de
- Limpiar interior, - Limpiar interior y
conexin,
reapretar tornillos. reapretar tornillos.
conexin a tierra.

- Acoplamiento
(observe las
- Despus de la primera - Verifique
instrucciones de - Verifique alineamiento
semana: verifique alineamiento y
mantenimiento del y fijacin.
alineamiento y fijacin. fijacin.
fabricante del
acoplamiento).

- Si es posible,
- Dispositivos de - Registre los valores de desmontar y hacer test
monitorizacin. la medicin. del modo de
funcionamiento.

- Limpie
- Limpie (cuando - Limpie (vea tem
- Filtro. (cuando
necesario). 4.1.2).
necesario).

- Areas de las - Control y limpieza, si - Control y

anillos. necesario. limpieza.

- Control de la superficie,
- Anillos.
limpieza y contacto.
- Escobillas
- Control, sustituir
(motores de
cuando del tamao
anillos);
haya sido gastado (vea
- Escobillaa de
marca de desgaste,
tierra del eje (si
figura 4.5).
hay).
- Intercambiador de - Limpiar los tubos del
calor aire-aire. intercambiador.
Tabla 4.6.

58
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 172/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

5. REPUESTOS

5.1. PEDIDO

Al hacer un pedido de repuestos, se debe indicar

el tipo de motor y el nmero de serie de la
mquina conforme especificado en la plaqueta de
identificacin.

5.2. MANTENIMIENTO EN EXISTENCIA

Recomendamos mantener en existencia las piezas

que, en funcionamiento normal, se desgastan:
- Juego de rodamientos.
- Escobillas (tipo y calidad conforme
especificacin).
- Feltros para filtro (si existir).

Los repuestos deben ser almacenados en

ambientes limpios, secos y bien aireados. Si es
posible bajo una temperatura constante. Los
casquillos de los descansos de deslizamiento
tambin son piezas de repuesto, sin embargo,
debido al costo muy alto sugerimos analizar la
real necesidad de mantener estas piezas en
estoque.

59
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 173/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
6. ANORMALIDADES EN SERVICIO
Gran parte de las anormalidades que perjudican la
operacin normal de las mquinas elctricas,
pueden ser evitadas con providencias y cuidadas
de carcter preventivo.
Ventilacin suficiente, limpieza y mantenimiento
cuidadoso, son factores de mayor importancia.
Otro factor importante es la intervencin
inmediata cuando surge o es notado cualquier
fenmeno, como por ejemplo: vibraciones, golpes
de eje, resistencia de aislamiento
permanentemente decreciente, indicios de humo
y fuego, chispas o fuerte desgaste en los anillos
colectores y escobillas, variaciones bruscas de
temperatura en los descansos o en los
rodamientos.
La primera accin a ser tomada cuando ocurren
anormalidades de naturaleza elctrica o mecnica,
es desconectar los motores y examinar todas las
partes mecnicas y elctricas de la instalacin.
En caso de incendio, la instalacin debe ser
aislada de la red; lo que es hecho generalmente
por la desconexin de las respectivas llaves.
En la presencia de fuego en el interior del motor,
se debe tratar de detenerlo y sofocarlo, cubriendo
las aberturas de la ventilacin.
Para combatirlo, deben ser usados extintores de
polvo qumico seco o CO2, pero nunca agua.
6.1. DANOS COMUNES A LOS MOTORES
DE INDUCCIN
Los motores de la Weg Mquinas. son
normalmente proyectados para clase de
aislamiento F (155C), y para temperatura
ambiente de 40C (en conformidad con la placa
de identificacin).
La mayora de los defectos en las bobinas se
originan cuando son ultrapasadas las
temperaturas lmites en toda la bobina, o en
partes del mismo, en consecuencia de la
sobrecarga de la corriente. Ellos se revelan a
travs de oscurecimiento o carbonizacin del
aislamiento de los alambres.
6.1.1. CORTO CIRCUITO ENTRE ESPIRAS
El corto circuito entre espiras puede ser
consecuencia de coincidir casualmente dos puntos
defectuosos del aislamiento de los alambres o
resultar de defectos provocados simultneamente
en dos alambres que estn lado a lado.
En las tres fases, se manifiestan corrientes
desiguales cuya diferencia por tanto, conforme las
circunstancias podrn ser tan pequeas que la
proteccin del motor ni sienta.
Corto circuito entre espiras, contra el hierro o
entre las fases en consecuencia de defectos en el
aislamiento, ocurren raramente y as mismo, casi
siempre en los primeros tiempos despus del
inicio de funcionamiento.
60
Doc. PBPNU5999001
6.1.2. DANOS CAUSADOS A LAS BOBINAS
a) UNA FASE DE LA BOBINA QUEMADA
Este dao ocurre cuando el motor trabaja
conectado en tringulo y falta corriente en un
conductor de la red. La corriente sube de 2 a 2,5
veces en las bobinas restantes, al mismo tiempo
en que la rotacin cae acentuadamente. Si el
motor para, la corriente subir de 3,5 hasta 4
veces su valor nominal.
La mayora de las veces la ocurrencia de ese
defecto se debe al hecho de no haber sido
instalado ningn tipo de proteccin o entonces, el
mecanismo de proteccin a sido regulado con
valores muy altos.
b) DOS FASES DE BOBINAS QUEMADAS
Este defecto ocurrir en caso de que falte
corriente en un conductor de la red y la bobina
del motor este conectado en estrella.
Una de las fases de la bobina queda sin corriente
mientras que las otras pasam a absorver toda la
potencia y a conducir una corriente muy elevada.
El valor del deslizamiento llega casi a duplicar.
c) TRES FASES DE LAS BOBINAS
QUEMADAS
Causa probable 1:
El motor es protegido apenas por fusibles;
sobrecarga en el motor ser la causa de la
anormalidad.
La consecuencia ser la carbonizacin progresiva
de los alambres y del aislamiento terminando en
cortocircuito entre espiras o corto circuito contra
la carcasa.
Si el motor es protegido por una llave de
proteccin esta anormalidad puede ser fcilmente
evitada.
Causa probable 2:
El motor est conectado errado.
Veamos por ejemplo: Un motor con bobinas
proyectado para 220/380V es conectado a travs
de llave estrella-tringulo a una red elctrica de
380V.
La corriente absorbida ser tan alta que las
bobinas quemarn en pocos segundos si los
fusibles o una llave de proteccin incorrectamente
ajustados no reaccionen inmediatamente.
Pag. 174/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Causa probable 3:
La llave estrella-tringulo no es conmutada y el
motor continua girando durante algn tiempo,
conectado en estrella, bajo el esfuerzo de una
carga excesiva.
En virtud de desenvolver apenas 1/3 de su par, el
motor no consigue llegar a su velocidad de giro
nominal. La acentuacin del deslizamiento
significa para el motor prdidas hmicas ms
elevadas causadas por el efecto Joule.
En virtud de la corriente del estator no ultrapasar,
conforme la carga, su valor nominal para la
conexin en tringulo, la llave de proteccin no
reaccionar.
El motor calentar en consecuencia del aumento
de prdidas en las bobinas y en el rotor, y las
bobinas quemarn.
Causa probable 4:
La sobrecarga trmica, por un nmero excesivo
de arranques en el rgimen de operacin
intermitente o por un periodo de arranque
demasiado prolongado daara las bobinas. El
perfecto funcionamiento de los motores que
trabajan bajo ste rgimen podr ser asegurado
si fueran debidamente llevados en cuenta los
siguientes valores en la especificacin del motor:
a) Nmero de arranques por hora;
b) Arranque con o sin carga;
c) Freno mecnico o de reversin de la corriente;
d) Masas girantes aceleradas conectadas al eje
del motor;
e) Momento de carga en funcin de la rotacin,
por ocasin de la aceleracin y del frenado.
En virtud del continuo esfuerzo dispensado por el
motor, por ocasin del arranque en regimen
intermitente dar origen a mayores perdidas, que
provocarn calentamiento elevado, no provocn
calentamiento ms elevado, no estarn fuera de
cogitacin en casos especiales la posibilidad de
que las bobinas del estator venga a sufrir daos
con el motor parado, en consecuencia del
calentamiento ocurrido en el motor.
6.1.3. DANOS CAUSADOS AL ROTOR (jaula)
Si un motor girando con carga emite un ruido de
intensidad variada y su frecuencia aumenta a
medida que aumenta la carga, el motivo ser la
mayora de las veces, la existencia de una
disimetra en las bobinas del rotor.
En motores con rotor de jaula la causa ser, casi
siempre, una interrupcin en una o ms barras
del rotor; simultneamente pueden ser
constatadas variaciones peridicas de la corriente
del estator.
61
Doc. PBPNU5999001
Este defecto acostumbra aparecer generalmente,
solo en jaulas de aluminio fundidas en molde o
bajo presin.
Las interrupciones en una u otra barra se revelan
por calentamiento local del paquete rotrico,
mostrando manchas azuladas en los puntos
afectados.
Cuando existe interrupcin en varias barras
contrapuestas pueden aparecer vibraciones con
estremecimientos, que se comportan como las
que acontecen en el desbalanceo y que son
muchas veces, confundidas como tal. Cuando el
paquete rotrico adquiere una coloracin azulada
o violeta, es seal de que est habiendo
sobrecarga.
Esto puede ser provocado por el deslizamiento
demasiado acentuado, por excesivo nmero de
arranques, o por periodo de arranque muy largo.
El dao puede ser originado tambien por tensin
insuficiente en la red elctrica.
6.1.4. DANOS EN ROTORES CON ANILLOS
La interrupcin en una fase del bobinado rotrico
se manifiesta por un fuerte ruido oscilante, que
varia conforme el deslizamiento, sumado a
variaciones peridicas bien ms acentuadas de la
corriente del estator.
En algunos casos raros, es posible que ocurra
ruptura en la conexin entre el bobinado y los
anillos colectores. Conviene ms aun, verificar
primeramente si la interrupcin ocurri en la
conexin al reostato de arranque o en el mismo.
6.1.5. CORTOS ENTRE ESPIRAS EN
MOTORES CON ANILLOS
Se trata de una anormalidad que solamente
ocurre en casos extremamente raros.
Dependiendo de la magnitud del corto circuito, el
motor arranca con violencia, aunque el reostato
de arranque este apenas en el punto inicial de su
posicin de arranque.
Como en ese caso las fuertes corrientes de
arranque no pasan por los anillos, no sern
notados all, marcas de quemaduras
6.1.6. DANOS A LOS DESCANSOS
Los daos a los descansos son causados por las
paradas prolongadas. Funcionamiento con
vibracin excesiva, inadecuado, desalineamientos,
acoplamientos desbalanceados, cargas radiales y
o axiales excesivas son los principales
responsables por daos causados a los descansos.
Verificar tem 4.2 sobre mantenimiento de
descansos.
Pag. 175/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

6.1.7. FRACTURA DEL EJE

A pesar que los descansos constituyan

tradicionalmente como la parte ms dbil y los
ejes estn proyectados con un coeficiente de
seguridad amplio no es del todo imposible que
ocurran fracturas en los ejes, por el hecho de los
esfuerzos incesantes y de flexin provocados por
la tensin excesiva de las correas.
Las fracturas ocurren en la mayora de los casos,
inmediatamente despus del soporte del lado
accionado.
En consecuencia de los esfuerzos de flexin
alternados que solicitan el eje en marcha, las
fracturas se van profundando de fuera para
dentro, hasta culminar con la ruptura, cuando la
resistencia de la parte que resta de la seccin del
eje no sea ms suficiente.
Evitar tornear adicionalmente el eje (agujeros
para fijar, etc.) ya que pueden causar
concentraciones de tensiones.
El cambio de algunas correas entre varias correas
paralelas de una transmisin, a pesar de
representar una prctica nociva es la causante de
fracturas en los ejes con mucha frecuencia.
Si son conservadas algunas correas viejas y
consecuentemente dilatadas en su tamao, y
localizadas ms cerca del motor, mientras que las
correas nuevas y ms cortas giran ms lejos del
soporte, podrn causar excesivas tensiones por
flexin para el eje.

6.1.8. DANOS DERIVADOS DE PIEZAS DE

TRANSMISIN MAL AJUSTADAS O DE
ALINEAMIENTO DEFICIENTE DE LOS
MOTORES

Descansos daados y fracturas en el eje son,

muchas veces, resultados de poleas, acoples o
piones ajustados sin la necesaria firmeza sobre
el eje.
Esas piezas "golpean" cuando en giro.
El defecto puede ser reconocido por los desvos
que aparecen en el eje.
Hendiduras de chavetero a con sus bordes
maltratados por chaveteros introducidos con
mucha holgura, pueden dar origen igualmente a
fracturas de los ejes.
Acoplamientos mal alineados, ocasionan golpes y
estremecimientos en sentido radial y axial a los
descansos y conducen, en poco tiempo, a
deterioracin de los descansos en la tapa situada
en el lado accionado. En algunos casos ms
graves, podr ocurrir fractura del eje.

62
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 176/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
6.2. INSTRUCCIONES PARA DETERMINAR CAUSAS Y ELIMINAR LAS
CONDICIONES ANORMALES EN EL MOTOR
NOTA: Las instrucciones a seguir constituyen una relacin bsica de anormalidades, causas y ciones
correctivas. En caso de duda, favor contactar a Weg Mquinas, Asistencia Tcnica o Servicios.
ANORMALIDAD
- No arranca, acoplado ni desacoplado.
- Motor parte en vaco, pero falla al
aplicarse carga. Parte muy lentamente
y no alcanza la rotacin nominal.
- La corriente del estator oscila en carga
con el doble de frecuencia de
deslizamiento, el motor presenta
zumbido en el arranque.
- La corriente en vaco esta muy alta.
- Calentamientos localizados en las
bobinas del estator.
- Calentamiento localizado en el rotor.
- Ruido anormal durante el
funcionamiento en carga.
- Cuando acoplado aparece ruido;
desacoplado el ruido desaparece.
POSIBLES CAUSAS
- Mnimo dos cables de conexin estn
sueltos, sin tensin.
- Rotor est bloqueado.
- Problemas en las escobillas.
- Soporte daado.
- Par de carga muy grande durante el
arranque.
- Tensin de alimentacin muy baja.
- Cada muy grande de la tensin en los
cables de conexin.
- Rotor con barras falladas o interrumpidas.
- Un cable de conexin quedo interrumpido
despus del arranque.
- Bobina del rotor esta interrumpido.
- Problemas en las escobillas.
- Tensin de conexin muy elevada.
- Corto circuito entre espiras.
- Interrupcin de alambres paralelos o
fases de las bobinas del estator.
- Conexin deficiente.
- Interrupciones en las bobinas del rotor.
- Causas mecnicas.
- Causas elctricas.
- Defecto en los componentes de
transmisin o en la mquina accionada.
- Defecto en la transmisin del engranaje
- Base desalineada/desnivelada.
- Balanceo deficiente de los componentes o
de mquina accionada.
- Acoplamiento.
- Sentido de rotacin del motor errado.
63
Doc. PBPNU5999001
CORRECCIN
- Verificar el tablero de comando, los
cables de conexin, los bornes, el asiento
de las escobillas.
- Las escobillas pueden estar gastadas,
sucias o colocadas incorrectamente.
- Substituya el soporte.
- No aplicar carga en la mquina accionada
durante el arranque.
- Medir la tensin de alimentacin, ajustar
el valor correcto.
- Verificar el clculo de la instalacin
(transformador, grosor de los cables,
verificar rels, disyuntores, etc.).
- Verificar y arreglar las bobinas del rotor
(jaula), hacer teste dispositivo de corto
circuito (anillos).
- Verificar los cables de conexin.
- Verificar y arreglar la bobina del rotor y
dispositivo de corto circuito.
- Las escobillas pueden estar gastadas,
sucias o colocadas incorrectamente.
- Medir tensin de conexin y ajustarle al
valor correcto.
- Reparar el bobinado.
- Rehacer la conexin.
- Arreglar las bobinas del rotor o
substituirlas.
- El ruido normalmente disminuye con la
cada de rotacin; vea tambin:
"funcionamiento ruidoso cuando
desacoplado".
- El ruido desaparece al desconectarse el
motor. Consultar el fabricante.
- Verificar la transmisin de fuerza, el
acoplamiento y el alineamiento.
- Alinear el accionamiento.
- Realinear/nivelar el motor y la mquina
accionada.
- Hacer nuevo balanceo.
- Invertir las conexiones de dos fases.
Pag. 177/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

ANORMALIDAD POSIBLES CAUSAS CORRECCIN

- Abrir y limpiar los canales de pasaje de

- Bobinas del estator calientan mucho
con carga muy baja.
aire.
- Refrigeracin insuficiente debido a los
- Medir la corriente del estator, disminuir la
canales de aire sucios.
carga, analizar la aplicacin del motor.
- Sobrecarga.
- Reducir el nmero de arranques.
- Elevado nmero de arranques o momento
- No ultrapasar a 110% de la tensin
de inercia muy alto.
nominal, salvo especificacin en la
- Tensin muy alta, como consecuencia, las
plaqueta de identificacin.
prdidas en el hierro son muy altas.
- Verificar la tensin de alimentacin y la
- Tensin muy baja, como consecuencia la
cada de tensin en el motor.
corriente es muy alta.
- Medir la corriente en todas las fases y
- Interrupcin en un cable de conexin o
corregir.
en una fase de la bobina.
- Verificar el entrehierro, condiciones de
- Rotor se arrastra contra el estator.
funcionamiento (vibraciones...),
- La condicin de trabajo no est de
condiciones de los descansos.
acuerdo a los datos de la tarjeta de
- Mantener la condicin de operacin
identificacin.
conforme plaqueta de identificacin, o
- Desequilibrio en la alimentacin (fusible
reducir la carga.
quemado, comando errado).
- Verificar si hay desequilibrio de las
- Bobinas sucias.
tensiones o funcionamiento con dos fases
- Conductos de aire interrumpidos.
y corregir.
- Filtro de aire sucio.
- Limpie.
- Sentido de giro no compatible con el
- Limpiar el elemento filtrante.
Ventilador utilizado.
- Analizar el ventilador en funcin del
sentido de giro del motor.

- El ruido contina durante la

- Desbalanceo.
- Interrupcin en una fase del bobinado del
estator.
- Tornillos de fijacin sueltos.
- Las condiciones de balanceo del rotor
- Operacin ruidosa cuando desacoplado peoran despus del montaje del
acoplamiento.
- Resonancia de la fundacin.
- Carcasa del motor destorcida.
- Eje torcido.
- Entrehierro desigual.
desaceleracin despus de desconectar la
tensin; hacer nuevo balanceo.
- Medir la entrada de corriente de todos los
cables de conexin.
- Reapretar y trabar los tornillos.
- Balancear el acoplamiento.
- Ajustar la fundacin.
- Verificar si la base es plana.
- El eje puede estar torcido; verificar el
balanceo del rotor y la excentricidad.
- Verificar la deformacin del eje o el
desgaste de los rodamientos.

- Redimensionar los cables.

- Motor de anillos funcionando a una
velocidad baja con resistencia externa
desconectada.
- Cables mal dimensionados entre el motor
y el reostato.
- Circuito abierto en los bobinados del rotor
(incluyendo conexiones con reostato).
- Suciedad entre la escobilla y los anillos
colectores.
- Escobillas presas en el alojamiento.
- Presin incorrecta sobre las escobillas.
- Escobillas mal asentadas.
- Hacer un teste de continuidad.
- Limpiar las anillos colectoras y el conjunto
aislante.
- Verificar la movilidad de las escobillas en
los alojamientos.
- Verificar la presin sobre cada escobilla y
corregir, si es necesario.
- Limpiar, lijar y pulir o tornear, cuando
necesario.
- Adecuar las escobillas a la condicin de la
carga.
- Asentar correctamente las escobillas.

- Corregir el asentamiento de las escobillas

- Escobillas mal asentadas.
- Presin baja entre escobillas y anillos.
- Sobrecarga.
- Anillos colectoras en mal estado
(ovalizadas, superficies speras,
- Chispeo.
entrancias...).
- Escobillas presas en los alojamientos.
- Vibracin excesiva.
- Baja carga provocando daos a los anillos
colectores.
y establecer la presin normal.
- Adecuar la carga a las caractersticas del
motor o dimensionar un nuevo motor
para dada aplicacin.
- Maquinar los anillos colectores.
- Verificar la movilidad de las escobillas en
sus alojamientos.
- Verificar origen de la vibracin y corregir.
- Condicionar las escobillas a la real
condicin de carga y tornear los anillos
colectores.

Tabla 6.2.

64
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 178/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

6.3. INSTRUCCIONES PARA DETERMINAR CAUSAS Y ELIMINAR CONDICIONES

DESFAVORABLES Y DEFECTOS DE LOS RODAMIENTOS

NOTA: Las instrucciones a seguir relacionan las caractersticas bsicas de problemas en rodamientos. En
algunos casos es necesario un anlisis del propio fabricante del rodamiento para determinar la causa del
defecto.

DEFECTO POSIBLES CAUSAS DETERMINACIN Y ELIMINACIN

- Motor ronca durante el funcionamiento. - Rodamientos daados. - Substituya el rodamiento.

- Ruidos moderados en el rodamiento,

- Rodamiento fue montado en una posicin - Recuperar el asiento en el eje y sustituir
puntos opacos, formacin de ranuras
mala. el rodamiento.
en las pistas.

- Oxidacin en la jaula, pequeos pedazos

de metal en la grasa, formacin de fallas
- Alto ruido del rodamiento y un - Hacer limpieza y reemplazar segn las
en las pistas debido a la deficiencia de la
calentamiento mayor del rodamiento. prescripciones, sustituir el rodamiento.
grasa, eventualmente ajuste del
rodamiento inadecuado.

- Retirar el tapn de escape de la grasa y

- Grasa en exagero.
- Excesivo esfuerzo axial o radial de la
correa.
- Eje torcido/vibracin excesiva.
- Calentamiento de los rodamientos.
- Falta de grasa.
- Grasa endurecida ocasionando
trabamiento de las esferas.
- Materia extraa en la grasa.
dejar el motor funcionando hasta que se
vea salir el exceso de la grasa.
- Disminuir el esfuerzo de la correa.
- Corregir el eje y verificar el balanceo del
rotor. Verificar el origen de la vibracin y
corregir.
- Aumentar grasa en el rodamiento.
- Sustituir los rodamientos.
- Lavar los rodamientos y lubricar.

- Manchas oscuras en un lado de la pista - Examinar las relaciones de accionamiento

- Fuerza axial muy grande.
del rodamiento posteriormente ranuras. y acoplamiento.

- Lneas oscuras en las pistas o ranuras - Limpie y substituya el aislamiento del

transversales bastante juntas; en el - Circulacin de corriente por los soporte. Coloque aislamiento, si no hay.
caso de rodamiento de esfera, marcas descansos. - Desviar la corriente evitando que pase
puntiformes. por los rodamientos.

- Vibraciones externas, principalmente

- Surcos en las pistas, posteriormente - De tiempo en tiempo girar el rotor del
cuando el motor est parado por un largo
claros. motor parado para otra posicin,
tiempo.
- Marcas en la divisin de los elementos principalmente tratndose de motor
- Falta de mantenimiento durante el
cilndricos. reserva.
almacenaje.

Tabla 6.3.

IMPORTANTE:
Las mquinas referidas en este manual experimentan perfeccionamientos constantes,
por eso las informaciones de este manual estn sujetas a modificaciones sin previo aviso.

65
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 179/458
 MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS

7. TRMINOS DE GARANTA PARA PRODUCTOS DE INGENIERA

Estos productos, cuando son operados en las
condiciones estipuladas por Weg en los manuales
de operacin de cada producto, tienen garanta
contra defectos de fabricacin y de materiales por
un perodo de doce (12) meses contados a partir
del comienzo de operacin o dieciocho (18)
meses la fecha de fabricacin, lo que primero
ocurrir.
Entretanto, esta garanta no es aplicada para
ningn producto que haya sido sometido a mal
uso, mal empleo, negligencia (incluyendo sin
limitacin, mantenimiento inadecuado, accidente,
instalacin inadecuada, modificaciones,
adaptaciones, reparaciones o cualquier otro caso
originado por aplicaciones inadecuadas).
La garanta no ser responsable por
cualquier/gasto incurrido en la instalacin del
comprador, desensamblaje, gastos como
perjuicios financieros, transporte y de locomocin,
bien como hospedaje y alimentacin de los
tcnicos cuando solicitados por el comprador.
Las reparaciones y/o reemplazo de piezas o
componentes, cuando efectuados a criterio de
Weg durante el periodo de garanta, no
postergar el plazo de garanta original, a menos
que sea expresado por escrito por Weg.
Esto constituye la nica garanta de Weg con
relacin a esta venta y la misma substituye todas
las dems garantas, expresas o implcitas,
escritas o verbales.
No existe ninguna garanta implcita de
negociacin o conveniencia para una finalidad
especfica que sea aplicada a esta venta.
Ningn empleado, representante, revendedor u
otra persona est autorizado para dar cualquier
garanta en nombre de Weg o para asumir por
Weg cualquier otra responsabilidad en relacin
con cualquiera de sus productos.
En caso de que esto ocurra, sin la autorizacin de
Weg, la garanta estar automticamente
anulada.
RESPONSABILIDADES
Excepto lo especificado en el pargrafo anterior
denominado "Trminos de Garanta Para
Productos de Ingeniera", la empresa no tendr
ninguna obligacin o responsabilidad para con el
comprador, incluyendo, sin limitacin, cualquier
reclamo con referencia a daos consecuentes o
gastos con mano de obra por razn de cualquier
violacin de la garanta expresa descripta en este
fascculo.
El comprador tambin concuerda en indemnizar y
mantener la Compaa libre de daos
consecuentes de cualquier causa de accin
(excepto gastos de reposicin y reparacin de
productos defectuosos, conforme lo especificado
en el pargrafo anterior denominado "Trminos
de Garanta Para Productos de Ingeniera",
consecuente directa o indirectamente de los
actos, de negligencia u omisin del comprador
con relacin a/o proveniente de pruebas, uso,
operacin, reposicin o reparacin de cualquier
producto descrito en esta cotizacin y vendido o
suministrado por la Compaa al comprador.

WEG INDSTRIAS S.A. - MQUINAS

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000 89256-900 Jaragu do Sul/SC
Tel. (047) 372-4000 Fax (047) 372-4030
So Paulo: Tel.(011) 5053-2300 Fax (011) 5052-4202
www.weg.com.br

1014.04/0696

66
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 180/458
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 181/458
 DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS
Installation and Maintenace Manual

DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS

Manual de Instalacion y mantenimiento de ventilador

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 182/458

 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
for
DODGE SLEEVOIL RTL
PILLOW BLOCKS
Sizes 37/16" thru 12"

1
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 183/458
 Housing caps and liner caps are matched to their bases
and MUST not be interchanged. Housings and liners are to
be interchanged as assemblies only.

SLEEVOIL RTL pillow blocks are designed for applications

requiring a bearing with high thrust load capacities and are
available in expansion and non-expansion types.

Exploded view of expansion pillow block (housing cap and

liner cap not shown). Non-expansion pillow block includes
thrust plate kit and split thrust collar. INSTALLATION OF BASES

Options include: thermocouple, circulating oil kit, heater and Check mounting structure to insure it is rigid, level and
thermostat, vibration detector kit, auxiliary seal kit and end well supported.
closure.
Position housing base on pedestal so oil gauge is in
PRE-ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS position specified on construction drawing. Do NOT
Refer to applicable contract/assembly drawings to verify tighten housing base to pedestal.
that all parts are available prior to assembly.
Disassemble and thoroughly clean all parts of the pillow
block. The installer is the last person to inspect all parts for
fit, damage and cleanliness. Care MUST be taken to avoid
contaminating the internal surfaces of the bearing.

Apply oil to the spherical seats of the housing base.

2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 184/458
Set liner base in
If clamp-on type
housing base.
thrust collar is used,
remove jam screws
and back off set
screws so they do
not protrude into the
I.D. of the thrust
collar. Remove
clamp screws and
make sure joints of
collar are clean.
If shaft is in place, one cooling pipe from lower liner half will
need to be removed to roll liner into place.
ATTENTION Place both halves of
Care should be taken when reinstalling coolant pipes. thrust collar into
Use pipe sealant and tighten securely. OVER- shaft groove and
TIGHTENING MAY RESULT IN LINER DAMAGE. tighten clamp scre-
Because of the closely controlled liner to housing fit, it may ws alternately and
be necessary to bolt the housing base down to allow the liner evenly to torque
to slip into the housing seat. Do a preliminary alignment value specified in
check at this time. Table 1.

When using cir-

culating oil or
thermocouple,
make sure holes in
liner will align with The collar faces must
holes in housing be smooth with no
after pillow block is offset at the split.
assembled. Apply Collar faces to be
oil to the liner true to shaft within
bearing surface. .001 T.I.R.
NOTE: Liner has been machined to close tolerances.
Scraping of bore is not necessary.
INSTALLATION OF SHAFT AND
THRUST COLLAR
Inspect shaft to ensure it is smooth Tighten set screws
(32 mico-inch or better), free of burrs to value specified
or rough spots, clean shaft in the in Table 1. Install
bearing area and carefully set shaft in and tighten jam
place if thrust collar assembly is to be screws 1/10 of
conducted inside the bearing. torque specified for
Standard shaft tolerance should be set screws.
+.000/-.002 on all sizes unless
otherwise specified on shaft detail.
If bearing is non- Oil shaft in the
expansion (fixed) bearing area and
type, check thrust CAREFULLY set
collar for burrs and shaft in place if
scratches. Use thrust collar ass-
crocus cloth (NOT embly was con-
emery cloth or ducted outside
sandpaper) to bearing.
smooth any scr-
atches on thrust
collar faces.
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 185/458
 TABLE 1
THRUST COLLAR
RTL CLAMP SCREW SET SCREW
SLEEVOIL SCREW WRENCH SCREW WRENCH
SIZE SIZE TORQUE SIZE TORQUE Make sure oil rings
(SOC. HEX) (IN.-LBS.) (SOC.HEX) (IN.-LBS.) rotate freely on
7 5
3 /16 RTL - 20NC 160 /16 - 24NF 160
15
3 /16 RTL - 20NC 160
5
/16 - 24NF 160
shaft.
7 5
4 /16 RTL - 20NC 160 /16 - 24NF 160
15 5 5
4 /16 RTL /16 - 18NC 325 /16 - 24NF 160
7 3 3
5 /16 RTL /8 - 16NC 580 /8 - 16NC 275
3
6 RTL - 13NC 1425 /8 - 16NC 275
3
7 RTL - 13NC 1425 /8 - 16NC 275
5
8 RTL - 13NC
5
1425
5
/8 - 11NC 1200 INSTALLATION OF THRUST PLATES
9 RTL /8 - 11NC 2800 /8 - 11NC 1200
10 RTL - 10NC 5000
5
/8 - 11NC 1200
For non-expansion
12 RTL - 10NC 5000
5
/8 - 11NC 1200 bearings:
Clean one set of
babbitt faced thrust
plates.
NOTE: Plates are
The thrust collar must matched halves and
be centered in the MUST NOT be
cavity of the liner base. interchanged.

Carefully smooth
any scratches on
babbitted face
INSTALLATION OF OIL RINGS with crocus cloth
(NOT emery cloth or
NOTE: Do NOT use oil rings if liner cap has baffles sandpaper). Oil plate
installed in the oil ring grooves. halves genero-
usly.

First, install the plate

Place oil ring around half without milled
outside of liner base slots in the steel
and over shaft. back. Press the
babbitted face ag-
ainst the thrust collar
and rotate plate
around shaft into liner
cavity.

Install and peen oil

ring screws to Install retainer wa-
insure they are sher in groove in liner
secure. Repeat for base. Rotate plate
second ring. until stopped by
retainer washer.

4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 186/458
Place the other
thrust plate half (half
with two milled slots Install cap
in steel back) screws and
against thrust collar, tighten alte-
making sure bab- rnately to
bitt faces thrust torque given
collar. Clean and oil in Table 2.
the second thrust
plate set and install
NOTE: If liner cap on non-expansion bearing will not drop into
in same manner. It
place, remove cap and reposition thrust plates tightly against
may be necessary
thrust collar. Reinstall liner cap.
to move the shaft
slightly to obtain TABLE 2
enough clearance RT LINER CAP BOLTS
in the liner cavity to SLEEVOIL THREAD TORQUE
install the lower SIZE SIZE (IN.-LBS.)
plate half. 7
3 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
Total axial clearance between thrust plates and thrust collar 15
3 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
is .015 - .030 inches. 7
4 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
15 5
4 /16 /16 - 18 132
INSTALLATION OF LINER CAP 7
5 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
3
6 /8 - 16 240
Apply oil to the bearing area
7 - 13 600
of liner cap. 8 - 13 600
9 - 13 600
10 - 10 2100
12 - 10 2100

ALIGNMENT
Check alignment of
pillow block by noting
clearance between
housing and shaft at
each end of the
housingclearance
should be uniform
within 1/32". Shim
bearing pedestal
where possible;
otherwise, use full
length shims under base as required. Alignment of pillow block
CAREFULLY should be accurate since the self-aligning feature of the
locate liner bearing is to compensate for normal shaft deflection.
cap on liner
base. These Tighten housing base
SLEEVOIL mounting bolts to torque
liners have value given in Table 3.
match-marks Shaft should rotate freely.
permanently
stamped at
the joint near
one end.
These match marks permanently insure that parts stay
paired and critical orientation of assemblies is maintained.
Makes sure oil rings rotate freely. End faces of liner
should have no appreciable offset.

5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 187/458
 INSTALLATION OF OIL SEALS Back off plunger screw as
Wrap the O-ring far as possible and
(rubber cord) around CAREFULLY locate
the shaft in the seal housing cap on housing
area and cut it to fit base. These SLEEVOIL
the shaft. For most housings have match -
effective sealing, marks permanently
ends of O-ring must stamped on the water pipe
meet. Cementing grommet pad. These match
ends together is marks permanently insure
recommended. that parts stay paired and critical orientation of assemblies is
maintained. Do not damage seals or housing gasket. Torque
Disassemble one housing bolts to value given in Table 4. A non-hardening sealer can
seal and place one be used with the housing gaskets and under bolt heads to eliminate
half on shaft with chances for leakage. The plunger screw must be loose until the
flinger facing liner. housing bolts have been tightened.
Locate O-ring in seal
groove and rotate TABLE 4
seal half around shaft RTL PLUNGER SCREW HOUSING CAP BOLT
SLEEVOIL WRENCH SIZE TORQUE THREAD TORQUE
into housing base SIZE (SOC. HEX) (IN.-LB.) SIZE (IN.-LB.)
groove. 3 7/16 3
/8 850 10 1920
315/16 3
/8 850 10 1920
4 7/16 1260 7
/89 2280
Install other half of 415/16 5
/8 2500 7
/89 2280
seal and tighten 5 7/16 5
/8 2500 18 2640
5
6 /8 2500 18 2640
screws to torque 7 5
/8 2500 11/87 3600
given in Table 3. 8 3600 11/87 3600
Install second seal in 9 3600 17 5040
10 4800 17 5040
same manner. If end 12 4800 16 8880
closure is to be
used, the neoprene Plunger screw will be
disc is to be installed tightened to torque
on one end at this given in Table 4,
time instead of the following procedure
bearing seal. described below.
Consult construc- CAP LOADED
tion drawing. BEARINGS:
TABLE 3 If shaft must be held
RTL HOUSING/PEDESTAL BOLTS SEAL CLAMP SCREWS down to install cap,
SLEEVOIL THREAD TORQU THREAD TORQUE
SIZE SIZE (IN.-LBS.) SIZE (IN.-LBS.)
tighten plunger screw
3 7/16 2100 1024 12 to torque given in
315/16 7
/8 2040 1024 12 Table 4 while shaft is
4 7/16 1 3000 1024 12
415/16 1 3000 1024 12 held down. Mark the
5 7/16 1
1 /8 4200 20 33 position of the plunger
6 1 6000 20 33 screw. Loosen plunger
5
7 1 10000 /1618 65
8 1 11500 5
/1618 65 screw one turn and
9 1 11500 3
/816 120 loosen shaft hold down.
3
10 2 15000
3
/816 120 Next, tighten plunger
12 2 15000 /816 120
screw while tightening
INSALLATION OF HOUSING CAP shaft hold down until
We have replaced plunger screw is tightened to the mark. Do NOT over tighten
SLEEVOIL housing gas - shaft hold down as this can misalign liner. Remove shaft hold
kets with 515 Gasket down and tighten plunger screw locknut.
Eliminator. Apply gasket NOTE: Do NOT tighten plunger screw on accompanying
eliminator to SLEEVOIL base loaded bearing until cap loaded bearing has been
housing base along outer
installed and shaft hold down removed.
contour of joint. NOTE:
Special care should be BASE LOADED BEARINGS: Tighten plunger screw to torque
taken at grommet area. given in Table 4 and secure with locknut.

6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 188/458
 INSTALLATION OF GROMMETS Install grommet, grommet plate and collar over each inlet
AND OIL GAUGE pipe. Press down on collar and tighten collar set screw.
Install grommet and
grommet plate over
coolant pipes.

NOTE: ALL plumbing (oil and water) should be cleaned

and flushed before being connected to the pillow block.
These systems should be tested before the bearing is put
Install bushings and into operation.
nuts on pipes (snug
not tight). A non- Connect
hardening sealer can circulating oil
be used under the supply lines so
grommet for better that each inlet
sealing. receives an equal
amount of oil. A
flow control valve
and oil flow
indicator are
recommended in
Oil level gauge may be located any distance from the pillow the inlet line. Oil flow must be adjusted to the rate
block by use of a coupling and pipe of desired length. The recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Connect
extended pipe must be supported so that it remains straight the drain lines. The drain piping should be vented and must
and level with no offsets (use a spirit leveldo not guess). be of adequate size to remove the oil at the specified flow
Use pipe sealer on all rate. The housing drain must be directed straight down into
connections. a return drain sloping away at a 15 or greater angle. The
oiling system should have a means of filtering the oil to
When pillow block is remove any contaminating particles. A 25 micronfilter or
arranged for circulating better is recommended.
oil, the oil level is
controlled by the drain If using a thermocouple install it in one of the two holes
system and the oil level specially machined in the housing base above the
gage is not needed. mounting bolts next to the waterpipe grommets. For non-
expansion bearing the thermocouple should be located in
the hole next to the thrust plate carrying the thrust load. If
the direction of thrust is not known, two thermocouples are
OPTIONS
recommended. For expansion bearing the thermocouple
When pillow block is arranged for circulating oil, insert the 2 may be located at either end. Make sure probe extends
small pipe nipples thru the holes in the housing cap and screw into the liner. Use sealant on all threaded connections.
them tightly into the liner.

7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 189/458
 Apply sealant to the Remove and reinstall,
pipe plug furnished using sealer, all pipe
and install it in the plugs not previously
remaining hole. removed.

Prior to placing the bearings into operation check for

cooling pipe leaks by placing the cooling water system into
Check construction
operation at normal operating pressure and flow rate. If a
drawings to determine if
leak is detected, remove the coolant pipe, redope, reinstall
coolant (water or air) is to
and check again.
be supplied to the
bearings. Do not connect When using air as the cooling medium, connect an inlet to
coolant pipes and bearing each pipe on one side of the bearing and an outlet to the
unless construction pipes on the other side Adjust flow to rate specified on
drawings and/or equipment construction drawing or to suit conditions.
instructions call for this. If Other Options Available:
no connection is
Heater and thermoswitch
required, pipes can be
Vibration detector kit
left open.
Auxiliary seals
NOTE: ALL plumbing (oil and water) should be cleaned and End cap kit
flushed before being connected to the pillow block These LUBRICATION AND OPERATION
systems should be tested before the bearing is put into
operation. Since the satisfactory operation of the pillow block depends
almost entirely on the oil film being maintained between the
If coolant pipes are to be connected, make sure that all shaft and bearing liner surface, the use of a high quality oil
pipe lengths are correct and unions are well aligned. from a reputable manufacturer cannot be overemphasized
Careless fitting will result in serious preloading of the Use a high grade straight mineral oil with rust and oxidation
bearing. Lengths of flexible hose between the pillow block (R & O) inhibitors and antifoam agents. Check construction
and rigid piping are recommended to avoid preloading of the drawings or equipment instruction manual for proper oil. Oil
bearing. A regulating valve should be placed ahead of the inlet viscosity is determined by the equipment manufacturer and
and a sight drain at the outlet for liquid coolants. The normally specified on the construction drawing or in the
recommended method of pipe connection for liquid coolants is operating manual, otherwise see Table 5 Information
to connect the inlet to the top pipe and the outlet to the bottom regarding qualities and properties of specific oils should be
pipe on the same side of the bearing. A return is then used to referred to the lubricant manufacturer.
connect the two pipes on the other side of the bearing. Adjust
coolant flow to rate specified on construction drawing or to suit Table 5
conditions. Anti-freeze type additives may be used in cold Recommended Oil Viscosity
operating environments, otherwise purge all coolant from liner If not specified by equipment manufacturer.
by blowing out with compressed air or steam anytime coolant is Room Temp.Fahr.
During Start Up Speed SAE/ISO Oil Required
subject to freezing. Bearing rating is generally based on a Below -10 All Consult Equipment Manufacturer
maximum water inlet temperature of 90F. The interior pressure -10 to 32 All SAE 10/ISO 32
of the liner should never exceed 120 psi. For deviations see 32 to 70 Low SAE 20/ISO 68
construction drawings or contact equipment manufacturer. High SAE 10/ISO 32
Above 70 Low SAE 30/ISO 100
CAUTION High SAE 10/ISO 32 for Light Loads
SAE 20/ISO 68 for Heavy Loads
Water pressure should never exceed 120 P.S.I.
Use high grade, high quality, well refined petroleum oils for the
straight mineral type, with rust and oxidation inhibiter and anti-foam
agent only.
Approximate viscosity:
SAE 10183 SUS at 100F; 46 SUS at 210F
SAE 20348 SUS at 100F; 57 SUS at 210F
SAE 30489 SUS at 100F; 65 SUS at 210F
ISO 32158 SUS at 100F; 44 SUS at 210F
ISO 68335 SUS at 100F; 55 SUS at 210F
ISO 100495 SUS at 100F; 66 SUS at 210F
8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 190/458
 procedure in 3 month intervals. Visually check oil for
contamination between oil analysis checks. Oil service life
depends upon several factors such as ambient conditions,
operating temperature and frequency of bearing starts and
stops. It is recomended that the oil be changed at least
once per year for unfiltered static applications. Removing
contaminants through the use of either the OLF (Oil Level
and Filtration) Unit or a circulating oil system can extend oil
service life. Consult equipment manufacturer for more
information.
Any questions about installation, maintenance and
After placing into operation NOTE: Check plunger arrangement of coolant or oil connections should be
remove inspection covers screw torque per Table 4 referred to the equipment manufacturer.
and check to make sure oil at time of first system NOTE: Auxillary seals are recommended for outdoor
rings are bringing up oil. shutdown. applications, contaminated atmospheres, and high volume
Operation should be of air flowing over the bearing.
checked frequently during
the first few days. NOTE: Bearings should NOT be stored outdoors before
installation. For extended or outdoor storage, contact
equipment manufacturer for special precautions against
corrosion.
NOTE: Bearings (and shafts) allowed to set idle for
extended periods after being run MUST be protected
against corrosion. If the unit can not be run for several
minutes at least once a week, consult equipment
manufacturer for special lubrication instructions.
Temperature
TABLE 6 The bearing temperature will increase after start-up until its
Oil Volume * normal operating level is reached. Some fluctation due to
RT Fluid
SLEEVOIL
ambient temperature change is normal but a drastic
Ounces Quarts Liters
Size Approx. Approx. Approx. change MUST be investigated. Normal running
7
3 /16 56 1.75 1.66 temperature should not exceed 180F. (Check with
15
3 /16
7
64 2 1.89 equipment manufacturer to see if another operating
4 /16 80 2.5 2.37 temperature has been specified.)
15
4 /16 128 4 3.79
7
5 /16 152 4.75 4.49 Low ambient and operating temperatures can be as
6 224 7 6.62 harmful to the bearing as high temperatures. A heater and
7 336 10.5 9.94 thermoswitch would be required for such applications.
8 416 13 12.30
9 608 19 17.98 Minimum Temperature at Start Up:
10 896 28 26.50 SAE 10/ISO 32 oil, 45F
12 1440 45 42.59 SAE 20/ISO 68 oil, 70F
* Volume of oil reqd to fill pillow block to top of CENTER CIRCLE of oil gauge.
32 fluid ounces = 1 quart = 94636 Liters
SAE 30/ISO 100 oil, 85F
If noise develops, check alignment of housing, plunger Heaters are intended to heat the oil in the sump prior to
screw and all operating parts. Check all points and tighten start-up and should be shut off when the fan stops running.
screws and nuts after several days operation. Maintain oil ATTENTION
level above bottom of center circle at all times while
If heaters are used, be sure heaters are off when oil
unit is in operation.
is removed from bearing.
Oil Maintenance Schedule
Drain, flush, and refill with oil after 2 to 3 weeks of initial
break-in operation. Since the satisfactory operation of the
bearing depends entirely on an oil film being maintained
between the shaft and the bearing liner surface, it is
recommended that an oil analysis be performed at these
regular intervals. Vibration
Every 3 months for 24 hour/day service Any significant vibration or imbalance MUST be corrected.
Every 6 months for 8 hour/day service Check with equipment manufacturer for acceptable
Acceptably of oil should be referred to the lubricant conditions.
manufacturer. If oil quality is acceptable then repeat this
9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 191/458
 SLEEVOIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS

No. Replacement Part Number

Item Description
Reqd 37/16 315/16 47/16 415/16 57/16 6* 7* 8* 9* 10* 12*
RTL Non-Exp. Pillow Block (A) 132362 132363 132364 132365 132366 132367 132368 132369 132370 132371 132372
RTL Exp. Pillow Block (B) 132474 132475 132476 132477 132383 132384 132385 132386 132387 132388 132389
RTL Modular Housing 132373 132374 132397 132398 132399 132411 132412 132413 132414 132437 132438
RTL Housing Mach* 1 132379 132380 132381 132382 132390 132391 132392 132393 132394 132395 132396
12 Drain Plug 1 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430014 430014 430014
14 Housing Bolt 4 411189 411190 411196 411197 411205 411205 411224 411227 411228 411229 411230
Gasket Eliminator-515 1 427359 427359 427359 .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
16 Gasket Eliminator-515 2 .... .... .... 427359 427359 427359 427359 427359 427359 427359 427359
18 Oil Gage 1 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135 430135
19 Oil Level Plug 1 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014
20 Inspection Cover 2 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198 432198
22 Plunger Screw Assembly 1 390522 390522 390525 391095 390571 390571 390572 391089 391092 391607 391607
24 Plunger Screw Nul 1 133368 133368 133369 133369 133369 133369 133369 133370 133370 133371 133371
* RTL Grommet Kit 1 132645 132646 132646 132647 132647 132647 132647 132648 132648 132649 132650
26 RTL Grommet 2 133023 133035 133035 133037 133037 133037 133037 133012 133012 133039 133010
28 RTL Grommet Plate 2 133028 133045 133045 133047 133047 133047 133047 133029 133029 133143 133011
30 RTL Bushing (Locktube) 4 133167 133170 133170 133172 133172 133172 133172 132210 132210 133168 133179
32 RTL Locknut 8 464923 460964 460964 460965 460965 460965 460965 463617 463617 464927 464926
34 Oil Ring 2 130056 130057 130058 130059 130060 130078 130065 130066 130068 130073 130071
36 Clamp Seal Assy 2 132181 132182 132183 132184 132185 132186 132187 132188 132189 132190 132191
38 O-Ring 2 418016 418020 418024 418028 418032 418038 418045 418052 418057 418059 418061
42 Rtl Liner Assy* 1 132420 132421 132422 132423 132424 132425 132426 132427 132428 132429 132430
44 RTL Coolant Pipe 4 430194 430171 430171 430176 430176 430176 430176 430191 430191 430182 430192
Dowel Pin 2 420053 420053 420053 420053 420053 420053 420088 420088 420088 4201188 420118
Cap Screw 417095 417095 417093 417095 417093 417117 417184 417184 417184 417260 417260
Non-Expansion Accessories
Thrust Plate Kit 1 132218 132219 132220 132221 132222 132223 132224 132225 132226 132227 132228
Split Thrust Collar 1 132151 132152 132153 132154 132155 132156 132157 132158 132159 132160 132161
Optional Accessories
Auxillary Seal Kit 2 132811 432181 432184 432187 133932 133933 133937 133938 132814 132816 132819
Housing End Cap Kit 1 132542 432190 432193 432196 132546 132547 132548 132549 132564 132565 132566
45 Circulating Oil Intet[??162] Plug 2 430014 430014 430014 430014 430014 430016 430016 430016 430016 430016 430016
46 Circulating Oil Drain Plug 1 430018 430018 430018 430019 430019 430019 430019 430019 430019 430022 430022
Circulating Oil Grommet Kit 1 132203 132203 132203 132203 132203 132205 132205 132205 132205 132205 132205
Vibration Det. Adpt Kit 1 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153 430153
48 Thermostat Plug 1 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012 430012
Thermostat 1 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116 133116
50 Heater Plug 1 430014 430016 430016 430017 430017 430017 430017 430017 430017 430017 430017
Heater 1 132836 132838 132838 132839 132839 132839 132840 132840 132840 132840 132840
* These parts are assemblies and include the parts listed below them marked .
These parts make up the assembles under which they are listed.
Not shown on drawing.
2 required for sizes 37/16" thru 6", 4 required for sizes 7" thru 12".
Clamp seal assembly does not include O-Ring. Order O-Ring by individual part number.
(A) Non-Expansion Pil Bik includes modular hsg, liner assy. thrust plate kit, and split thrust collar.
(B) Expansion Pil Bik includes modular hsg and liner assy.

These SLEEVOIL housings and liners have nameplates near an oil ring inspection hole. Housing nameplates are
attached beginning June of 1988 identified by a six-digit pinned to the housing foot parallel to the shaft. Refer to
part number which fully identifies the housing and/or liner. these part numbers when ordering replacement parts.
Liner nameplates are pinned to the SLEEVOIL liner cap

10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 192/458
www.baldor.com www.ptplace.com www.dodge-pt.com www.reliance.com

Baldor Electric Company Headquarters

P.O. Box 2400, Fort Smith, AR 72902-2400 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 479.648.5792, Fax (1) 479.648.5792, International Fax (1) 479.648.5895
DODGE/Reliance Division
6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 864.297.4800, FAX: (1) 864.281.2433
IM499970 04/07 Copyright 2007 Baldor Electric Company All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
This material is not intended to provide operational instructions. Appropriate instruction
manuals and precautions should be studied prior to installation, operation or maintenance of
equipment.

11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 193/458
 AUMA ELECTRIC MULTI-TURN ACTUATOR
Installation and Maintenace Manual

AUMA ELECTRICO MULTI-ROTATIVO ACTIVADOR

Manual de Instalacion y mantenimiento de ventilador

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 194/458

 Electric multi-turn actuators
SA 07.1 SA 30.1
SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls
AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

ISO 9001
ISO 14001
Certificate Registration No.
12 100 4269
12 104 4269
Operation instructions
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 195/458
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

Scope of these instructions: These instructions are valid for multi-turn actuators of the type range SA(R)
07.1 SA(R) 30.1 with the controls AM 01.1 / AM 02.1. These operation
instructions are only valid for clockwise closing, i.e. driven shaft turns
clockwise to the valve.

Table of contents Page

1. Safety instructions 4
1.1 Range of application 4
1.2 Commissioning (electrical connection) 4
1.3 Maintenance 4
1.4 Warnings and notes 4
2. Short description 4
3. Technical data 5
4. Additional information to the wiring diagram legend 8
5. Transport, storage and packaging 9
5.1 Transport 9
5.2 Storage 9
5.3 Packaging 9
6. Mounting to valve/ gearbox 10
7. Manual operation 12
8. Electrical connection 13
8.1 Connection with AUMA plug/ socket connector 13
8.2 AUMA MATIC on wall bracket (accessory) 14
8.3 Heater 14
8.4 Motor protection 14
8.5 Remote position transmitter 14
8.6 Fitting the cover 14
9. Opening the switch compartment 15
9.1 Removing the switch compartment cover 15
9.2 Pulling off the indicator disc (option) 15
10. Setting the limit switching 16
10.1 Setting end position CLOSED (black section) 16
10.2 Setting end position OPEN (white section) 16
10.3 Checking the limit switches 16
11. Setting the DUO limit switching (option) 17
11.1 Setting the direction CLOSE (black section) 17
11.2 Setting the direction OPEN (white section) 17
11.3 Checking the DUO switches 17
12. Setting the torque switching 18
12.1 Setting 18
12.2 Checking the torque switches 18
13. Test run 19
13.1 Check direction of rotation 19
13.2 Check limit switching setting 20
13.3 Checking the type of seating 20
14. Setting the potentiometer (option) 21
15. Setting of electronic position transmitter RWG (option) 22
15.1 Setting for 2-wire system 4 - 20 mA and 3- /4-wire system 0 20 mA 23
15.2 Setting for 3- / 4- wire system 4 20 mA 24
16. Setting the mechanical position indicator (option) 25

2 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 196/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

Page
17. Closing the switch compartment 25
18. Actuator controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 26
18.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version) 26
18.2 Programming the logic board 27
18.3 EMERGENCY OPEN and EMERGENCY CLOSE signal (option) 28
19. Electronic positioner (option) 29
19.1 Technical data 29
19.2 Programming 29
19.2.1 Setting the type of signal 30
19.2.2 Setting actuator behaviour on loss of signal 31
19.3 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (standard version) 32
19.4 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (standard version) 33
19.5 Setting of the sensitivity 33
19.6 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (inverse operation) 35
19.7 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (inverse operation) 36
19.8 Positioner in Split Range version (option) 37
19.8.1 Split Range: description of functions 37
19.8.2 Programming 37
19.8.3 Positioner adjustment for Split Range 37
20. Timer (option) 39
20.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs (timer) 39
20.2 Setting start and end of stepping mode via DUO limit switching (option) 40
20.3 Setting ON and OFF times 41
21. Fuses 42
22. Enclosure protection IP 68 (option) 43
23. Applications in Ex Zone 22 (option) 44
24. Maintenance 45
25. Lubrication 45
26. Disposal and recycling 45
27. Service 45
28. Spare parts list multi-turn actuator SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1 46
29. Spare parts list controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 48
30. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation 50
Index 51
Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives 52

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 197/458 3

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA actuators are designed for the operation of industrial valves, e.g.
globe valves, gate valves, butterfly valves and ball valves. For other
applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for any
possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated
applications. Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the
controls/ actuators designated use.

1.2 Commissioning During electrical operation, certain parts inevitably carry lethal voltages.
(electrical connection) Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be carried out by a
skilled electrician himself or by specially instructed personnel under the
control and supervision of such an electrician and in accordance with the
applicable electrical engineering rules.

1.3 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 45) must be observed,
otherwise a safe operation of the actuator is no longer guaranteed.

1.4 Warnings and notes Non-observance of the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting, and installation, as well as
careful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe
operation.
During operation, the multi-turn actuator warms up and surface
temperatures > 60 C may occur. Check the surface temperature prior to
contact in order to avoid burns.

The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant

procedures in these operation instructions. Each is marked by the
appropriate pictograph.
This pictograph means: Note!
Note marks activities or procedures which have major influence on the
correct operation. Non-observance of these notes may lead to
consequential damage.
This pictograph means: Electrostatically endangered parts!
If this pictograph is attached to a printed circuit board, it contains parts
which may be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic discharges. If the
boards need to be touched during setting, measurement, or for exchange, it
must be assured that immediately before a discharge through contact with
an earthed metallic surface (e.g. the housing) has taken place.
This pictograph means: Warning!
Warning marks activities or procedures which, if not carried out correctly,
can affect the safety of persons or material.

2. Short description AUMA multi-turn actuators type SA(R) 07.1 SA(R) 30.1 have a modular
design. The actuators are driven by an electric motor and operated with the
controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1, which are included in the scope of supply. The
limitation of travel is realised via limit switches in both end positions. Torque
seating is also possible in both end positions. The type of seating is
determined by the valve manufacturer.

4 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 198/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

3. Technical data
Table 1: Multi-turn actuator with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Features and functions
Type of duty 1) Standard: SA Short time duty S2 15 min
SAR Intermittent duty S4 25 %
Option: SA Short time duty S2 30 min
SAR Intermittent duty S4 50 %
Intermittent duty S5 - 25 %
Motors Standard: 3-ph AC asynchronous motor, type IM B9 according to IEC 34
Option: Special motors
Insulation class Standard: F, tropicalized
Option: H, tropicalized
Motor protection Standard: Thermoswitches (NC)
Option: PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44082)
Self-locking yes (for output speeds from 4 to 90 rpm)
Limit switching Counter gear mechanism for end positions CLOSED and OPEN
for 1 to 500 turns per stroke (optional for 1 to 5,000 turns per stroke)
Standard: Single switch (1 NC and 1 NO) for each end position:
Options: Tandem switch (2 NC and 2 NO) for each end position, switches galvanically isolated
Triple switch (3 NC and 3 NO) for each end position, switches galvanically isolated
Intermediate position switch (DUO limit switching)
Torque switching Adjustable torque switching for direction OPEN and CLOSE
Standard: Single switch (1 NC and 1 NO) for each direction
Options: Tandem switch (2 NC and 2 NO) for each direction, switches galvanically isolated
Position feedback signal, Potentiometer or 0/4 20 mA
analogue (options) For further details see separate data sheet
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Running indication Blinker transmitter (for SA standard, for SAR option)
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Resistance type heater, 5 W, 24 V DC
Option: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 20 W
110 250 V DC/AC or 24 48 V DC/AC
Motor heater (option) SA(R) 07.1 10.1: 12.5 W
SA(R) 14.1 16.1: 25 W
SA(R) 25.1 30.1: 50 W
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during
electrical operation.
Option: Handwheel lockable
Connection to controls AUMA plug/ socket connector with screw type connection
Output drive types A, B1, B2, B3, B4 according to EN ISO 5210
A, B, D, E according to DIN 3210
C according to DIN 3338
Special output drives: AF, AK, AG, IB1, IB3

Supply voltage Refer to name shield of actuator controls

External supply of the electronics 24 V DC + 20 % / 15 %,
(option) Current consumption: basic version approx. 200 mA, with options up to 500 mA
Switchgear Standard: Reversing contactors2) (mechanically and electrically interlocked)
for motor power up to 1.5 kW
Options: Reversing contactors2) (mechanically and electrically interlocked)
for motor power up to 7.5 kW
Thyristor unit (recommended for modulating actuators)
for motor power up to 1.5 kW, 500 V AC with internal fuses for motor power
up to 5.5 kW, 500 V AC, external fuse required
Control Standard: Control inputs 24 V DC, OPEN STOP CLOSE (via opto-isolator,
with one common), current consumption: approx. 10 mA per input
Observe min. duration of impulse for modulating actuators
Option: Control inputs 220 V DC, OPEN STOP CLOSE (via opto-isolator,
with one common), current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input

1) Based on 20 C ambient temperature and at an average load with running torque according to Technical data SA or SAR.
2) The lifetime guaranteed by the manufacturer amounts to min. 2 million cycles. If a higher number of switching cycles are to be expected, thyristor units with
virtually unlimited lifetime should be used.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 199/458 5

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

Output signals Standard:

5 output relays with gold-plated contacts:
4 potential-free NO contacts with one common: max. 250 V AC, 0.5 A (resistive load)
Standard configuration:
End position OPEN, end position CLOSED, selector switch REMOTE,
selector switch LOCAL
1 potential-free change-over contact, max. 250 V AC, 0.5A (resistive
load) for collective fault signal
Standard configuration:
Torque fault, phase failure, motor protection tripped
Option: Signals in connection with positioner
End position OPEN, end position CLOSED (requires tandem switch for actuator)
Selector switch REMOTE, selector switch LOCAL via selector switch 2nd level
1 potential-free change-over contact, max. 250 V AC, 0.5A (resistive
load) for collective fault signal
Standard configuration:
Torque fault, phase failure, motor protection tripped
Voltage output Standard: Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 50 mA for supply of the control inputs,
galvanically isolated from internal voltage supply
Option: Auxiliary voltage 115 V AC, max. 30 mA for supply of the control inputs3),
galvanically isolated from internal voltage supply
Local controls Standard: Selector switch LOCAL OFF REMOTE (lockable in all three positions)
Push-buttons OPEN STOP CLOSE
3 indication lights:
End position CLOSED (yellow), Collective fault signal (red),
End position OPEN (green)
Option: Protection cover, lockable
Functions Standard: Type of seating adjustable
limit or torque seating for end position OPEN and end position CLOSED
Overload protection against excessive torques over the whole travel
Excessive torque (torque error) can be excluded
from collective fault signal
Phase failure monitoring with automatic phase correction
Push-to-run operation or self-retaining in REMOTE
Push-to-run operation or self-retaining in LOCAL
Blinker transmitter signal can be switched on or off by actuator (option)
Options: Positioner4):
Nominal position value via analogue input E1 = 0/4 -20 mA
Adjustable behaviour on loss of signal
Adjustable sensitivity (dead band) and pause time
Split Range operation
Motor protection evaluation Standard: Motor temperature monitoring in combination with thermoswitches
in the actuator motor
Options: Additional thermal overload relay in the controls
PTC tripping device in combination with PTC thermistors in the actuator motor
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: Metric threads
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram according to commission number included in delivery
Further options for version with RWG in the actuator
Position feedback Analogue output E2 = 0/4 20 mA (load max. 500 )
(option) Galvanic isolator for analogue output E2

3) Not possible in combination with PTC tripping device

4) Requires position transmitter in actuator

6 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 200/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 67
to EN 60 5295) Options: IP 68
IP 67-DS (Double Sealed)
IP 68-DS (Double Sealed)
(Double Sealed = terminal compartment additionally sealed against interior)
Corrosion protection Standard: KN suitable for installation in industrial units,
in water or power plants with a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with
high humidity and high pollutant concentration
KX-G same as KX, however aluminium-free version (outer parts)
Finish coating Standard: two-component iron-mica combination.
Colour Standard: silver-grey (DB 701, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: SA 25 C to + 70 C
SAR 25 C to + 60 C
Options: SA 40 C to + 60 C (low temperature)
SAR 40 C to + 60 C (low temperature)
Vibration resistance6) 1 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
according to EN 60068-2-6
Lifetime7) Type Operating cycles (OPENCLOSEOPEN)
with 30 turns per stroke
SA 07.1 SA 10.1 20,000
SA 14.1 SA 16.1 15,000
SA 25.1 SA 30.1 10,000

Type Starts in Number of starts per hour based on S4 25 %, for an

millions expected lifetime of a minimum of operation hours

min. 5,000 h 10,000 h 20,000 h

SAR 07.1 SAR 10.1 5.0 1,000 500 250
SAR 14.1 SAR 14.5 3.5 700 350 175
SAR 16.1 3.5 600 300 150
SAR 25.1 SAR 30.1 2.5 300 250 125

Weight Multi-turn actuator: refer to Technical data SA/SAR

Actuator controls: approx. 7 kg (with AUMA plug/ socket connector)
Accessories
Wall bracket8) AUMA MATIC mounted separately from the actuator, including plug/ socket connector.
Connecting cables on request.
Recommended for high ambient temperatures, difficult access, or in case of heavy
vibrations during service.
Other information
EC directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (89/336/EEC)
Low Voltage Directive: (73/23/EEC)
Machinery Directive: (98/37/EC)
Reference documents Product description Electric multi-turn actuators SA
Product description, Actuator controls AUMA MATIC
Dimension sheets Dimensions actuators with integral controls AUMA MATIC
Technical data sheets SA/SAR
Technical data AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Electrical data sheets SA/SAR

5) For 3-phase asynchronous motors in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended. Additionally, for enclosure
protection IP 68, we recommend to use the double sealed terminal compartment DS.
For special motors, the enclosure protection according to the name plate applies.
6) For standard version SA(R) 07.1 SA(R) 16.1 in combination with the actuator controls AM 01.1
7) The lifetime in operation hours (h) depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the modulating accuracy. To
reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operation time, the number of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.
8) Cable length between actuator and AUMA MATIC max. 100 m. Not suitable for version with potentiometer in the actuator. Instead of the potentiometer, an
RWG has to be used within the actuator.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 201/458 7

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

4. Additional information to the wiring diagram legend

Information A: A running indication is possible if blinker transmitter (S5) is installed
(opening and closing of contacts).
Direction CLOSE: Connections XK 6 XK 7
Direction OPEN: Connections XK 6 XK 8
Contacts remain closed in end position.
When connected to an external PLC, the blinking signal can be switched off
via DIP switches (Table 7, page 27).

Information B: The type of seating in the end positions is determined by the valve
manufacturer. The setting is done at the programming switches S1 2 and
S3 2 (see page 27). The tripping of a torque switch in an intermediate
position switches off the actuator and gives a fault signal.
The limit switches are used for signalisation when switching off by torque
seating. They need to be set so that the appropriate switch is tripped shortly
before reaching the end position. If the torque switch trips before the limit
switch, the actuator is switched off and a fault signal is generated.
For further programming possibilities, e.g. self-retaining in operation mode
REMOTE, see table 7, page 27.

Information D: The following faults are registered and can be transmitted to the control
room as a potential-free collective fault signal:

- Power failure
- Phase failure
- Motor protection tripped
- Torque switch tripped in mid-travel.
This signal can be switched off on the logic board, see table 7, page 27.

Information E: Input signals according to DIN 19 240.

The nominal operation current of inputs XK 2; XK 3 and XK 4 amounts to
10 15 mA. If the internal voltage 24 V DC is used for remote control, it must
only be connected via potential-free contacts.

Information F: In case of wrong phase sequence, the rotating field is automatically

adjusted. In case of a phase failure, the actuator stops. The fault is indicated
at LED V14 on the interface board (see page 26). For collective fault signal,
see information D.

Information G: Potential-free contacts are available for signals. The internal control voltage
(XK 11 / + 24 V and XK 5 / 24V) must not be used for external lamps,
relays etc.

8 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 202/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

5. Transport, storage and packaging

5.1 Transport .. For transport to place of installation, use sturdy packaging.
Do not attach ropes or hooks to the handwheel for the purpose of lifting by

. hoist.
If multi-turn actuator is mounted on valve, attach ropes or hooks for the
purpose of lifting by hoist to valve and not to multi-turn actuator.

Fitting the handwheel: For transport purposes, handwheels from a diameter of 400 mm are
supplied separately.

Engage manual operation prior to mounting the handwheel!

If the manual operation is not engaged, damage can occur at
the change-over mechanism.

. Engage manual operation (figure A-1):

Manually lift the red change-over lever while slightly turning the shaft back
and forth until manual operation engages. The manual operation is
correctly engaged if the change-over lever can be lifted by approx. 85.

Manual force is sufficient for operating the change-over

lever. It is not necessary to use an extension. Excessive
force may damage the change-over mechanism.

.. Slip handwheel over the red change-over lever on shaft (figure A-2).
Secure handwheel using the circlip supplied.
Figure A-1 Figure A-2

85

5.2 Storage .. Store in well-ventilated, dry room.

Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on

.. a wooden pallet.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bright surfaces.

If multi-turn actuators are to be stored for a long time (more than 6 months),
the following points must be observed additionally:

. Prior to storage: Protect bright surfaces, in particular the output drive parts

. and mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.

Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of
corrosion show, apply new corrosion protection.

After mounting, connect actuator immediately to electrical

system, so that the heater prevents condensation.

5.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works.
The packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can
easily be separated and recycled.
We use the following packaging materials: wood, cardboard, paper and PE
foil. For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling
and collection centres.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 203/458 9

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

6. Mounting to valve/ gearbox . Prior to mounting, the multi-turn actuator must be checked
for damage. Damaged parts must be replaced by original

. spare parts.
After mounting, check multi-turn actuator for damage to
paint finish. If damage to paint-finish have occurred after
mounting, they have to be touched up to avoid corrosion.

Mounting is most easily done with the valve shaft/ gearbox shaft pointing
vertically upward. But mounting is also possible in any other position.
The multi-turn actuator leaves the factory in position CLOSED (limit switch
CLOSED operated).

. Check if mounting flange fits the valve/ gearbox.

Spigot at flanges should be loose fit!

The output drive types B1, B2, B3, or B4 (figure A-3) are delivered with bore
and keyway (usually according to ISO 5210).
Figure A-3
Output drive type B1/ B2 Output drive type B3/ B4
Plug sleeve Bore with keyway

For output drive type A (figure B-1), the internal thread of the stem nut must
match the thread of the valve stem. If not ordered explicitly with thread, the
stem nut is unbored or with pilot bore when delivered. For finish machining

..
of stem nut refer to next page.
Check whether bore and keyway match the input shaft of valve/ gearbox.
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at multi-turn actuator and valve/

..
gearbox.
Apply a small quantity of grease to input shaft of valve/ gearbox.
Place actuator on valve/ gearbox and fasten. Fasten bolts (at least quality
8.8, refer to table 2) evenly crosswise.

Table 2: Fastening torque for bolts

Strength class 8.8 TA (Nm)
M 8 25
M 10 50
M 12 87
M 16 220
M 20 420

10 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 204/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

Finish machining of stem nut (output drive type A):

Figure B-1
Output drive type A
Stem nut

80.3

80.01/80.02

80.2

The output drive flange does not have to be removed from the actuator.

.. Remove spigot ring (80.2, figure B-1) from mounting flange.

Take off stem nut (80.3) together with thrust bearing (80.01) and thrust

.. bearing races (80.02).

Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing races from stem nut.
Drill and bore stem nut and cut thread.

.. When fixing in the chuck, make sure stem nut runs true!
Clean the machined stem nut.
Apply Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease to thrust bearing and races,

. then place them on stem nut.

Re-insert stem nut with thrust bearings into the mounting flange. Ensure

.. that dogs are placed correctly in the slots of the hollow shaft.
Screw in spigot ring until it is firm against the shoulder.
Press Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease on mineral oil base into the
grease nipple with a grease gun (for quantities, please refer to table):

Table 3: Grease quantities for lubricating bearings

Output A 07.2 A 10.2 A 14.2 A 16.2 A 25.2 A 30.2 A 35.2 A 40.2 A 48.2
drive
Qty1) 1.5 g 2g 3g 5g 10 g 14 g 20 g 25 g 30 g
1) For grease with a density = 0.9 kg/dm

.
Protection tube for rising valve stem
Protection tubes may be supplied loose. Seal thread with hemp, Teflon

..tape, or thread sealing material.

Screw protection tube (1) into thread (figure B-2) and tighten it firmly.

.Push down the sealing (2) to the housing.

Check whether cap (3) is available and without damage.
Figure B-2: Protection tube for rising valve stem

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 205/458 11

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

7. Manual operation The actuator may be operated manually for purposes of setting and
commissioning, and in case of motor failure or power failure.
Manual operation is engaged by an internal change-over mechanism.

Engaging manual operation: . Lift up change-over lever in the centre of the handwheel to approx. 85,
while slightly turning the handwheel back and forth until manual operation
engages (figure C).

Figure C Figure D

Manual force is sufficient for operating the change-over

lever. It is not necessary to use an extension. Excessive
force may damage the change-over mechanism.

. Release change-over lever (should snap back into initial position by spring
action, figure D), if necessary, push it back manually.

Operating the change-over lever while the motor is running

(figure E) can lead to increased wear at the change-over
mechanism.

Figure E Figure F

. Turn handwheel into desired direction (figure F).

Disengaging manual operation: Manual operation is automatically disengaged, when the motor is started
again. The handwheel does not rotate during motor operation.

12 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 206/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

8. Electrical connection Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be

carried out by a skilled electrician himself or by specially
instructed personnel under the control and supervision of
such an electrician and in accordance with the applicable
electrical engineering rules.

In case the actuator controls are equipped with a fieldbus interface (Profibus
DP, Modbus, or DeviceNet), refer to the operation instructions of the
respective fieldbus for a description of the bus and electrical connection.

Make sure to respect electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) when installing

cables:
Signal and bus cables are susceptible to interference.

.
Electric power cables, in particular motor cables, are interference sources.
Lay cables being susceptible to interference or sources of interference at the

. highest possible distance from each other.

The interference immunity of signal and bus cables increases if the cables

. are laid close to the ground potential.

If possible, avoid layong long cables and make sure that they are installed

. in areas being subject to low interference.

Avoid long parallel paths with cables being susceptible to interference or
interference sources.

8.1 Connection with AUMA plug/ socket connector

. Check whether type of current, supply voltage, and frequency correspond

Figure G-1: Connection
.. to motor data (refer to name plate at motor).
Loosen bolts (50.01) (figure G-1) and remove plug cover.
50.0 . Loosen screws (51.01) and remove socket carrier (51.0) from plug cover (50.0).
Insert cable glands suitable for connecting cables.
(The enclosure protection indicated on the name plate is only ensured if
50.01 .. suitable cable glands are used).
Seal cable entries which are not used with suitable plugs.

51.0
. Connect cables according to order-related wiring diagram.
The wiring diagram applicable to the actuator is attached to the
handwheel in a weather-proof bag, together with the operation
instructions. In case the wiring diagram is not available, it can be obtained
51.01 from AUMA (state commission no., refer to name plate) or downloaded
directly from the Internet (www.auma.com).

Figure G-2: Parking frame (accessories)

A special parking frame (figure G-2) for protection against touching the bare
contacts and against environmental influences is available.

Parking frame

Table 4: Technical data AUMA plug/ socket connector

Technical data Power terminals 1) Protective earth Control pins
No. of contacts. 6 (3 are used) 1 (leading contact) 50 pins/ sockets
Marking U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2 according to VDE 1 to 50
Voltage max. 750 V 250 V
Nominal current max. 25 A 16 A
Type of customer connections Screws Screws for ring lug Screws
Cross section max. 6 mm2 6 mm2 2.5 mm2
Material: Pin/ socket carrier Polyamide Polyamide Polyamide
Contacts Brass (Ms) Brass (Ms) Brass, tin-plated or gold-plated (option)
1) Suitable for copper wires. For aluminium wires, it is necessary to contact AUMA.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 207/458 13

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

8.2 AUMA MATIC on wall bracket (accessory)

Figure G-3: AM on wall bracket The AUMA MATIC can also be mounted separately from the actuator on a

.
wall bracket.
For the connection of actuator and AUMA MATIC on wall bracket, use
suitable flexible and screened connecting cables.

.(Connecting cables are available on request)

Permissible distance between actuator and AUMA MATIC amounts to a

.max. of 100 m.
Versions with potentiometer in the actuator are not suitable. Instead of the

.potentiometer, an RWG has to be used in the actuator.

Connect the wires in correct phase sequence.
Check the direction of rotation before switching on (see page 19).

Connecting cable to actuator

8.3 Heater AUMA multi-turn actuators have a heater installed as standard. Unless
ordered otherwise, the heater is internally supplied.

8.4 Motor protection In order to protect against overheating and impermissibly high temperatures
at the actuator, PTC thermistors or thermoswitches are embedded in the
motor winding. The thermoswitch is tripped as soon as the max. permissible
winding temperature has been reached.

8.5 Remote position transmitter For the connection of remote position transmitters (potentiometer, RWG)
screened cables must be used.

8.6 Fitting the cover After connection:

. Insert the socket carrier (51.0) into the plug cover (50.0) and fasten it with

.. screws (51.01).
Clean sealing faces at the plug cover and the housing.

.. Check whether O-ring is in good condition.

Apply a thin film of non-acidic grease (e.g. Vaseline) to the sealing faces.

. Replace plug cover (50.0) and fasten bolts (50.01) evenly crosswise.
Fasten cable glands with the specified torque to ensure the required
enclosure protection.

14 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 208/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

9. Opening the switch To be able to carry out the following settings (clauses 10. to 16.), the switch
compartment compartment must be opened and, if installed, the indicator disc must be
removed.

These settings are only valid for clockwise closing, i.e. driven shaft turns
clockwise to close the valve.

Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be

carried out by a skilled electrician himself or by specially
instructed personnel under the control and supervision of
such an electrician and in accordance with the applicable
electrical engineering rules.

9.1 Removing the switch compartment cover

. Remove 4 bolts and take off the cover at the switch compartment
(figures H).
Figure H-1: Cover with indicator glass Figure H-2: Cover without indicator glass

Bolts

9.2 Pulling off the indicator disc (option)

. If installed, pull off indicator disc (figure J). Open end wrench
(approx. 14 mm) may be used as lever.

Figure J: Pulling off the indicator disc

RSD

RDW

Indicator disc

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 209/458 15

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

10. Setting the limit switching

10.1 Setting end position CLOSED (black section)

.. Turn handwheel clockwise until valve is closed.

After having reached the end position, turn back handwheel by
approximately a turn (overrun). During test run check overrun and, if

. necessary, correct setting of the limit switching.

Press down and turn setting spindle A (figure K-1) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer B.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer B moves 90 every time.
When pointer B is 90 from mark C, continue turning slowly. When pointer
B has reached the mark C, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.

Figure K-1: Control unit

T P

B E

C F

A D
10.2 Setting end position OPEN (white section)

. Turn handwheel counterclockwise until valve is open, then turn back by

. approximately a turn.
Press down and turn setting spindle D (figure K-1) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer E.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer E moves 90 every time.
When pointer E is 90 from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
E has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.

10.3 Checking the limit switches The red test buttons T and P (figure K-1) are used for manual operation of
the limit switches.

.. Turning T in direction of the arrow LSC (WSR) triggers limit switch CLOSED.
Turning P in direction of the arrow LSO (WL) triggers limit switch OPEN.

16 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 210/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

11. Setting the DUO limit switching (option)

Any application can be switched on or off via the two intermediate position
switches.

For setting, the switching point (intermediate position) must

be approached from the same direction as afterwards in
electrical operation.

11.1 Setting the direction CLOSE (black section)

.. Move valve to desired intermediate position.

Press down and turn setting spindle G (figure K-2) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer H.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer H moves 90 every time.
When pointer H is 90 from mark C, continue turning slowly. When pointer
H has reached the mark C, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.

Figure K-2: Control unit

T P

C F

H L
G K

..
11.2 Setting the direction OPEN (white section)
Move valve to desired intermediate position.
Press down and turn setting spindle K (figure K-2) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer L.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer L moves 90 every time.
When pointer L is 90 from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
L has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.
11.3 Checking the DUO switches The red test buttons T and P (figure K-2) are used for manual operation of

.
the DUO limit switches.
Turning T in direction of the arrow LSC (WSR) triggers DUO limit switch

. CLOSED. The torque switch CLOSED is actuated at the same time.

Turning P in direction of the arrow TSO (DL) triggers DUO limit switch

. OPEN. The torque switch OPEN is actuated at the same time.

After checking the switches, the fault (red indication light) has to be reset
using the OPEN or CLOSE push-buttons of the local controls for operation
in the opposite direction.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 211/458 17

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

12. Setting the torque switching

12.1 Setting .. The set torque must suit the valve!

This setting should only be changed with the consent of
the valve manufacturer!

Figure L: Torque switching heads

Setting CLOSED Setting OPEN

O P O P

.. Loosen both lock screws O at the torque dial (figure L).

Turn torque dial P to set it to the required torque (1 da Nm = 10 Nm).
Example:
Figure L shows the following setting:
3.5 da Nm = 35 Nm for direction CLOSE

. Tighten lock screws O again

4.5 da Nm = 45 Nm for direction OPEN

. The torque switches can also be operated in manual

. operation.
The torque switching acts as overload protection over full
travel, also when stopping in the end positions by limit
switching.

12.2 Checking the torque switches

The red test buttons T and P (figure K-2) are used for manual operation of
the torque switches:

. Turning T in direction of the arrow TSC (DSR) triggers torque switch CLOSED.

. The red indication light (fault) on the local controls is illuminated.

Turning P in direction of the arrow TSO (DL) triggers torque switch OPEN.

. The red indication light (fault) on the local controls is illuminated.

If a DUO limit switching (optional) is installed in the actuator, the

. intermediate position switches will be operated at the same time.

After checking the switches, the fault (red indication light) has to be reset
using the OPEN or CLOSE push-buttons of the local controls for operation
in the opposite direction.

18 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 212/458


Operation instructions
13. Test run
13.1 Check direction of rotation
CLOSED
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
This check is only necessary for mounting on wall bracket and if the motor
controls have been separately mounted in the control box (motors 7.5 kW).
When the AM 01.1/AM 02.1 controls are mounted directly to the actuator,
the automatic phase correction ensures the correct direction of rotation,
even if the phases are crossed over during electrical installation.
. If provided, place indicator disc on shaft.
The direction of rotation of the indicator disc (figure M-1) indicates the
. direction of rotation of the output drive.
If there is no indicator disc, the direction of rotation can also be observed
on the hollow shaft. For this, remove screw plug (no. 27) (figure M-2).
Figure M-1: Indicator disc Figure M-2: Opening the hollow shaft
OPEN 27
S1/S2
.. Move actuator manually to intermediate position.
Set selector switch to local control (I)(figure M-3).
Figure M-3: Selector switch on local control
.. Switch on the voltage supply.
Operate push-button CLOSE (figure M-4) and observe the direction of
rotation:
Figure M-4 Push-button CLOSE Figure M-5: Push-button STOP
If the direction of rotation is wrong, switch off immediately
using the push-button Stop (figure M-5) or by turning both test
buttons T and P (figure K-2) in any direction.
Afterwards, correct phase sequence in the connecting cable from
the wall bracket to the actuator and repeat test run.
Table 5:
Direction of rotation of the indicator disc:
counterclockwise correct
Direction of rotation of the hollow shaft:
clockwise correct
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 213/458 19
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

13.2 Check limit switching setting

. Set selector switch to position OFF (0) (figure M-6).
Figure M-6: Selector switch on local controls

The control voltage of the reversing contactors is

interrupted in position OFF. The controls power supply is
maintained.

.. Move actuator manually to both end positions of the valve.

Check if limit switching is set correctly for both end positions. Hereby
observe that the appropriate switch is tripped in each end position and
released again after the direction of rotation is changed. If this is not the
case, the limit switching must be set anew.

..
When limit switching is set correctly:
Set selector switch to local control (I)(figure M-3).
Perform test run at the local controls via push-buttons
OPEN STOP CLOSE.

13.3 Checking the type of seating The valve manufacturer states whether switching off in the end positions

.
should be by limit switch (limit seating) or torque switch (torque seating).
For checking the setting, refer to page 27, subclause 18.2.

.
If no other options (clauses 14. to 16.) require setting:
Close switch compartment (see page 25, clause 17.).

20 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 214/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

14. Setting the potentiometer (option)

For remote indication

.. Move valve to end position CLOSED.

. If installed, pull off indicator disc.

Turn potentiometer (E2) clockwise until stop is felt.

. End position CLOSED corresponds to 0 %, end position OPEN to 100 %.

Turn potentiometer (E2) slightly back from the stop.

Due to the ratio of the reduction gearings for the position

transmitter, the complete resistance range is not always
utilized for the whole travel. Therefore, an external
possibility for adjustment (setting potentiometer) must be
provided.

. Perform fine-tuning of the zero point at external setting potentiometer

(for remote indication).

Figure N: Control unit

E2

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 215/458 21

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

15. Setting of electronic position transmitter RWG (option)

For remote indication or external control

After mounting the multi-turn actuator to the valve, check setting by

measuring the output current (see subclauses 15.1 or 15.2) and re-adjust, if
necessary.

Table 6: Technical data RWG 4020

MSP...KMS TP_ _ 4 / _ _ _ MSP...KMS TP _ 4 _ / _ _ _
Wiring diagrams
MSP...KMS TP _ 5 _ / _ _ _
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current Ia 0 20 mA, 4 20 mA 4 20 mA
Power supply 24 V DC, 15 % 14 V DC + (I x RB),
Uv
smoothed max. 30 V
Max. current I 24 mA at 20 mA 20 mA
input output current
Max. load RB 600 (Uv - 14 V) / 20 mA

The position transmitter board (figure P-1) is located under the cover plate
(figure P-2).

Figure P-1: Position transmitter board

22 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 216/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

15.1 Setting for 2-wire system 4 - 20 mA and 3- /4-wire system 0 20 mA

.. Connect voltage to electronic position transmitter.

.. Move valve to end position CLOSED.

If installed, pull off indicator disc.
Connect ammeter for 0 20 mA to measuring points (figure P-2).

The circuit (external load) must be connected

(max. load RB), or the appropriate poles at the terminals
(refer to wiring diagram) must be linked, otherwise no
value can be measured.

.. Turn potentiometer (E2) clockwise to the stop.

Turn potentiometer (E2) slightly back from the stop.
Figure P-2 0 (0/4 mA) max. (20 mA)

Cover plate

E2

Meas. point (+) Meas. point ()

0/4 20 mA 0/4 20 mA

.. Turn potentiometer 0 clockwise until output current starts to increase.

Turn potentiometer 0 back until the following value is reached:
for 3- or 4-wire system: approx. 0.1 mA
for 2-wire system: approx. 4.1 mA.

.. This ensures that the signal remains above the dead and live zero point.
Move valve to end position OPEN.

. Set potentiometer max. to end value 20 mA.

Approach end position CLOSED anew and check minimum value
(0.1 mA or 4.1 mA). If necessary, correct the setting.

If the maximum value can not be reached, the selection of

the reduction gearing must be checked.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 217/458 23

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

..
15.2 Setting for 3-/ 4- wire system 4 20 mA
Connect voltage to electronic position transmitter.

..
Move valve to end position CLOSED.
If installed, pull off indicator disc.
Connect ammeter for 0 20 mA to measuring points (figure P-2).

The circuit (external load) must be connected

(max. load RB), or the appropriate poles at the terminals
(refer to wiring diagram) must be linked, otherwise no
value can be measured.

.. Turn potentiometer (E2) clockwise to the stop.

Turn potentiometer (E2) slightly back from the stop.
Figure P-2
0 (0/4 mA) max. (20 mA)

Cover plate

E2

Meas. point (+) Meas. point ()

0/4 20 mA 0/4 mA 20 mA

.. Turn potentiometer 0 clockwise until output current starts to increase.

Turn back potentiometer 0 until a residual current of approx. 0.1 mA

.. is reached.
Move valve to end position OPEN.

.. Set potentiometer max. to end value 16 mA.

Move valve to end position CLOSED.
Set potentiometer 0 from 0.1 mA to initial value 4 mA.
This results in a simultaneous shift of the end value by 4 mA, so that the

. range is now 4 20 mA.

Approach both end positions anew and check setting. If necessary, correct
the setting.

If the maximum value cannot be reached, the selection of the

reduction gearing must be checked.

24 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 218/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

16. Setting the mechanical position indicator (option)

A suitable reduction gearing was installed in our works. If the turns per
stroke are changed at a later date, the reduction gearing may have to be
exchanged, too.

.. Place indicator disc on shaft.

. Move valve to end position CLOSED.

Turn lower indicator disc (figure Q-1) until symbol CLOSED is in

.. alignment with the mark on the cover (figure Q-2).

Move actuator to end position OPEN.
Hold lower indicator disc CLOSED in position and turn upper disc with
symbol OPEN until it is in alignment with the mark on the cover.
Figure Q-1: Figure Q-2:

Indicator disc

Mark

Indicator disc rotates by approximately 180 at full travel from OPEN to

CLOSED or vice versa.

17. Closing the switch compartment

.. Clean sealing faces of housing and cover

.. Check whether O-ring is in good condition.

Apply a thin film of non-acidic grease to the sealing faces.
Replace cover on switch compartment and fasten bolts evenly crosswise.

After commissioning, check for damage to paint finish of

multi-turn actuator. If damage to paint-finish has occurred
after mounting, they have to be touched up to avoid
corrosion.

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 219/458 25

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

18. Actuator controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1

Figure R-1: Positions of the boards within the controls

Cover

Timer board
(option)
Cover plate
Interface board

Logic board

Positioner board
(option)

18.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version)

V14 is illuminated: Phase failure and/or motor protection tripped, reset by

selector switch position III at local controls
V15 is illuminated: Torque fault: Torque switch operated in mid-travel

The LEDs STOP, CLOSE, OPEN indicate the available control commands
(only in selector switch position REMOTE).

Figure R-2: Cover plate on interface board

26 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 220/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

18.2 Programming the logic board

The type of seating - limit or torque seating - (switch S1-2 and switch S3-2,
figure R-3) must be determined by the valve manufacturer.

Figure R-3: Logic board A2

Position 1:
Limit seating
in end position OPEN

Position 2:
Torque seating
in end position OPEN
S3-2

S2-2
Position 1:
Limit seating
S1-2 in end position CLOSED

Position 2:
Torque seating
in end position CLOSED

. Set desired programming according to table 7 at the switch S2-2.

Table 7

DIP switch S2-2 Programming

(ON = pressed)
Direction CLOSED Direction OPEN

Self-retaining REMOTE

Push-to-run operation REMOTE

Self-retaining LOCAL

Push-to-run operation LOCAL

activated deactivated
Blinker transmitter (option)

Torque fault: Torque switch available not available

operated in mid travel within
collective fault signal

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 221/458 27

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

18.3 EMERGENCY OPEN and EMERGENCY CLOSE signal (option)

(5th digit in wiring diagram MSP ... C, D or P)

When an EMERGENCY run command is given the actuator operates the

valve to the predetermined
end position (effective in all three selector switch positions:
LOCAL, OFF, REMOTE).

. The input at terminal XK 1 (refer to wiring diagram) must be connected to

. an NC-contact (closed circuit principle) at + 24 V DC.

If EMERGENCY OPEN or EMERGENCY CLOSE signal is generally not
desired: Take off cover plate and disconnect links B1 (for EMERGENCY
CLOSE) and B2 (for EMERGENCY OPEN).

Figure R-4: Cover plate for option EMERGENCY OPEN or EMERGENCY CLOSE
Links: B1(EMERGENCY CLOSE) LED for EMERGENCY
B2 (EMERGENCY OPEN) run command

B2
B1

28 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 222/458


Operation instructions
19. Electronic positioner (option)
19.1 Technical data
19.2 Programming
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
Table 8: Technical data for positioner
Command signal (input signal E1, set value) 0/4 20 mA (option: 0 5 V)
Control variable (input signal E2, nominal value) 0/4 20 mA (option: 0 5 V)
Sensitivity (dead band) E (P9) 0.5 % 2.5 %
Fine tuning Sens (P7)
min 0.25 %
(only useful for output speeds <16 rpm)
Pause times t-off (P10) 0,5 10 s
Input resistance 250 Ohm
Control with stepping function (not required for control setting):
Running time t-on (P8)
effective up to control difference 25 %; 0.5 15 s
pre-set value drops then by factor 3.
The positioner in the actuator controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 is programmed
according to the purchase order details and is set together with the actuator
prior to delivery.
Due to peculiarities of the regulating system not known beforehand, a
readjustment may become necessary. Before adjusting the positioner, the
programming of the positioner should be checked.
. Check programming of the logic board according to subclause 18.2.
The self-retaining REMOTE function (see table 7) must be
switched off in conjunction with the positioner.
. Take off cover plate (figure S1) and carry out required programming at
positioner board (figure S2) according to tables 9 and 10.
Prior to setting it must be ensured that the circuit for the
position feedback E2 (see wiring diagram) is closed
(measuring device or link). If the signal E2 is missing, the
LED (V10) E1/E2 < 4 mA (figure S1) is on and the
positioner does not respond.
Figure S1: Cover plate for positioner
Label with signal indication
in our example: E1 = 4 20 mA, E2 = 4 20 mA)
V10 (red)
P10
P8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 223/458 29
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

Figure S2: Positioner board A7

P9 (E) S2-7
P7 (Sens) S3-7
P3 (0)
P4 (max)

V28
V27
Meas- V18
points: V10

E1{MP4()
MP3(+) P10
E2{
MP2(+)
MP1()

S1-7

19.2.1 Setting the type of signal
The signal type (current/ voltage signal) of nominal value E1 and actual
value E2 is set in the factory and marked with a label on the cover plate of
the positioner (refer to figure S1).
If the setting is subject to a subsequent change, the marking also has to be
changed. Furthermore the wiring diagram indicated on the name plate of the
actuator controls also changes (see page 48).

Table 9: Possible settings

Programming
Command signal Feedback via DIP switch S1-7
Nominal value E1 Actual value E21) (refer to figure S2)
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
0 20 mA 0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA

05V 05V

4 20 mA
0 10 V
0 20 mA

0 10 V 05V

1) Signals for internal feedback:

0/4 20 mA from electronic positioner or 0 5 V from precision potentiometer 5 k

30 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 224/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

19.2.2 Setting actuator behaviour on loss of signal

In case of a loss of signal of nominal value E1 or actual value E2, the

reaction of the actuator can be programmed via the switch S2-7. The
complete range of choices, however, is only available with signals 4 - 20
mA.

The following reactions are possible:

Fail as is:
Actuator stops immediately and remains in this position.
Fail close
Actuator moves the valve to the end position CLOSED.
Fail open:
Actuator moves the valve to the end position OPEN.

Table 10: Possible settings (recommended settings are shaded in grey)

Behaviour in case of loss of signal of Prerequisite1) Programming

E1 E2 Command signal Feedback via DIP switch S2-7
nominal value E1 Actual value E22) (refer to figure S2)

fail as is 4 20 mA 4 20 mA

4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V

4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail open
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V

fail as is fail open 4 20 mA 05V

4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA

fail close fail open 0 20 mA 4 20 mA

0 20 mA
0 20 mA
05V
05V
0 10 V

0 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close fail as is
0 10 V 4 20 mA

1) During loss of signal, signals from 0 20 mA and 0 5 V may be misinterpreted since E1 or E2 (without any fault) can also be < 4 mA (end position CLOSED =
0 mA or 0 V), when working properly.
2) Signals for internal feedback:
0/4 20 mA from electronic positioner or 0 5 V from precision potentiometer 5 k

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 225/458 31

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

19.3 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (standard version)

Before beginning the setting of the positioner, it has to be

ensured that the limit and torque switching of the actuator
as well as the feedback have been set (clauses 14. and 15.).

.. Set selector switch (local controls) to position LOCAL.

Move multi-turn actuator by pressing push-button to end position

.. CLOSED.
Supply nominal value E1 of 0 or 4 mA (see wiring diagram).
Turn potentiometer t-off (P10) counterclockwise to the stop
(figure S1).

Missing signals E1/ E2 or wrong polarity are indicated by

LED (V10) E1/E2 < 4 mA (figures S1 or S2)

. Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 (figure S2) for
measuring the nominal value (0 5 V).
For a nominal value E1 of 0 mA the voltmeter shows 0 V.
For a nominal value E1 of 4 mA the voltmeter shows 1 V.
In case nominal value (0 V or 1 V) is not correct:

. Correct nominal value signal in control room.

Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring the
actual value signal. For an actual value E2 of 0 mA the voltmeter shows
0 V. For an actual value E2 of 4 mA the voltmeter shows 1 V.
If measured value is not correct:
Adjust position feedback according to clauses 14. and 15. and repeat
positioner adjustment.

Table 11

Possible LED display: Required setting in end stop CLOSED:

(refer to figures S3 and S4) (refer to figures S3 and S4)
Turn potentiometer 0 (P3) slightly clockwise until LED (V27 yellow)
LEDs are not illuminated
is illuminated.
Then

Turn potentiometer 0 (P3) slightly clockwise until LED (V28 green)

LED (V28 green) illuminated
goes out and LED (V27 yellow is illuminated.
If

Turn potentiometer 0 (P3) counterclockwise until LED (V27

LED (V27 yellow) illuminated yellow) is no longer illuminated. Then, turn potentiometer 0 (P3) slightly
clockwise until the LED (V27 yellow) is illuminated again.

Figure S2: Positioner board A7

P9 (E) S2-7
P7 (Sens) S3-7
P3 (0)
P4 (max)

V28
V27
Meas. V18
points: V10

{
MP4()
E1 MP3(+)
P10
{
MP2(+)
E2 MP1()

S1-7

32 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 226/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

19.4 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (standard version)

. Run multi-turn actuator by pressing push-button (local controls) to

. end position OPEN.

Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring of
the actual value E2:
When position feedback is set correctly the voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not correct:
Adjust position feedback according to clause 14. and 15. and repeat

.. positioner adjustment.
Connect max. command signal (nominal value E1) = 20 mA.
Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 for measuring the
nominal value E1:
For a nominal value of 20 mA the voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not 5 V:
Check the externally supplied command signal E1.

Table 12

LED display: Required setting in end stop OPEN:

(refer to figures S3 and S4) (refer to figures S3 und S4)
Turn potentiometer max (P4) slightly counterclockwise until
LEDs are not illuminated
LED (V28 green) is illuminated.
Then

Turn potentiometer max (P4) clockwise until LED (V28 green) is no

LED (V28 green) illuminated longer illuminated. Then, turn potentiometer max (P4) slightly
If

counterclockwise until LED (V28 green) is illuminated again.

Turn potentiometer max (P4) slightly counterclockwise until LED
LED (V27 yellow) illuminated
(V27 yellow) goes out and LED (V28 green) is illuminated.

19.5 Setting of the sensitivity .. Set selector switch at the local controls to position REMOTE.
Set command signal E1 according to label on cover plate
(see figure S1).
The sensitivity (E / dead band) is set to maximum value (2.5 %) in the

. factory.
With the potentiometer E (P9) the dead band can be increased by
turning clockwise. Left stop = small dead band (= high sensitivity). For a
precise setting of the dead band, a set point device with setting options in

. the 0.1 mA range is required.

-1
For actuators with n < 16 min , a better sensitivity (Emin= 0.25 %) can be
achieved by turning the potentiometer P7 (sens) clockwise.

When setting E, the following must imperatively be

observed: Excessive number of starts leads to unnecessary
wear on both, valve and actuator. Therefore, the maximum
possible sensitivity (dead band) acceptable for the process
must be set.

To prevent exceeding the max. permissible number of starts (refer to

Technical data sheet SARExC) in extreme cases, a pause time between
0.5 s (left stop) and 10s (right stop) may be set using the potentiometer
t-off (P10).

Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 227/458 33

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions

Figure S1: Cover plate for positioner

Label with signal indication

(in our example: E1 = 4 20 mA, E2 = 4 20 mA)

V28 (green)
V27 (yellow)
V18 (red)
V10 (red)

P10

Figure S2: Positioner board A7

P9 (E) S2-7
P7 (Sens) S3-7
P3 (0)
P4 (max)

V28
V27
Meas. V18
points: V10

{
E1 MP4()
MP3(+) P10
{
E2 MP2(+)
MP1()

S1-7

34 Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 228/458

 Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1

19.6 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (inverse operation)

In standard version the maximum input signal (E1 = 20 mA) results in

.
operation to end position OPEN.
By switching the code switch S3-7 (figure S2) to position 1" an inversion

. of this signal definition (inverse operation) can be achieved.

In case an RWG (option) is installed, the connections 7 (red) and 5 (black)

. on the positioner board (figure P-1) of the actuator have to be exchanged.

In case a potentiometer is installed (option), the connections 21 (red) and
22 (black) at the potentiometer must be in